Skip to main content

Full text of "Great Known (1928) [Harmonic Series, 1928 Editions]"

See other formats


NOWN 


%e  Pkilosopkj  of  IijdMual Lije 


Addressed  to 
The  Progressive  Intelligence  of  the  Age 


The  Great  Work 

By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK. 

Vol.    Ill 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


This  book  carries  a  hope,  a  message,  a  suggestion 
and  a  warning  to  all  who  are  honestly,  patiently 
and  persistently  seeking  to  prove  that  Death  does 
not  end  all. 

It  shows  that  there  is  a  great  difference  between 
Belief  and  Real  Knowledge,  and  proves  that  mere 
beliefs  are  not  of  any  value  to  the  one  who  would 
prove  that  there  is  a  life  beyond  the  grave.  He 
must  Know  and  Do,  and  this  book  points  the  way. 

It  is  unique  in  that  its  statements  are  verified 
facts  which  every  reader  may  prove  for  himself 
under  right  guidance,  if  he  but  have  the  "Intelli- 
gence to  know,  the  Courage  to  dare,  and  the  Per- 
severance to  do." 

The  philosophy  taught  in  this  book  appeals  to 
both  Reason  and  Conscience,  and  is  an  inspiration 
to  "Live  the  Life  and  Know  the  Law." 

The  science  and  philosophy  it  presents  agree  in 
all  essentials  with  the  demonstrated  facts  of  mod- 
ern physicial  science,  but  go  beyond  them  into  the 
realm  of  the  Spiritual  World.  There  it  presents 
an  entirely  new  field  of  personally  demonstrated 
facts,  which  enlarges  the  scope  of  hitherto  accepted 
science,  and  points  the  way  to  new  discoveries. 

In  this,  as  in  any  other  science,  the  investigator 
is  confronted  with  certain  definite  propositions  and 
is  given  a  working  formula  for  their  solution.  In 
this,  as  in  any  other  science,  successful  solution 
depends  chiefly  upon  the  individual  ability,  capac- 
ity and  character  of  the  student. 


$3.«) 


T 


HE/- 

pREAT 


NOWN 


The  Great  Known 


Volume  IV 

HARMONIC  SERIES 

Revised  Edition 


By 
J.  E.  RICHARDSON 


Author  of 

Volumes  II,  III,  and  V, 

HARMONIC   SERIES, 

and 

Editor  of  Volume  I 


THE  GREAT  SCHOOL 
OF  NATURAL  SCIENCE 


Copyright,  1928 

by 

J.  E.  RICHARDSON 


Published  May,  1928 


ADDRESSED  TO 
THE  PROGRESSIVE  INTELLIGENCE  OF  THE  AGE 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 


PACK 

WHAT    SCIENCE   KNOWS _ 

I 

9 

FACTS   OF   NATURE 

II 

11 

FACTS   DEMONSTRATED 

III 

25 

THIRTEEN  PLANES  

IV 

41 

GRAVITY  - 

V 

49 

MUSIC  OF  THE  SPHERES - 

VI 

67 

SPIRITUAL  TRANSITIONS    

VII 

75 

SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  AND  COLOR 

.......       VIII 

85 

SPIRITUAL  PENALTIES 

IX 

93 

SPIRITUAL  SOCIOLOGY    

X 

103 

SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION _ 

XI 

111 

SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION    — 

XII 

125 

SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 

XIII 

137 

SPIRITUAL  GOVERNMENT    

XIV 

149 

SPIRITUAL  WARS    .- 

XV 

159 

SPIRITUAL  ANIMALS                          .    . 

XVI 

171 

SLEEP  __ 

XVII 

177 

DREAMS  _ - 

XVIII 

187 

PROPHECY _ 

XIX 

199 

GUARDIAN  ANGELS  _ „. 

XX 

207 

THE  BREATH  OF  LIFE _ 

XXI 

217 

CHILDREN 

XXII 

223 

SOUL  AND  SEX - _ 

XXIII 

239 

WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

XXIV 

247 

SUSPENDED  ANIMATION  

XXV 

261 

WHEN   DEATH   ENDS - 

XXVI 

267 

PSYCHIC  EFFECTS  OF  SUICIDE 

XXVII 

273 

CREMATION 

JiXVIII 

281 

MOURNING    

XXIX 

295 

REINCARNATION    

XXX 

309 

HELL    _ 

XXXI 

325 

DIVINITY    

XXXII 

333 

GOD  OR  NATURE 

XXXIII 

345 

THEORIES   OF  THE  WISE  MEN 

Genesis    of    Dogma 

Unsolved   Problems  ~ _ 

357 
373 

THE  GREAT  KNOWN 


'Fools  Deride,  Philosophers  Investigate' 


CHAPTER  I 


WHAT  SCIENCE  KNOWS 


1.  Physical  Science  knows  that  Man  has 
a  physical  body. 

2.  Spiritual  Science  knows  that  Man  has 
a  physical  body  and  a  spiritual  body. 

3.  Natural  Science  knows  that  the  phys- 
ical body  and  the  spiritual  body  are  the  in- 
struments through  which  the  Soul  of  Man 
expresses  itself  on  the  physical  and  the  spir- 
itual planes  of  life. 


CHAPTER  II 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 


Human  Intelligence  has  identified,  veri- 
fied and  acknowledged  certain  ''Facts  of 
Nature"  concerning  the  "Spiritual  World." 

Since  all  Knowledge  is  based  upon  the 
''Facts  of  Nature/'  and  our  theme  has  to  do 
with  Knowledge  of  the  Spiritual  World,  it  is 
clear  that  the  Spiritual  World  is  a  world 
which  exists  within  the  realm  of  "Nature." 
Hence,  whatever  Knowledge  Science  has  ac- 
cumulated concerning  the  Spiritual  World, 
has  to  do  with  the  "Facts  of  Nature"  related 
to  that  Spiritual  World. 

This  means  that  the  Spiritual  World  is  as 
much  a  part  of  Nature  as  the  physical  world 
which  is  so  familiar  to  us  all. 

Hence  the  Spiritual  World  is  not  an  UN- 
natural  world.  Neither  is  it  a  SUPER-natural 
world.  It  is  strictly  and  literally  a  "Nat- 
ural" world,  and  all  the  "Facts"  concerning 
it  are  ''Facts  of  Nature!' 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Let  it  be  remembered,  therefore,  that  Sci- 
ence is  not  presuming  when  it  extends  its 
scientific  inquiries  into  the  realm  of  Nature 
called  "Spiritual."  Neither  is  it  transcending 
the  scope  of  its  legitimate  activities  and  en- 
deavors when  it  seeks  to  identify  and  verify 
the  Facts  of  Nature  in  this  broader  field  of 
scientific  inquiry. 

It  is  but  extending  the  lines  of  its  scientific 
inquiry  one  single  step  beyond  the  limits  of 
that  department  of  Nature  called  Physical. 

Physical  Science  is  seeking  knowledge  of 
the  facts  of  physical  Nature.  It  knows  noth- 
ing of  any  other  facts  of  Nature.  It  does  not 
care  to  know,  because  it  assumes  that  all  the 
facts  of  Nature  are  physical  facts.  Its 
methods,  therefore,  are  strictly  and  exclu- 
sively physical.  It  deals  only  with  physical 
matter,  physical  forces,  physical  activities 
and  physical  processes.  The  instruments  it 
employs  in  the  accumulation  of  its  scientific 
data  are  physical  instruments.  The  knowl- 
edge it  acquires  is  limited  to  the  facts  of 
physical  Nature.  Its  researches  are  limited 
to  the  plane  of  the  Physical  World.  Its 
findings  are  acknowledged  as  having  author- 

12 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 

ity  and  value  only  in  the  realm  of  Physical 
Nature.  It  refuses  to  admit,  as  of  scientific 
value,  any  evidence  other  than  that  which  it 
can  measure  and  determine  by  the  physical 
instruments  at  its  command.  Hence,  it  fully 
justifies  its  name  as  the  "School  of  Physical 
Science." 

Spiritual  Science  is  seeking  knowledge  of 
the  facts  of  spiritual  Nature.  While  it  rec- 
ognizes the  existence  of  a  physical  world, 
also  a  science  which  concerns  itself  with  the 
facts  of  Nature  in  that  physical  world,  it 
assumes  that  the  physical  world  is  so  remote 
from  the  spiritual  that  the  facts  of  Nature 
in  the  one  are  in  no  wise  related  to  those  in 
the  other.  It  recognizes  that  the  instruments 
and  methods  of  physical  science  do  not  an- 
swer the  requirements  of  spiritual  demon- 
stration. Hence,  it  finds  no  possible  basis 
of  co-operative  endeavor  between  the  two 
schools. 

Spiritual  Science  makes  its  appeal  to  in- 
dividual human  consciousness  through  the 
channels  of  the  five  spiritual  senses.  It  con- 
cerns itself,  scientifically,  with  the  facts  of 
Nature  in  the  realm  of  spiritual  things.     Its 

IS 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

methods,  therefore,  are  strictly  and  exclu- 
sively spiritual.  The  knowledge  it  acquires 
has  to  do  with  the  facts  of  Spiritual  Nature. 
Its  findings  have  no  value  or  authority  with 
the  school  of  physical  science.  Its  researches 
are  limited  to  the  plane  of  Spiritual  Nature. 
It  deals  only  with  spiritual  matter,  spiritual 
forces,  spiritual  activities  and  spiritual  proc- 
esses. Hence,  it  justifies  its  name  as  a 
"School  of  Spiritual  Science." 

Natural  Science  is  seeking  knowledge  of 
the  facts  of  Nature  in  all  the  departments 
and  phases  of  Nature,  physical,  spiritual  and 
psychical.  It  recognizes  the  existence  of  a 
physical  world  whose  substance,  forces,  ac- 
tivities and  processes  constitute  a  natural  and 
legitimate  basis  for  the  development  of  exact 
physical  science.  It  recognizes  also  the  ex- 
istence of  a  finer  world  of  spiritual  material 
which  constitutes  the  natural  and  legitimate 
basis  for  the  development  of  an  exact  spir- 
itual science.  But  it  has  demonstrated  an- 
other great  Fact  of  Nature  which  is  so  related 
to  these  two  worlds  of  Nature  as  to  constitute 
a  natural  bridge  between  them. 

It  has  discovered  that  the  physical  world 

14 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 

and  the  spiritual  world  are  not  so  remote 
from  each  other  as  to  be  scientifically  unre- 
lated. It  has  discovered  that,  in  point  of 
their  degree  of  refinement  and  activity,  there 
Is  a  harmonic  relation  betv^een  the  world  of 
physical  material  and  the  world  of  spiritual 
material  which  makes  them  interdependent 
and  co-existent.  It  has  discovered  that  the 
instruments  and  methods  employed  in  the 
world  of  physical  material,  to  determine  exact 
scientific  physical  results,  are  not  sufficiently 
refined  to  serve  the  same  purpose  in  the  world 
of  spiritual  material.  It  has  discovered  that 
the  instruments  and  methods  employed  in  the 
world  of  spiritual  material,  to  determine  ex- 
act scientific  spiritual  results,  are  too  refined 
to  serve  the  same  purpose  in  the  world  of 
physical  material. 

Its  methods,  therefore,  include  those  of 
physical  science,  insofar  as  they  have  to  do 
with  the  facts  of  physical  nature,  and  they 
likewise  include  those  of  spiritual  science  in- 
sofar as  they  have  to  do  with  the  facts  of  spir- 
itual nature.  It  recognizes  the  existence  of 
physical  matter,  physical  forces,  physical  ac- 
tivities and  physical  processes.   It  admits  also 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  necessity  of  physical  instruments  in  the 
department  of  physical  science.  It  recog- 
nizes also  the  existence  of  spiritual  matter, 
spiritual  forces,  spiritual  activities  and  spir- 
itual processes. 

Natural  Science,  which  seeks  knowledge  of 
all  the  departments  of  Nature,  is  the  friendly 
ally  of  both  physical  science  on  the  one  hand 
and  spiritual  science  on  the  other.  It  de- 
sires to  co-operate  with  both  these  schools 
and  bring  them  into  a  friendly  attitude  of 
tolerance  and  mutual  endeavor  in  the  greater 
interests  of  humanity.  It  realizes  that  each 
of  these  two  schools  of  science  has  set  for  it- 
self certain  arbitrary  limitations  which  mark 
the  boundaries  of  its  legitimate  field  of  in- 
quiry. These  boundaries,  in  each  instance, 
are  so  definite  and  distinct  that  whatever 
oversteps  them  is  immediately  ruled  out  as 
unscientific  and,  hence,  unworthy  of  consid- 
eration. This  attitude  leaves  virtually  no 
room  for  voluntary  mutual  approach  by  and 
between  them.  It  leaves  little  or  no  hope  of 
bridging  the  chasm  which  divides  the  two 
schools  at  the  present  time. 

With   all  the  knowledge  of  the   Masters 

u 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 

upon  the  subject,  they  have  never,  so  far,  been 
able  to  reduce  the  scientific  solution  to  a 
purely  physical  basis.  They  are  willing  to 
concede  that,  so  far  as  they  are  concerned, 
such  a  purely  physical  solution  is  impossible 
to  one  yet  in  the  physical  body. 

The  Masters,  during  their  study  of  the 
Great  Problems,  and  their  continued  search 
for  a  definite  method  of  solution,  discovered 
the  fact  that,  through  a  rigorous  course  of 
self-discipline  and  contemplation  of  a  higher 
and  finer  life,  they  were  able  to  develop  a 
higher  and  a  finer  set  of  senses,  through 
which  they  were  able  to  come  into  conscious 
relation  with  a  finer  world  of  material  than 
that  of  the  purely  physical.  They  designated 
these  finer  senses  "Spiritual  Senses,"  to  dis- 
tinguish them  from  the  ''physical  senses."  The 
world  into  which  they  were  able  to  penetrate 
consciously  through  these  finer  senses,  they 
called  a  ''spiritual  world."  Thus  began  the 
scientific  solution  of  the  great  problem  of 
another  life  in  a  finer  world  of  matter.  And 
thus  began  the  accumulation  of  definite 
knowledge  concerning  that  finer  life  and 
vTorld. 

17 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

By  their  continued  work  and  experiment, 
which  all  scientific  research  involves,  the 
Masters  learned  that  there  is  an  exact  and 
definite  method  and  process  of  Nature,  by 
and  through  which  anyone  who  has  the  in- 
telligence to  receive  the  Instruction,  the  cour- 
age to  apply  it  to  the  living  of  his  own  life 
in  a  right  way,  and  the  perseverance  to  con- 
tinue his  endeavors  far  enough  to  comply 
with  Nature's  demands,  can  develop  his  own 
spiritual  senses  until  he  is  able  to  sense  and 
experience  the  Spiritual  World  as  perfectly 
and  independently  as  he  can  sense  and  ex- 
perience this  physical  world. 

Through  their  continued  accumulation  and 
expansion  of  their  knowledge  through  per- 
sonal experience,  they  finally  made  the  great 
discovery  that  there  is  a  Moral  Order  of 
Nature;  and  that  it  is  directly  related  to  the 
method  and  process  by  which  an  individual 
may  develop  his  own  Spiritual  senses  and 
discover  the  spiritual  world  for  himself. 

If  he  keeps  faith  with  Nature,  and  lives 
his  life  in  harmony  with  her  Constructive 
Principle,  her  reward  is  inevitable,  which  is 
his  Spiritual  Unfoldment  and  Soul  Growth. 

18 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 

If  he  fails  to  keep  faith  with  Nature,  and 
refuses  to  live  his  life  in  harmony  with  the 
Moral  Law,  he  reverses  the  process  of  spir- 
itual unfoldment  and  bars  the  way  to  his 
own  Mastership.  He  will  thus  never  be  able 
to  make  the  scientific  demonstration  of  the 
Great  Problem  this  side  the  grave. 

The  methods  of  the  Great  School  of  Nat- 
ural Science  adapt  themselves  to  the  normal 
development  of  the  individual  human  being 
in  such  manner  as  to  enable  him  to  retain 
full  and  complete  control  of  all  of  his  sense 
channels,  both  physical  and  spiritual, 
throughout  his  entire  physical  life,  however 
long  he  may  live.  And,  if  he  has  lost  con- 
trol of  his  spiritual  senses  during  child- 
hood— as  many  do — it  enables  him  to  regain 
them  without  harm  of  any  kind  to  himself 
or  to  others. 

A  part  of  the  Work  of  The  Great  School 
of  Natural  Science,  at  this  time,  is  to  give  to 
the  world  the  benefits  of  such  scientific 
knowledge  as  it  has  accumulated  bearing 
upon  these  subjects,  and  open  the  way  for 
the  co-operation  of  physical  science  and  spir- 
itual science  in  the  work  of  liberating  hu- 

19 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

manity  from  the  bondage  of  Ignorance, 
Superstition  and  Fear. 

Furthermore,  it  is  entirely  within  the  abil- 
ity of  every  individual  who  possesses  the 
necessary  Intelligence,  Courage  and  Per- 
severance to  prove  the  truth  of  every  state- 
ment herein  contained,  provided  he  also 
has  the  necessary  time,  place  and  environ- 
ment for  study  under  proper  and  efficient 
instruction. 

When  Human  Intelligence  has  assembled 
its  knowledge  of  any  given  department  of 
Nature  and  then  classified  it  and  system- 
atized it  until  all  the  identified,  verified  and 
acknowledged  Facts  of  Nature  have  been  set 
in  their  correct  order,  an  exact  "Science"  has 
been  born,  or  evolved. 

Science  is  exact.  It  must  be  exact  to  be 
Science.  In  just  so  far  as  the  scientist  fails  in 
this  element  of  exactness,  he  becomes  the 
sciolist,  and  his  findings  become  sciolism,  in- 
stead of  science.  It  is  the  method  of  the 
Great  School  to  eliminate  every  possible  ele- 
ment of  uncertainty,  and  thus  reduce  its  work 
to  the  only  absolute  basis  of  exact  science. 
If  it  should  fail  m  this  it  would  no  longer 

20 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 

be  entitled  to  the  confidence  of  those  who 
rely  upon  its  findings.  But  it  invites  to  its 
work  the  rigid  application  of  every  possible 
test,  and  is  ever  ready  to  abide  by  the  results. 

Knowledge:  Facts  of  Nature  identified, 
verified  and  acknowledged  by  Human  Intelli- 
gence. 

The  first  vital  point  to  be  noted  in  this  defi- 
nition is  that  Knowledge  has  to  do  with  the 
"Facts  of  Nature:' 

The  second  is  that  it  does  not  include  all 
the  Facts  of  Nature. 

The  third  is  that  there  is  a  limitation 
which  is  as  fixed  and  definite  as  are  the  limi- 
tations of  "Human  Intelligence." 

Only  such  of  the  Facts  of  Nature  as  Hu- 
man Intelligence  has  been  able  to  identify, 
as  such,  are  covered  by  the  definition. 

Only  such  of  these  identified  Facts  of  Na- 
ture as  Human  Intelligence  has  been  able  to 
verify,  are  to  be  included  in  the  definition. 

And  finally,  only  such  of  the  Facts  of  Na- 
ture as  have  been  identified,  as  such,  then 
verified  as  having  been  correctly  identified, 
and  finally  acknowledged  by  Human  Intelli- 
gence to  exist  as  identified  and  verified,  must 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

be  incorporated  in  the  great  body  of  human 
Knowledge. 

From  this  analysis  it  will  be  observed  that 
the  sum  of  human  knowledge  is  a  fixed  and 
definite  thing  only  at  any  given  instant  of 
time. 

In  other  words,  it  is  an  ever-evolving  and 
growing  body.  For,  while  at  any  given  in- 
stant of  time  its  limits  are  definite,  the  next 
instant  some  new  Fact  of  Nature  may  be 
identified,  verified  and  acknowledged  by  Hu- 
man Intelligence,  and  the  sum  of  Human 
Knowledge  thus  increased  by  one  new  Fact. 

To  what  extent  the  possibilities  of  Human 
Intelligence  may  carry  this  evolution  of  its 
Knowledge,  doth  not  yet  appear.  Who  shall 
fix  the  evolutionary  limits  of  Human  Intel- 
ligence, or  the  growth  of  its  Knowledge? 
Who  shall  dare  to  say:  "Thus  far  shalt  thou 
go,  and  no  farther"?  Who  shall  dare  to  say 
that  the  growth  of  Human  Knowledge  shall 
stop  short  of  ALL  THE  Facts  of  Nature? 
Let  him  who  can,  answer. 

An  important  point,  however,  must  be 
kept  forever  in  mind,  namely,  that  if  Human 
Intelligence  should  be  at  fault  in  any  phase 

22 


FACTS  OF  NATURE 

of  its  endeavors,  in  either  its  identification, 
its  verification,  or  its  acknowledgment  of  any 
Fact  of  Nature,  the  immediate  and  inevit- 
able result  is  to  destroy,  or  cripple,  the 
scientific  value  of  its  findings. 

And  herein  is  where  our  modern  so-called 
"Exact  Science"  so  often  fails  to  justify  its 
designation,  or  name.  Men  of  science  have 
not  always  differentiated  between  their  so- 
called  "Facts"  and  their  "Assumptions." 
Wherever  this  discrepancy  has  crept  in,  the 
scientist  has  fallen  short  in  the  vital  element 
of  "exactness."  He  has  misled  those  who 
have  trusted  him  and  oftentimes  has  confused 
himself  and  become  utterly  lost  in  the  fog  of 
his  own  uncertainty. 

In  our  search  for  Knowledge  we  are  seek- 
ing to  identify  the  Facts  of  Nature  as  they 
exist. 

In  our  search  for  Truth  we  are  seeking  to 
know  the  established  relation  which  these 
identified  Facts  of  Nature  sustain  to  each 
other  and  to  Individual  Human  Intelligence. 

This  differentiation  between  Knowledge 
and  Truth  is  important  and  should  not  be 
ignored  nor  lost  sight  of  by  the  student  who 

23 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

seeks  to  become  a  demonstrator  of  the  Law. 

Knowledge  has  to  do  with  Facts. 

Truth  has  to  do  with  the  Relation  these 
Facts  sustain  to  each  other  and  to  ourselves  as 
Individual  Intelligences. 


CHAPTER  III 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 


It  is  an  accepted  rule  of  logic  that  if  a 
premise  be  false,  any  conclusion  based  upon 
the  assumption  of  its  truth  must  be  regarded 
as  unreliable.  It  should,  to  say  the  least,  be 
regarded  as  unscientific. 

All  physical  matter,  both  inorganic  and 
organic,  integrates  conjointly  with  a  finer 
ethereal  or  spiritual  pattern,  in  such  manner 
as  to  constitute  what  may  properly  be  termed 
a  double  material  entity. 

No  attempt  will  be  made  here  to  account 
for  this  phenomenon  of  Nature.  It  simply 
exists  as  one  of  the  established  facts  with 
which  Natural  Science  is  compelled  to  deal. 
As  such  it  forms  an  important  link  in  the 
chain  which  connects  the  two  correlated 
worlds  of  matter,  motion,  number,  life  and 
intelligence. 

In  the  kingdom  of  inorganic  matter  these 
two  bodies   appear  to  be  more  equally  de- 

35 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

pendent,  one  upon  the  other,  than  are  the 
duplicate  bodies  of  organic  matter.  This  is 
more  fully  explained  by  the  facts  which 
follow. 

The  integration  of  a  physical  stone  con- 
jointly with  its  finer  ethereal  pattern  is  of 
such  a  character  that  upon  the  sudden  and 
forced  disintegration  and  dissolution  of  the 
physical  stone  its  finer  ethereal  body,  or  du- 
plicate, remains  intact  for  a  comparatively 
brief  period  of  time. 

In  due  course  of  time,  however,  the  ether- 
eal body  of  the  stone  also  disintegrates,  dis- 
solves, and  to  every  appearance  returns  to  its 
original  elements. 

During  the  time  it  remains  intact  this 
ethereal  body  of  the  stone  is  visible  with  per- 
fect distinctness  to  one  whose  sense  of  sight 
is  keen  enough  to  observe  it. 

In  the  vegetable  kingdom  the  two  material 
bodies  do  not  manifest  the  same  degree  of 
mutual  dependence,  one  upon  the  other,  as 
in  the  mineral  kingdom. 

Upon  the  sudden  disintegration  and  dis- 
solution of  the  physical  body  of  an  oak  tree 
its   ethereal    duplicate   persists   intact   for    a 

26 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

much  longer  period  than  does  the  ethereal 
body  of  the  stone. 

But  in  due  course  of  time  the  ethereal  tree 
also  disintegrates,  dissolves,  disappears  from 
the  magnetic  plane  of  the  vegetable  kingdom, 
and  to  every  appearance  is  resolved  back  into 
its  original  elements. 

In  the  animal  kingdom  the  independence 
of  the  spiritual  body  from  the  physical,  in 
its  power  of  continuity,  is  very  markedly 
increased. 

At  the  period  of  physical  dissolution  of  an 
animal  it  is  clear  (to  one  v^ho  is  able  to  ob- 
serve the  transition)  that  the  spiritual  body 
carries  with  it  (or  accompanies)  the  animat- 
ing principle  of  the  animal  entity.  This  is 
evidenced  by  the  fact  that  during  its  exist- 
ence as  a  spiritual  organism  it  appears  to 
possess  all  the  natural  faculties  and  intelli- 
gent capacities  and  powers  which  belong  to 
the  animal  entity. 

The  animal,  however,  in  due  course  of 
time,  disappears  from  the  spiritual  plane  of 
the  animal  kingdom. 

It  does  not  reappear  (at  least  in  identical 
or  distinguishable   form)    upon   any  of   the 

27 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

spiritual  planes  of  life  which  are  distinctively 
related  to  this  particular  planet. 

In  the  kingdom  of  man  the  transition  we 
call  physical  death  is  even  more  clearly  a 
mere  incident  in  the  life  of  the  soul. 

At  the  moment  of  physical  dissolution  of 
a  man,  woman  or  child,  the  spiritual  body 
separates  from  the  physical  in  a  manner 
which  appears  to  be  identical  with  the  sepa- 
ration of  the  two  bodies  of  the  animal  at  its 
physical  death. 

The  animating  principle  of  the  double  or- 
ganic entity  accompanies  (or  is  accom- 
panied by)  the  spiritual  organism  only, 
when  physical  death  occurs,  and  in  this  re- 
spect the  process  of  dissolution  corresponds, 
in  all  appearance,  with  that  of  the  animal. 

The  spiritual  man,  woman  or  child  per- 
sists intact  upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life 
for  an  indefinite  period  of  time  after  physical 
dissolution,  as  does  the  animal  (with  the  ex- 
ceptions hereinafter  noted). 

Men,  women  and  children  upon  the  spir- 
itual planes  of  life  appear  to  possess  all  the 
natural  faculties  and  intelligent  capacities 
and  powers  with  which  they  were  invested  at 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

and  prior  to  the  time  of  physical  dissolution. 
In  this  respect  also  they  appear  to  acknowl- 
edge the  same  law  which  governs  the  animal. 

But  men,  women  and  children,  in  the 
course  of  the  ages,  disappear  from  the  lowest 
plane  of  the  kingdom  of  spiritual  man,  and 
yet  not  always  in  a  manner  which  is  identi- 
cal with  the  disappearance  of  the  animal 
from  the  spiritual  plane  of  animal  life. 

In  other  words,  man  disappears  from  the 
lowest  plane  of  his  spiritual  life  in  either  of 
two  different  manners  and  by  two  distinctly 
opposite  methods  or  processes. 

That  is  to  say,  under  the  constructive  prin- 
ciple and  process  of  evolution,  growth,  de- 
velopment and  progress,  he  disappears  from 
the  lowest  plane  of  spiritual  life,  only  to 
appear  upon  the  next  higher,  inhabiting  a 
finer  spiritual  organism,  clothed  in  richer 
splendor,  and  in  possession  of  all  the  nat- 
ural faculties  and  intelligent  capacities  and 
powers  with  which  he  was  invested  at  the 
time  of  the  transition,  and  with  the  same  in- 
dividuality. He  is  fully  conscious  of  the 
transition  and  is  able  at  will  to  reappear 
upon  the  lower  plane  through  which  he  has 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

passed,  and  manifest  himself  to  those  who 
have  known  him  there.  In  an  analogous 
manner  he  is  able  to  pass  on  to  higher  planes 
of  spirituality  and  life. 

But  under  the  operation  of  the  opposite 
principle  and  process  of  destruction,  or  devo- 
lution, man  also  disappears  from  the  lowest 
plane  of  his  spiritual  life  in  a  manner  which 
corresponds,  in  every  essential  particular, 
with  the  disappearance  of  the  animal. 

In  this  latter  instance  he  does  not  reappear 
(at  least  in  identical  or  distinguishable 
form)  upon  any  of  the  higher  planes  of  spir- 
itual life  which  are  distinctively  related  to 
this  particular  planet. 

In  the  spiritual  life  man's  ability  to  persist 
and  advance  from  lower  to  higher  planes  of 
existence  is  commensurate  with  his  own  in- 
dependent control  of  all  his  individual  fac- 
ulties, capacities  and  powers,  and  in  response 
to  his  independent,  self-conscious  and  ra- 
tional volition  and  desire  to  so  persist  and 
advance. 

He  obtains  this  control  of  his  individual 
faculties,  capacities  and  powers  only  in  ac- 
cordance  with    his    own    independent,    self- 

30 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

conscious  and  rational  desire  and  will,  and 
through  honest,  intelligent,  courageous  and 
persistent  personal  effort,  in  conformity  with 
Nature's  Constructive  Principle. 

But  in  the  spiritual  life,  as  in  the  physical, 
man  may  fail,  neglect  or  refuse  to  make  the 
effort  necessary  to  obtain  or  exercise  control 
of  his  individual  faculties,  capacities  and 
powers.  Or,  once  having  acquired  such  con- 
trol, he  may  deliberately  surrender  it  to  other 
intelligences,  provided  he  can  find  those  who 
are  willing  to  assume  the  responsibility.  Or 
he  may  knowingly  and  intentionally  prosti- 
tute his  powers  to  dishonest  and  vicious 
purposes. 

In  every  such  instance  he  is  proceeding  in 
conformity  with  Nature's  Destructive  Prin- 
ciple, and  must  pay  the  penalty  which  Na- 
ture exacts  therefor.  The  inevitable  result  is 
retrogression,  involving  a  corresponding  for- 
feiture of  the  power  of  self-control. 

This  retrograde  movement  of  spiritual 
life,  if  persisted  in,  ultimately  leads  to  man's 
disappearance  from  the  lowest  plane  of  his 
spiritual  life. 

In  the  light  of  this  analysis  it  would  ap- 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

pear  that  Paul  knew  what  he  was  talking 
about  when  he  declared  to  the  Corinthians 
in  such  exact  and  unqualified  terms  that: 
"There  is  a  natural  body,  and  there  is  a  spir- 
itual body."  (I  Cor.,  15,  44.)  It  is  also  evi- 
dent that  Christ  fully  understood  the  relation 
of  these  two  bodies  to  the  third  and  highest 
element  in  the  triune  nature  of  man  when  he 
asked  the  searching  and  vital  question:  "For 
what  shall  it  profit  a  man,  if  he  shall  gain 
the  whole  world,  and  lose  his  own  soul?" 
(Mark,  8,  36.) 

It  will  be  understood  that  the  physical 
body  is  but  a  coarser  duplicate  of  the  spir- 
itual, and  that  each  and  every  physical  organ 
has  its  spiritual  duplicate.  There  is  a  spir- 
itual brain  as  well  as  a  physical  brain.  There 
is  a  spiritual  organ  of  sight  as  well  as  a  phys- 
ical one.  There  are  spiritual  organs  of  touch, 
taste,  smell  and  hearing,  just  as  there  are 
physical  organs  of  these  several  senses.  In 
other  words,  for  each  separate  physical  or- 
gan of  the  brain  there  is  a  corresponding 
spiritual  one.  This  being  a  scientific  fact, 
it  will  not  be  difficult  to  understand  its  nat- 
ural corollary,   which   is,  that  under  given 

S2 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

conditions  the  intelligent  soul  which  owns 
and  operates  these  separate  organisms  may 
receive  impressions  through  either  set  of  its 
sensory  organs. 

Natural  Science  has  demonstrated  that 
man,  upon  the  physical  plane,  has  a  physical 
body  with  five  physical  channels  of  sense  and 
a  spiritual  body  with  five  spiritual  channels 
of  sense;  that  through  its  five  physical  sense 
channels  the  individual  consciousness  is  aware 
of  the  existence  of  the  world  of  physical  na- 
ture, and  through  its  five  spiritual  sense 
channels  it  may  become  aware  of  the  existence 
of  the  world  of  spiritual  nature. 

It  has  demonstrated  that  the  five  physical 
senses  are  not  fine  enough  to  sense  the  exist- 
ence of  the  finer  world  of  Spiritual  Matter 
and  Spiritual  Things. 

It  has  demonstrated  that  the  five  spiritual 
senses  are  too  fine  to  sense  the  existence  of  the 
coarser  world  of  Physical  Matter  and  Phys- 
ical Things. 

It  has  proven  that  the  normally  developed 
human  being,  or  Soul,  has  the  power — by  the 
exercise  of  its  Will — to  open  or  close  any  or 
all  of  its  sense  channels,  both  physical  and 

33 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Spiritual.  By  the  exercise  of  its  Will  Power 
it  can  open  the  channels  of  physical  sense, 
and  by  the  exercise  of  that  same  power  it 
can  close  them  again.  By  the  exercise  of  the 
same  Will  Power  it  can  open  the  channels  of 
spiritual  sense,  and  by  the  exercise  of  the 
same  power  it  can  close  them  again.  By  the 
exercise  of  that  same  Will  Power  it  can  open 
the  physical  and  spiritual  channels  of  sense 
simultaneously,  and  thus  sense  both  worlds — 
physical  and  spiritual — at  the  same  time. 

It  has  learned  that  every  normal  human 
infant  is  born  into  this  physical  life  with  all 
its  channels  of  sense,  both  physical  and  spir- 
itual, awake  and  active.  It  has  also  proven 
that,  under  normal  conditions,  the  individual 
may  even  grow  to  manhood,  or  womanhood, 
or  even  to  old  age,  without  losing  the  Power 
of  Will  to  control  all  its  sense  channels,  both 
physical  and  spiritual.  At  the  same  time,  it 
has  learned  that  a  very  large  percentage  of 
human  individuals  lose  conscious  and  volun- 
tary control  of  their  spiritual  senses  and 
powers  during  childhood;  that  some  of  them 
regain  control  of  them  in  their  later  physical 

34 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

life,  and  that  many  never  regain  them  during 
their  entire  physical  life. 

But  man  in  the  physical  body  is  generally 
so  conditioned  that  his  intelligence  operates 
far  more  consciously  through  the  physical 
organism  than  it  does  through  the  spiritual. 
This  is  one  of  the  provisions  of  nature  with 
which  science  must  deal  in  its  solution  of  the 
question  here  under  consideration. 

It  is  also  a  fact  that  wherever  this  condi- 
tion obtains  the  individual  is  concerned  with 
and  absorbed  in  the  impressions  which  reach 
his  consciousness  from  the  physical  world 
only.  The  action  of  the  spiritual  organism, 
however,  is  not  entirely  suspended,  as  might 
be  inferred.  It  is  merely  obscured  or  cov- 
ered up,  as  it  were,  by  that  condition  of  na- 
ture which  fixes  the  attention  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane. 

The  following  illustration  may  serve  to 
present  the  facts  and  the  principle  more 
clearly  to  mind: 

Go  into  one  of  the  large,  steel  manufac- 
turing establishments  of  the  country  while 
the  machinery  is  in  full  operation  and  there 
attempt  to  carry  on  a  conversation  with  a 

35 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

person  twenty  feet  distant  from  you.  How- 
ever much  you  may  both  exert  yourselves 
you  will  be  unable  to  hear  a  word  he  says. 
The  noise  of  the  machinery  and  the  general 
confusion  of  the  factory  will  make  it  impos- 
sible. His  voice  is  drowned  in  the  general 
uproar  and  fails  to  make  a  sufficiently  strong 
impression  upon  your  consciousness  to  be  rec- 
ognized with  distinctness.  You  are  too  busily 
engaged  with  the  various  and  conflicting  im- 
pressions made  upon  your  consciousness  by 
the  thunder,  clang  and  turmoil  of  the  factory. 

But  the  sound  of  the  voice  is  there,  just  the 
same.  More  than  this,  it  even  makes  an  im- 
pression upon  your  sensory  organism.  Why 
then,  do  you  not  recognize  the  fact?  It  is 
only  because  your  consciousness  is  so  pre- 
occupied with  the  more  intense  impressions 
of  the  louder  noises  of  the  factory,  for  the 
time  being,  that  you  fail  to  distinguish  the 
sound  of  the  voice. 

In  a  somewhat  analogous  manner  the 
average  man  seems  to  be  shut  out  and  away 
from  all  conscious  touch  with  the  spiritual 
world.  But  this  is  only  a  seeming  condition, 
for  it  is  not  true  in  fact.     He  is  merely  so 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

absorbed,  for  the  time  being,  in  the  more 
intense  impressions  which  reach  his  con- 
sciousness through  the  physical  senses  that 
the  spiritual  do  not  impress  themselves  upon 
him  with  sufficient  relative  force  to  be  so 
identified  or  distinguished  by  him. 

Carrying  the  illustration  still  further,  it  is 
an  interesting  fact  that  a  worker  in  the  steel 
factory,  in  course  of  time,  trains  his  sense  of 
hearing  to  distinguish  the  sound  of  the 
human  voice  even  in  the  midst  of  the  din 
and  blast  of  the  factory  which  at  first  made 
such  a  thing  impossible.  The  question  nat- 
urally arises  as  to  how  he  acquires  this  re- 
markable power.    The  answer  is  simple. 

It  is  necessary  for  him  to  communicate 
with  his  fellow  workmen  in  some  manner. 
The  only  adequate  means  of  communication 
with  which  he  is  familiar  is  the  sound  of  the 
human  voice.  In  the  midst  of  the  noise  of 
the  factory,  therefore,  he  must  still  depend 
upon  his  sense  of  hearing  and  upon  its  ability 
to  distinguish  the  sound  of  a  human  voice. 
He  unconsciously  begins  a  course  of  system- 
atic training  to  accomplish  the  desired  result. 
He  may  be,  and  generally  is,  wholly  ignor- 

37 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ant  of  the  law  involved.  But,  "Necessity  is 
the  mother  of  invention,"  and  without  know- 
ing it  he  begins  to  train  his  ear  to  the  new 
condition  of  things. 

His  attention  is  constantly  fixed  upon  the 
thing  to  be  accomplished.  His  consciousness 
gradually  responds.  By  the  continued  exer- 
cise of  his  conscious  faculties  and  powers  he 
slowly  but  surely  learns  to  differentiate  be- 
tween the  impressions  which  the  various 
noises  make  upon  his  consciousness.  In 
course  of  time  and  constant  training  his 
power  of  perception  is  intensified  until  the 
human  voice  once  more  distinctly  registers 
its  impressions,  and  to  his  trained  conscious- 
ness stands  out  fully  distinguishable  from  the 
general  turmoil  of  his  environment.  He  has 
simply  developed  his  power  of  attention  to 
the  thing  desired  until  his  consciousness  re- 
sponds to  the  new  demands  thus  made 
upon  it. 

By  a  method  which  is  somewhat  analogous 
to  this  it  is  possible  for  anyone  who  possesses 
the  necessary  Intelligence,  Courage  and  Per- 
severance and  the  right  desire,  together  with 
the  time,  opportunity  and  proper  instruction, 

38 


FACTS  DEMONSTRATED 

to  accustom  his  consciousness  to  take  note  of 
the  Impressions  which  are  being  constantly 
registered  upon  it  through  the  spiritual  sen- 
sory organs. 

But  while  man  is  in  touch  with  his  fellow 
man  upon  the  physical  plane  and  with  the 
plane  of  physical  nature  generally,  his  atten- 
tion is  absorbed  upon  that  plane.  He  does 
not  feel  the  necessity  for  employing  other 
means  or  using  other  channels  of  communi- 
cation. In  most  instances  he  does  not  even 
know  that  they  exist.  And  so  long  as  there 
is  no  absolute  necessity  for  the  development 
of  the  finer  senses  he  continues  to  be  absorbed 
with  those  more  familiar  to  him.  Just  so 
long  as  his  attention  is  thus  confined  to  a 
plane  of  existence  entirely  below  that  of  the 
spiritual  his  consciousness  distinguishes  noth- 
ing higher  than  the  plane  of  his  attention. 

These  facts  have  been  demonstrated  with 
as  much  scientific  exactness  and  certainty  as 
has  the  physical  fact  that  by  the  action  of 
electricity,  light  may  be  produced,  power 
generated  and  messages  transmitted. 

Let  it  be  also  distinctly  understood  that 
the  process  by  and  through  which  these  dem- 

39 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

onstrations  may  be  accomplished  with  per- 
fect safety  and  the  most  intense  satisfaction 
to  the  individual  is  neither  hypnotic  nor 
mediumistic,  nor  in  any  other  manner  of  a 
subjective  nature. 

It  will  doubtless  be  observed  that  the 
writer  speaks  with  unqualified  assurance  as 
to  the  facts  stated.  The  question  naturally 
arises,  "How  does  he  know  these  things?" 

For  the  partial  satisfaction  of  those  to 
whom  a  definite  answer  would  be  deemed  of 
special  interest  or  value,  the  author  wishes 
to  state  that  they  are  the  results  of  his  own 
personal  experiences,  studies  and  demonstra- 
tions, together  with  the  results  of  his  instruc- 
tion during  the  many  years  he  has  been 
engaged  in  acquiring  the  knowledge  which 
enables  him  to  speak  with  unconditional 
assurance. 


CHAPTER  IV 


THIRTEEN  PLANES 


There  are  known  to  be  thirteen  distinct 
planes  of  life  and  matter — including  the 
physical — ^which  invest  this  physical  planet, 
and  through  which  the  individual  man  and 
woman  must  pass  in  their  evolutionary  flight 
from  the  lowest,  which  is  the  one  we  are  now 
on,  to  the  highest  which  is  the  thirteenth. 

Each  of  these  is  finer  than  its  predecessor, 
and  its  activities  are  correspondingly  more 
intense.  It  is  impossible,  however,  for  any- 
one to  understand  or  appreciate  just  what 
this  means,  in  all  its  various  phases,  until  he 
has  had  the  personal  experience  of  passing 
from  one  spiritual  plane  to  another.  As  an 
example,  one  has  very  little  idea  of  what  the 
transition  from  the  physical  plane  into  the 
first  spiritual  plane  would  mean,  until  after 
it  had  been  accomplished. 

Here  is  a  fact  of  Nature  which  has  not 
been  explained  before:  The  spiritual  plan&s 

41 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

of  life  are  not  identical  in  location.  True, 
they  are  identical  in  space  insofar  as  each 
lower  plane  extends  out  beyond  the  surface 
of  the  earth. 

The  first  spiritual  plane  interpenetrates  the 
earth  to  its  center,  but  it  extends  out  far  be- 
yond the  surface  of  the  physical  earth.  There- 
fore, it  is  identical  with  the  physical  earth 
plane  as  far  as  the  earth  plane  extends.  But 
the  outer  surface  of  the  first  spiritual  plane — 
upon  which  the  inhabitants  of  that  plane  nor- 
mally dwell — is  many  leagues  out  in  space 
beyond  the  surface  of  the  earth. 

In  the  same  way,  the  second  spiritual 
plane  is  identical  with  the  earth — as  far  as 
the  earth  plane  extends — and  also  identical 
with  the  first  spiritual  plane — as  far  as  the 
first  spiritual  plane  extends — but  the  surface 
(upon  which  its  inhabitants  normally  live, 
move  and  abide)  is  far  out  in  space  not  only 
beyond  the  surface  of  the  earth,  but  beyond 
the  surface  of  the  first  spiritual  plane,  and 
correspondingly  farther  away  from  the  earth 
plane.  In  like  manner,  the  surface  of  the 
third  spiritual  plane  is  far  out  in  space  be- 
yond the  surface  of  the  second,  and  it  com- 

42 


THIRTEEN  PLANES 

pletely  surrounds  the  earth.  The  surfaces  of 
the  fourth,  fifth,  and  so  on,  to  and  including 
the  thirteenth  plane,  are  correspondingly 
farther  and  farther  out  in  space  from  the 
surface  of  the  physical  earth.  And  each 
spiritual  plane  completely  surrounds  and 
penetrates  all  those  below  it,  including  the 
physical  earth  as  the  nucleus,  or  core,  of  the 
planet  called  "earth." 

Because  of  this  natural  phenomenon  the 
Wise  Teachers  have  named  the  first  seven 
planes  (including  the  physical  and  the  first 
six  spiritual)  the  ''Terrestrial  Planes"  of  life. 
The  remaining  six  spiritual  planes  they  des- 
ignate as  ''Celestial  Planes"  of  life. 

It  would  seem  that,  in  the  spread  of  spir- 
itual education  upon  the  earth  plane,  there  is 
either  no  knowledge  of  the  existence  of  any 
but  the  seven  terrestrial  planes  of  life;  or, 
it  has  not  been  deemed  necessary  or  wise  to 
mention  the  celestial  planes  which  lie  above 
and  beyond  the  terrestrial. 

Intervening  between  the  purely  physical 
plane  and  the  first  pure  spiritual  plane  is  the 
magnetic  field,  which  partakes  very  strongly 

43 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

of  the  material,  or  magnetic  conditions,  of 
both  planes  which  bound  it.  It  combines, 
in  certain  definite  relations  and  proportions, 
the  magnetism  of  the  earth  plane  with  the 
magnetic  conditions  of  the  lowest  and  coarsest 
stratum  of  the  first  spiritual  plane. 

Each  of  the  spiritual  planes,  as  well  as  the 
Magnetic  Field,  is  composed  of  certain 
variations  of  condition  which  may,  in  a 
technical  sense,  be  designated  as  "Strata." 

There  are  three  basic,  primary  and  posi- 
tive strata.  Then  there  are  four  secondary, 
composite  strata.  Finally,  there  are  six  defi- 
nitely distinguishable  strata  which  seem  to 
be  mathematical  combinations  of  those  which 
lie  below  them  in  point  of  condition. 

These  definite  strata  are  not  separated 
from  each  other  by  any  space  demarkations. 

They  are  differentiated  from  each  other 
by  varying  degrees  of  refinement  of  the  ma- 
terial conditions  of  which  the  entire  plane  or 
Field  is  composed. 

They  are  significant  of  the  thirteen  definite 
and  distinct  evolutionary  steps  to  which  an 
individual    must    ascend    in    his    progressive 


THIRTEEN  PLANES 

unfoldment  through  any  given  spiritual 
plane  of  life. 

These  strata  are  not  marked  off  from  each 
other  by  anything  of  the  nature  of  space  de- 
markations.  In  truth,  they  are  not  distin- 
guishable at  all  to  the  individual  v^ho  is  in 
the  process  of  evolvement  through  any  given 
plane,  except  that  as  he  passes  upw^ard  he  is 
able  to  look  back  over  the  pathway  he  has 
traveled  and  distinguish  those  strata  over 
which  he  has  passed  in  his  upward  progress. 

The  only  index  by  which  these  varying 
strata  may  be  distinguished,  by  one  who  has 
passed  through  them,  is  by  the  phenomenon 
of  color.  The  reason  the  individual  is  not 
able  to  distinguish  these  varying  colors  while 
he  is  passing  through  them  is,  that  he  is  with- 
out the  means  of  contrasting  them  with  each 
other.  This  ability,  however,  he  acquires  as 
he  passes  upward  through  any  given  plane. 
He  cannot  see  ahead  of  him  into  evolutionary 
conditions  of  refinement  and  activity  which 
are  yet  above  and  beyond  him;  but  he  can  see 
into  those  through  which  he  has  evolved. 
This  is  why  the  evolving  individual  can  see 
and    distinguish    the   colors   through   which 

45 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

he  has  passed,  but  cannot  see  those  which 
lie  yet  beyond  his  state  and  condition  of 
development. 

But,  let  us  suppose  he  has  evolved  through 
the  first  spiritual  plane,  and  is  now  in  the 
second.  From  his  higher  spiritual  condition 
of  evolution,  he  is  able  to  look  back  at  the 
first  spiritual  plane  and,  looking  into  it,  he 
is  able  to  see  distinctly  each  and  all  of  the 
thirteen  distinguishing  colors,  as  well  as 
many  intermediate  shades  of  color  which 
bridge  the  evolutionary  spaces  between  the 
different  strata  colors. 

The  three  which  stand  out  most  clearly 
and  distinctly  to  his  vision  are  the  three  pri- 
mary colors — red,  yellow  and  blue.  He  is 
able  to  distinguish  the  spiritual  conditions 
of  refinement  and  activity  which  are  indi- 
cated by  those  three  primary  colors,  and  the 
order  in  which  they  are  named  is  the  order 
in  which  the  individual  approaches  them  in 
his  evolutionary  journey  upward  and  On- 
ward through  any  given  spiritual  plane. 

Then  follow  in  the  order  of  their  distinct- 
ness the  four  secondary  colors  —  orange, 
green,  indigo  and  violet.    These  seem  to  be 

46 


THIRTEEN  PLANES 

indeterminate  strata,  which  in  point  of  their 
degrees  of  refinement  and  material  condition, 
bridge  the  conditions  which  lie  between 
those  expressed  by  the  three  primary  colors. 
Consequently,  although  clearly  enough  dif- 
ferentiated to  be  equally  distinguishable, 
they  do  not  stand  out  with  the  same  positive 
and  obtrusive  distinctness  which  character- 
izes the  three  primary  colors. 

Then  follow  the  six  still  less  positively 
marked  strata  which  represent  the  interme- 
diate degrees  of  refinement  lying  between 
the  secondary  colors  and  conditions.  These 
are  distinctly  harmonic  colors,  forming 
mathematical  nodes  which  stand  out  with 
sufficient  distinctness  to  be  distinguished  by 
one  who  has  passed  beyond  them  in  his 
evolutionary  journey  toward  LIGHT. 

But  there  arc  yet  innumerable  tints  and 
shades  of  condition  and  corresponding  color 
which  run  between  the  thirteen  distinct  con- 
ditions which  have  been  indicated,  called 
strata.  These,  however,  do  not  stand  out 
with  sufficient  distinctness  and  individuality 
to  give  them  the  importance  of  distinct 
strata.    They  are,    rather,    the    intermediate 

47 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

tintings  with  which  the  Great  Eternal  Paint- 
er fills  in  the  delicate  effects  upon  his  great 
Canvas  of  Nature. 


4t 


CHAPTER  V 


GRAVITY 


The  Universal  Law  of  Gravity  is  Nature's 
gravimeter  by  v^hich  Nature  determines  the 
evolutionary  status  of  the  souls  of  men  and 
women  in  this  life  as  well  as  in  the  life  to 
come. 

Under  and  by  virtue  of  this  Universal  Law 
of  Gravity  each  one  of  us  at  physical  death 
either  rises  or  sinks — as  the  case  may  be — to 
a  level  of  spiritual  life  and  evolution  exactly 
commensurate  with  his  life  and  development 
immediately  prior  thereto. 

That  is  to  say,  in  our  essential  being  the 
transition  called  death  does  not  affect  us.  We 
are  neither  essentially  wiser  nor  essentially 
better  upon  our  entry  into  that  life  than  we 
are  upon  our  exit  from  this,  save  and  except 
in  just  so  far  as  the  experience  of  making  the 
transit  itself  is  concerned. 

In  just  so  far  as  we  have  been  subjects  of  or 
slaves  to  our  evil  appetites,  passions,  desires 

49 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

and  propensities  here,  we  remain  so  there  un- 
til by  the  power  of  self-control  we  lift  our- 
selves above  them  to  higher  levels  of  spiritual 
life.  In  so  far  as  we  have  been  subjects  of 
the  Destructive  Principle  of  Nature  here,  we 
remain  so  there  until  we  are  liberated 
through  the  development  of  the  latent  power 
of  self-control. 

Thus,  under  the  operation  of  the  Universal 
Law  of  Gravity  this  physical  life  is  fraught 
with  momentous  significance  and  unlimited 
possibilities.  It  is,  in  fact,  the  training  ground 
from  which  we  pass  to  a  higher  conflict.  The 
life  we  live  here  determines  the  level  to  which 
we  gravitate  there. 

We  may,  if  we  will,  so  avail  ourselves  of 
the  opportunities  of  this  life  as  to  lift  the  soul 
at  physical  death  above  the  Line  of  Victory 
into  the  realms  of  light  and  life  and  Individ- 
ual Immortality.  Or,  we  may  by  our  indif- 
ference to  the  possibilities  of  another  life 
develop  a  Spiritual  Gravity  which  at  phys- 
ical death  will  carry  us  into  that  great  middle 
psychological  state  which  lies  below  the  Line 
of  Victory  and  above  the  Line  of  Despair, 

50 


GRAVITY 

but  still  within  the  midst  of  the  great  battle 
of  life. 

In  like  manner,  by  complete  surrender 
to  the  destructive  power  of  our  evil  appe- 
tites, passions,  desires,  impulses,  emotions 
and  propensities,  or  by  the  deliberate  and  in- 
tentional abuse  of  the  knowledge  we  possess 
and  the  forces  we  command  we  may  destroy 
the  powers  by  which  it  is  possible  for  us  to 
ascend  the  scale  of  evolutionary  development. 
By  the  intentional  abuse  of  knowledge  and  the 
deliberate  misuse  of  power  we  may  establish 
a  Spiritual  Gravity  which  at  physical  death 
will  carry  us  at  once  below  the  level  of  the 
Line  of  Despair  into  the  realm  of  spiritual 
darkness  and  spiritual  death. 

These  are  not  the  poetic  imaginings  of  a 
Dante  nor  a  Milton.  They  are  not  the  charm- 
ing mysticism  of  a  Balzac  nor  a  Corelli.  They 
are  not  the  metaphysical  misconceptions  of 
any  creed  or  religion.  On  the  other  hand, 
they  are  the  determined  results  of  a  definite 
science. 

Under  the  Universal  Law  of  Gravity  in  its 
relation  to  the  evolution  of  individual  intel- 
ligence, Individual  Immortality  is  an  achieve- 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ment  of  the  Soul  and  not  an  arbitrary  impo- 
sition of  God  or  Nature  upon  all  mankind 
without  regard  to  individual  choice.  It  is  a 
reward  guaranteed  by  Nature  to  each  indi- 
vidual man  and  woman  for  the  right  applica- 
tion of  acquired  knowledge  and  the  right 
use  of  developed  powers. 

In  its  evolutionary  ascent  under  the  pater- 
nal dominion  and  guidance  of  God,  or  Na- 
ture, or  Universal  Intelligence  (whichever 
term  may  best  express  the  intelligence  which 
manifests  itself  in  all  the  forces,  activities 
and  processes  of  Nature),  the  individual- 
ized, intelligent  entity  reaches  its  "majority," 
so  to  speak,  when  it  arrives  at  the  estate  of 
man. 

At  this  evolutionary  point  the  Great  Intel- 
ligence invests  the  individual  entity  with  the 
soul  attributes  of  Self-Consciousness,  Reason, 
Independent  Choice,  and  an  independent, 
self-conscious  and  rational  Volition  necessary 
to  its  self-preservation  and  independent  ac- 
tion; then  severs  the  tie  which  makes  it  a 
"Child  of  Nature"  and  emancipates  it  from 
all  paternal  dominion  and  control. 

The  individual,  by  virtue  of  the  Soul  at- 

S3 


GRAVITY 

tributes  with  which  he  is  thus  invested,  comes 
to  his  "majority"  with  a  full  and  complete 
understanding  and  recognition  of  his  eman- 
cipation from  paternal  authority,  and  volun- 
tarily assumes  the  duties,  obligations  and  re- 
sponsibilities which  his  freedom  imposes. 
This  is  why  he  calls  himself  a  "free  moral 
agent"  and  a  "responsible  individual  intelli- 
gence." He  attains  this  status  by  the  simple 
process  of  Nature  over  which  he  has  no  con- 
trol whatever.  And  yet,  he  knows  that  from 
the  moment  or  the  instant  he  reaches  this 
point  in  the  process  of  his  individual  unfold- 
ment  he  occupies  a  wholly  different  position 
before  Nature's  law. 

So  it  appears  that  under  the  evolutionary 
process  the  individual  entity,  without  further 
act,  process  or  formality,  reaches  its  majority 
at  the  estate  of  man.  From  the  instant  he 
emerges  from  the  infancy  of  animal  nature 
into  the  estate  of  man  he  can  no  longer  hold 
Nature  or  the  Great  Intelligence  responsible 
for  his  own  individual  life  or  conduct.  He 
can  no  longer  demand  or  claim  paternal  pro- 
tection as  an  inalienable  right,  save  and  ex- 
cept as  he  earns  it.    He  is  no  longer  bound  by 

S3 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

filial  duties,  obligations  or  responsibilities, 
save  such  as  he  voluntarily  assumes. 

By  obedience  to  Nature's  law  we  discharge 
lour  individual  responsibility  and  thereby 
earn  Nature's  reward  therefor,  which  is  In- 
dividual Immortality.  And  this,  to  us,  is 
Compensatory  Justice. 

By  our  violation  of  this  same  great  law  we 
incur  the  penalty  which  Nature  prescribes 
therefor,  which,  according  to  the  terminology 
of  Natural  Science,  is  Spiritual  Death,  the 
Second  Death,  or  total  Individual  Extinction. 
And  this,  to  us,  is  Retributive  Justice. 

Thus,  in  its  final  analysis  the  Law  of  Jus- 
tice, as  it  is  known  and  exemplified  in  the 
realm  of  the  soul's  citizenship,  is  the  law  of 
individual  Life  and  Death.  Under  the  oper- 
ation of  this  law  the  right  of  individual  and 
independent  choice  is  an  inalienable  and  in- 
violable right  of  every  individual  man  and 
woman. 

In  accordance  therewith  man  is,  in  the  most 
exact  and  literal  sense,  the  arbiter  of  his  own 
destiny.  He  goes  to  that  destiny,  whether  it 
be  in  the  realm  of  light  and  life  and  Immor- 
tality, or  in  that  of  darkness,  disintegration 

54 


GRAVITY 

and  Death,  because  he  and  he  alone  has  so 
elected.  And  this  is  the  scientific  "Doctrine 
of  Election." 

A  more  comprehensive  understanding  of 
the  Universal  Law  of  Gravity  may  be  ob- 
tained by  noting  the  interesting  manner  in 
which  it  exemplifies  itself  in  the  daily  lives 
of  men  and  women  upon  the  plane  of  this 
present  physical  life. 

Humanity  everywhere,  in  a  large  and  gen- 
eral sense,  groups  itself  in  accordance  with 
this  law. 

For  illustration,  men  whose  lives  are  dom- 
inated by  political  ambitions,  political  mo- 
tives or  political  interests,  in  general,  are 
drawn  together  by  this  same  Law  of  Gravity 
and  they  form  themselves  into  political  clubs. 
They  naturally  gravitate  to  the  common  level 
of  "politics." 

Men  and  women  who  are  attracted  by  the 
same  ethical  or  religious  creeds,  principles 
and  purposes  gravitate  together  by  virtue  of 
the  same  law  and  form  themselves  into 
churches  or  societies.  They  meet  upon  the 
common  level  of  the  creed  or  ethical  standard 

55 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

they  adopt  and  the  work  in  which  they 
engage. 

Men  and  women  whose  lives  are  dominated 
by  the  glitter  and  license  of  wealth  are  drawn 
together  by  the  common  bonds  of  estheticism, 
vanity  and  licentiousness  and  form  themselves 
into  exclusive  social  sets.  Under  the  opera- 
tion of  the  same  law  they  gravitate  to  the  so- 
called  fashionable  sections  of  all  the  great 
cities  of  the  world.  Here  they  build  them- 
selves mansions  and  castles  and  surround 
themselves  with  all  the  beauty,  luxury  and 
license  that  wealth  can  buy. 

Men  and  women  who  are  ruled  by  the  lusts 
of  the  flesh,  but  without  the  wealth  to  pur- 
chase social  and  legal  amenities,  gravitate  to- 
gether upon  the  common  level  of  the  brothel 
and  the  house  of  prostitution.  By  the  same 
law  they  are  found  grouped  together  in  the 
slums  of  all  the  great  cities.  In  recognition 
of  the  moral  and  spiritual  level  to  which  they 
naturally  gravitate  the  women  of  this  class 
have  come  to  be  known  with  singular  signifi- 
cance as  the  ''demi-monde,"  or  the  under- 
world of  society. 

Si 


GRAVITY 

And  so  it  is  with  those  who  are  moved  to 
action  by  the  nobler  inspirations  of  life. 

In  the  progress  of  evolution  from  the  lower 
to  higher  planes  of  life,  the  individual  is 
aware  of  the  fact  that  upon  the  earth  plane, 
and  also  upon  the  first  six  spiritual  planes  of 
life,  he  is  under  the  influence,  or  "pull,"  of 
gravity.  That  is  to  say,  he  realizes  that  there 
is  always  and  everjrwhere  a  constant  pull 
upon  him  toward  the  center  of  the  earth, 
growing  less  and  less  as  he  advances.  But 
when  he  passes  from  the  sixth  spiritual  plane 
to  the  seventh,  he  senses  the  fact  at  once  that 
he  has  reached  a  point  of  development  and 
refinement  wherein  he  has  entirely  overcome 
this  so-called  "pull  of  gravity"  toward  the 
earth's  center.  From  that  point  forward  in 
his  evolutionary  unfoldment  he  knows  that 
he  has  not  only  overcome  the  material  gravity 
of  earth,  but  that  he  has  passed  into  a  realm 
and  a  state  of  being  wherein  that  impulse 
seems  to  be  reversed,  and  the  natural  tendency 
would  seem  rather  to  carry  him  away  from 
the  earth's  center  than  hold  him  to  it. 

The  higher  the  individual  goes  in  his  evo- 
lution upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life,  the  far- 

57 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ther  he  grows  away  from  the  coarse  and 
primitive  conditions  of  the  physical  plane  of 
life.  But,  in  another  sense,  he  is  acquiring 
new  and  added  knowledge  and  power  which 
compensate  for  and  overcome  this  seeming 
loss  of  touch  with  the  earth  plane. 

Let  me  explain:  The  individual  whose 
evolutionary  development  and  consequent 
spiritual  gravity  fix  him  upon  the  first  spirit- 
ual plane  of  life  is,  in  point  of  material  con- 
ditions, more  closely  in  touch  with  the  earth 
plane  than  one  whose  life  is  normally  on  the 
second  spiritual  plane.  He  is  many  times 
more  closely  in  touch  with  the  conditions  of 
the  physical  plane  than  the  individual  who 
has  evolved  to,  let  us  say,  the  seventh  spiritual 
plane. 

It  is  equally  true  that,  in  point  of  location, 
the  individual  upon  the  first  spiritual  plane  is 
closer  to  earth  than  is  the  individual  upon 
the  seventh  plane.  In  other  words,  the  level 
to  which  an  individual  may  rise  upon  the 
spiritual  planes  of  life,  immediately  after 
physical  death,  depends  upon  the  degree  of 
spiritual  evolution  he  has  attained  when  death 
occurs.    If  the  individual  has  so  lived  his  life 


GRAVITY 

upon  earth  as  to  overcome  the  downward  pull 
of  the  Universal  Law  of  Gravity  and  earned 
the  spiritual  right  to  dwell  upon  the  first, 
second,  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  spiritual  plane, 
or  even  higher,  the  Law  of  Gravity  will  carry 
him  at  once  to  the  exact  level  of  spiritual  life 
to  which  he  is  justly  entitled  under  the  evo- 
lutionary Law  of  his  Being.  Thus  he  will 
see  that  the  Law  of  Evolution  is  at  work 
while  the  individual  is  yet  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane,  just  as  actively  and  potently  as 
it  acts  after  he  has  passed  through  the  por- 
tal of  physical  death  and  entered  into  the 
''Spiritual  Mansion."  It  is  not  a  very  un- 
usual thing  for  one  of  the  children  of  earth 
to  pass,  immediately  after  physical  death,  to 
the  seventh,  or  the  eighth,  or  the  ninth,  or 
even  the  tenth  spiritual  plane  of  life.  And  it 
is  possible  for  one  of  the  Great  Souls  to  pass 
on  into  the  thirteenth  plane  at  once  and  with- 
out hindrance.  This,  however,  is  one  of  the 
great  achievements  of  individual  life  and 
evolution. 

The  limitations  of  the  Universal  Law  of 
Gravity,  at  any  given  time,  are  those  fixed 
and  determined   by  the  evolutionary  status 

59 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

of  the  individual  at  that  time.  The  evolution- 
ary possibilities  of  Individual  Intelligence, 
or  the  Soul  of  Man,  are  limitless,  so  far  as 
we  know.  Hence,  the  Universal  Law  of 
Gravity  seems  to  be  a  fact  of  Nature  with 
infinite  progressive  possibilities.  It  is  in- 
fluenced by  whatever  affects  the  evolutionary 
status  of  the  Individual  Soul,  or  Entity. 

Thus  the  Universal  Law  of  Gravity  obtains 
upon  all  the  planes  and  in  all  the  conditions  of 
life  both  here  and  hereafter,  as  far  as  it  has 
been  possible  to  follow  its  operations.  It  ex- 
emplifies itself  in  all  the  departments  of  Na- 
ture and  upon  all  the  levels  of  individual  life, 
so  far  as  we  know  them. 

Under  the  Compensatory  side  of  this  law 
every  unselfish  act  done  in  behalf  of  one's  fel- 
low man  brings  to  the  benefactor  a  definite 
soul  reward.  It  lightens  the  Gravity  of  the 
Spirit  and  permits  the  Soul  to  rise  in  obedi- 
ence to  the  law  of  its  essential  being  to  realms 
of  greater  light  and  fuller  life. 

Under  the  Retributive  side  of  this  same  law 
every  act  of  this  life  or  the  life  to  come,  so  far 
as  we  know,  which  purposely  deprives  a  fel- 
low man  of  that  which  of  right  is  his  brings  to 

60 


GRAVITY 

the  wrongdoer  a  definite  soul  retribution.  It 
increases  and  intensifies  his  Spiritual  Gravity 
and  in  obedience  to  the  law  of  his  essential 
being  he  sinks  toward  the  realm  of  darkness 
and  spiritual  death. 

Under  its  Compensatory  side  every  unself- 
ish act  which  brings  comfort,  aid,  joy,  happi- 
ness or  good  to  another  carries  with  it  the 
obligation  upon  the  one  so  receiving  to  give  in 
equal  measure  to  those  who  need. 

Under  its  Retributive  side  every  act  of  this 
life  or  of  the  life  to  come,  so  far  as  known, 
which  purposely  deprives  a  fellow  man  of 
that  which  of  right  is  his  thereby  fixes  upon 
the  wrongdoer  the  individual  responsibility 
of  righting  the  wrong  himself  if  it  be  within 
his  power,  otherwise  of  rendering  an  equiva- 
lent service  to  those  who  need  that  which  he 
can  give. 

Under  the  twofold  aspect  and  operation  of 
this  great  law  the  individual  who  knowingly 
and  intentionally  surrenders  an  inalienable 
right  of  the  soul  can  never  entirely  recover  it 
by  his  own  individual  effort  alone.  He  must 
seek  for  and  obtain  the  help  of  those  who  are 
able  to  give  that  which  by  such  a  surrender 

61 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

he  has  permitted  to  pass  beyond  the  limits  of 
his  own  individual  powers. 

When  the  hypnotist,  therefore,  emerges 
from  the  valley  of  the  shadow  of  death  freed 
from  the  encumbrance  of  a  physical  body  he 
realizes  that  the  demands  of  his  subjects  have 
long  since  matured.  He  finds  those  whose 
inalienable  rights  he  has  sequestered  (and 
who  have  not  yet  been  able  by  the  help  of 
others  to  regain  them)   awaiting  his  coming. 

A  leading  hypnotist  of  this  country  is  re- 
ported to  have  fixed  the  number  of  his  sub- 
jects at  something  like  two  thousand.  He 
thus  confesses  judgment  in  advance  in  favor 
of  each  and  every  one  of  these  individuals 
when  he  shall  stand  with  them  upon  the  com- 
mon level  of  spiritual  life.  To  whatever  ex- 
tent he  has  deprived  each  one  of  these  two 
thousand  subjects  of  the  inalienable  right  and 
power  of  self-control,  to  that  extent  he  has 
irrevocably  fixed  upon  himself  the  burden  of 
retribution.  In  the  same  measure  he  has  in- 
voked upon  himself  the  operation  of  the  Law 
of  Gravity.  Under  its  immutable  provisions 
he  must  sink  to  the  level  of  the  law's  demands. 

Thus  it  is  that  under  the  Law  of  Retributive 

62 


GRAVITY 

Justice  the  man  who  enslaves  the  souls  of  his 
fellow  men,  by  the  same  act  forges  about  his 
own  neck  the  iron  collar  of  servitude.  In  the 
realm  of  the  soul  the  tyrant  master  becomes 
the  slave  of  his  own  tyranny.  Nor  can  he 
escape  from  this  self-imposed  bondage  save 
by  the  narrow  and  steep  pathway  of  servitude. 
He  cannot  claim  emancipation  for  himself 
until  the  Law  of  Retributive  Justice  is  fully 
satisfied. 

Their  demands,  being  duly  presented  and 
verified  in  accordance  with  the  "Statutes  of 
Nature,"  are  scheduled  in  the  inventory  of  his 
fixed  liabilities.  Not  only  this,  every  such 
demand  is  a  "preferred  claim"  under  the  law 
of  its  creation.  It  is  therefore  not  subject  to 
"discount."  It  cannot  be  compromised  nor 
"prorated."    It  must  be  paid  "in  full." 

The  hypnotist,  therefore,  finds  himself  a 
spiritual  mendicant,  a  pauper,  a  defaulting 
debtor.  He  is  an  insolvent,  a  bankrupt,  with- 
out the  benefit  or  advantage  of  an  insolvency 
or  bankrupt  law  or  proceeding  under  which 
to  relieve  himself  by  scaling  his  liabilities. 
What,  then,  can  he  do? 

There  is  but  one   alternative.     He  must 

63 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

cither  repudiate  his  liabilities  and  suffer  the 
penalties  which  the  law  prescribes,  or  he  must 
throw  himself  upon  the  mercy  of  the  court 
and  ask  for  time  and  opportunity  to  "work 
them  out." 

Precisely  the  same  law  governs  the  relation 
of  the  spiritual  control  to  its  medium.  The 
spiritual  intelligence  who  deprives  a  medium 
of  the  power  of  self-control  thereby,  to  the 
same  extent,  forges  the  chains  of  servitude 
upon  himself.  In  obedience  to  the  same  law 
he  must  repair  the  injury  thus  wrought,  if  it 
be  within  his  power,  and  if  not,  then  he  must 
render  an  equivalent  service  to  those  who  need 
the  help  which  he  can  give.  There  is  abso- 
lutely no  escape  if  he  would  rise  from  this 
earthbound  condition  to  higher  levels  of  life 
and   achievement  upon  the  spiritual  planes. 

Fortunately,  Nature  is  never  impatient  with 
those  who  honestly  and  humbly  seek  to  dis- 
charge their  just  liabilities  under  her  laws. 
She  never  demands  more  from  her  citizens 
than  they  are  able  to  perform.  To  the  hyp- 
notist, therefore,  she  would  seem  to  say: 
"These  are  your  obligations.  You  alone  are 
responsible  for  their  creation.  You,  therefore, 


GRAVITY 

must  liquidate  them.  While  it  may  not  be 
possible  for  you  to  meet  them  all  at  once,  you 
can  at  least  begin  now.  If  you  in  good  faith 
honor  the  law's  demands  you  shall  have  what- 
ever time  the  full  limit  of  your  abilities  may 
require  to  make  restitution.  Go,  therefore, 
and  in  the  order  of  their  maturity  repay  the 
debts  you  owe.  By  your  individual  service 
you  may  work  them  out,  rendering  to  each 
and  every  creditor  in  rightful  turn  the  full 
measure  of  his  just  demands." 


65 


CHAPTER  VI 


MUSIC  OF  THE  SPHERES 


In  another  sense,  this  is  but  an  expression 
of  the  Great  Eternal  Law  of  Gravity  which 
holds  the  planets  of  the  physical  Universe  in 
their  spiritual  orbits,  always  loyal  to  the  one 
center  about  which  they  revolve.  It  is  the 
Law  of  Harmony  expressing  itself  in  natural 
attraction,  and,  with  this  concept  clearly  in 
mind,  you  may  understand  that  the  "Music 
of  the  Spheres"  is  something  more  than  a  mere 
figure  of  speech.  Indeed,  when  we  have 
evolved  to  a  point  where  our  "Cosmic  Con- 
sciousness" opens  to  the  play  of  universal 
forces,  it  seems  consistent  with  the  logic  of 
science  that  we  shall  be  able  to  hear,  under- 
stand and  enjoy  that  wondrous  Symphony  of 
Nature — the  "Music  of  the  Spheres" — as  defi- 
nitely as,  and  with  infinitely  greater  joy  than, 
we  now  can  hear  and  enjoy  such  music  as  we 
are  able  to  produce  under  present  conditions. 
Then  only  shall  we  be  able  to  understand  and 

67 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

appreciate  to  what  sublime  heights  and  depths 
the  grand  Orchestration  of  Nature  transcends 
all  that  we  understand  as  music  today. 

The  fundamental  activities  and  processes  of 
Nature  express  her  Law  of  Harmony,  in  all 
the  departments  of  the  universe,  both  phys- 
ical and  spiritual.  In  other  words,  ''The 
Music  of  the  Spheres"  expresses  a  scientific 
fact.  You  have  no  doubt  enjoyed  the  privi- 
lege of  hearing  a  great  Symphony  Orchestra 
in  its  rendition  of  some  of  the  wonderful 
compositions  of  the  great  Masters  of  Music. 
It  may  be  that  you  have  sat  in  Symphony 
Hall,  in  the  City  of  Los  Angeles,  and  listened 
to  one  of  the  great  orchestras.  If  so,  you 
know  that  it  is  possible  to  take  a  great  en- 
closed space  such  as  that  and  literally  fill  it  to 
its  remotest  recesses  with  harmony  so  intense 
as  to  set  in  motion  every  atom  of  your  being 
in  harmonic  sympathy  with  your  environ- 
ment. By  giving  your  attention  to  the  indi- 
vidual members  of  the  great  orchestra,  you 
can  distinguish  each  individual  instrument 
as  it  contributes  its  relatively  small  bit  to  the 
sum  total  of  orchestral  harmony.  But  this 
requires  considerable  effort  on  your  part  be- 

68 


MUSIC  OF  THE  SPHERES 

cause  the  voice  of  each  individual  instrument 
blends  so  perfectly  into  the  harmony  of  the 
orchestral  environment  that  its  individual 
tones  are  merged  with  those  of  its  fellows  and 
are  lost  in  one  great  soul-inspiring  HAR- 
MONY. 

Now,  go  out  to  the  Hollywood  Bowl  where 
the  mountains  and  the  starry  heavens  alone 
combine  to  fix  the  limits  of  your  environment. 
Find  a  seat  well  back  beyond  the  boxes  and 
loges,  and  there  listen  to  another  great  or- 
chestra. You  know  that  it  is  made  up  of 
more  than  100  individual  players,  each  play- 
ing an  individual  instrument.  But  now  you 
cannot  identify  the  voices  of  the  individual 
instruments  as  they  lend  their  individual  con- 
tributions to  the  harmony  of  this  greater  en- 
vironment. You  realize  the  interesting  fact 
that,  as  the  voices  of  the  individual  instru- 
ments are  merged  and  lost  in  the  sublime  har- 
mony of  their  environment,  nothing  but  the 
realization  of  a  complete  and  perfect  Har- 
mony pervades  your  Soul. 

When  the  orchestra  swings  into  the  move- 
ment of  one  of  the  great  classics,  you  shut 
your  eyes  and  forget  the  individual  players 

69 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

and  instruments,  and  you  follow  the  whole 
orchestration  through  all  the  shades,  colors 
and  combinations  of  harmony,  until  you  sense 
but  one  great,  harmonious  individuality — • 
that  of  the  orchestra  alone.  There  it  is,  a 
great,  living,  breathing,  vibrating,  harmoni- 
ous Entity,  calling  to  you  and  lifting  your 
Soul  up  above  all  the  petty  things  of  life,  into 
a  realm  where  only  HARMONY  reigns. 

Now  go  back  with  me  to  the  moments  when 
the  members  of  the  orchestra  are  all  in  their 
places  but  the  conductor  has  not  yet  appeared. 
Listen  now  to  the  individual  instruments,  as 
the  player  of  each  is  either  tuning  it  up,  or  is 
playing  over  and  over  some  difficult  musical 
phrase  in  one  of  the  numbers  that  make  up 
the  evening  program.  Each  individual  mem- 
ber is  doing  something  of  the  same  nature, 
but  it  is  a  case  of  "every  fellow  for  himself." 
There  is  no  concert  of  action,  and  each  indi- 
vidual instrument  is  just  talking  to,  playing 
for  and  communing  with  its  master,  without 
regard  to  any  of  its  neighbors  and  fellows. 
As  a  result  you  hear  only  a  concatenation  of 
discordant  sounds  which  gives  you  an  impres- 
sion of  some  great,  harmonious,  musical  en- 

70 


MUSIC  OF  THE  SPHERES 

tity  that  has  been  broken  into  a  thousand  in- 
dividual pieces,  and  each  individual  piece  is 
screeching  its  protest  against  all  the  rest. 

But  now  sit  quietly  listening,  not  to  the  in- 
dividual noises  that  make  up  the  great  dis- 
sonant commotion,  but  to  the  great  ''noise/' 
Think  of  it  as  just  one  great,  noisy  individual, 
until  you  are  able  to  sense  it  as  such.  Now, 
if  you  will  fix  your  mind  upon  it,  you  will 
discover  the  strange  fact  that  all  these  inde- 
pendent, disjointed  sounds  merge  themselves 
into  a  definite  musical  tone.  It  is  an  individ- 
ual sound.  And  if  you  will  slowly  let  your 
own  voice  softly  run  the  musical  scale,  you 
will  find  that  there  is  some  one  tone  of  the 
scale  that  is  in  perfect  unison  with  the  great, 
multiple  dissonant  tone  of  the  '^shattered" 
orchestra. 

That  tone  represents  the  disjointed  individ- 
uality of  the  orchestra.  Nevertheless,  it  is  a 
distinct  musical  tone. 

Again:  During  the  recess,  when  each  indi- 
vidual of  the  audience  is  at  liberty  to  talk  and 
chat  with  his  friends  and  neighbors,  listen  to 
them.  At  first  you  hear  only  so  many  indi- 
vidual vocal  sounds,  just  chattering.     There 

71 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

is  no  unity,  there  is  no  harmony.  But  listen, 
as  you  did  to  the  orchestra,  and  slowly  it  will 
come  to  your  consciousness  that  the  sum  total 
of  all  those  thousands  of  individual  voices 
merges  into  one  single  tone.  It  is  a  musical 
tone,  because  if  you  begin  and  slowly  run  the 
scale  with  your  own  voice,  you  will  find  that 
there  is  just  one  tone  that  is  in  consonance 
with  the  great  "undertone"  of  the  audience. 
This  one  tone  stands  for  the  total  individuality 
of  the  assembly  as  a  whole. 

Now,  suppose  you  had  three  such  audiences 
near  enough  to  each  other  so  that  a  very 
sensitive  individual  could  hear  the  undertone 
of  each.  Suppose  also  that  one  of  them  re- 
sponded to  C  of  the  musical  scale,  another  to 
E,  and  the  third  to  G,  so  that  you  could  hear 
them  all  at  once.  The  result  would  be  that 
you  would  hear  a  perfect  musical  chord — a 
perfect  harmony  of  the  first,  third  and  fifth 
of  the  musical  scale. 

Listen:  Can  you  now  realize  the  fact  that 
all  the  individual  noises  of  any  given  planet 
— if  they  could  be  heard  by  an  ear  sensitive 
enough — would  merge  themselves  into  just 
one  single  "noise"?    This  is  not  only  true,  but 

73 


MUSIC  OF  THE  SPHERES 

that  single  noise,  when  its  undertone  is  distin- 
guished, will  be  found  to  be  a  distinct  musical 
tone. 

Now  let  us  call  upon  your  creative  con- 
sciousness a  little  further.  Suppose  you  had 
three  great  planets  out  in  space,  each  of  which 
gave  off  its  undertone,  or  overtone,  so  that  it 
could  be  heard  by  the  same  ear  at  the  same 
time.  Suppose  also  that  one  of  these  tones 
had  the  musical  value  of  C,  one  E,  and  one 
G,  of  the  musical  scale.  What  would  be  the 
result?  You  would  he?.r  a  perfect  musical 
chord.  The  harmony  would  be  absolutely 
perfect.  This  would  be  the  "Music  of  the 
Spheres"  to  which  you  were  listening. 

It  is  a  literal  and  scientific  fact  of  Nature 
that  every  individual  planetary  system  is 
made  up  of  individual  planets  so  related  to 
each  other  as  to  represent  the  most  perfect 
Harmony.  As  the  individual  planets  go 
spinning  in  space,  each  is  singing  its  own  cos- 
mic tone,  if  you  please,  and  it  is  so  related  to 
its  fellows  that  their  combined  tones  consti- 
tute absolute  HARMONY.  Can  you  not  now 
conceive  of  the  fact  that  the  great  Universal 
Intelligence,  back  of  all  the  manifestations  of 

73 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Nature,  has  so  created  and  fixed  in  their 
places  the  millions  and  billions  of  planets  of 
His  Universe  to  make  up  one  great  Cosmic 
Orchestra  which  expresses  the  infinite  concept 
of  universal  Harmony? 

It  is  not  intended  to  convey  the  idea  that 
this  is  a  subject  which  lies  within  the  limita- 
tions of  exact  science.  The  concept,  how- 
ever, is  one  which  comes  directly  from  the 
Great  School.  The  explanation  was  given 
to  the  writer  by  one  of  the  Masters  of  Natural 
Science  who,  for  many  years,  held  the  official 
position  of  Instructor  of  the  School.  Since 
then  the  subject  has  been  under  consideration 
many  times,  and  the  known  facts  of  science 
have  been  applied  to  it,  as  far  as  human  intel- 
ligence could  go.  It  seems  to  meet  the  logic 
of  science  at  every  point  and  appeals  to  reason 
as  consistent  with  the  known  facts  of  Nature. 


CHAPTER  VII 


SPIRITUAL  TRANSITIONS 


Individuals  pass  from  physical  death  di- 
rectly into  any  or  all  of  the  various  spiritual 
planes  or  conditions  of  life,  from  the  mag- 
netic field,  to  the  thirteenth  plane.  The  de- 
termining factor — under  the  Universal  Law 
of  Gravity  —  is  the  evolutionary  status  at 
which  the  individual  has  arrived  when  phys- 
ical death  overtakes  him.  Whatever  devel- 
opment he  has  attained,  under  the  great 
Law  of  Evolution,  fixes  with  scientific  cer- 
tainty, the  spiritual  plane — as  well  as  the 
stratum  within  that  plane — to  which  he  will 
rise  the  moment  physical  death  liberates  him 
from  the  plane  of  earth. 

It  is  not  true,  therefore,  that  all  pass  from 
death  into  the  magnetic  field.  It  would  be 
fair,  though  not  an  absolutely  correct  state- 
ment, to  say  that  a  very  large  percentage  of 
humanity  pass  directly  from  physical  death 
into    the    magnetic    field.     This,    however, 

75 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

might  convey  a  wrong  impression,  if  left 
without  further  explanation.  For  instance, 
many  of  those  who  pass  directly  into  the 
magnetic  field  remain  there  but  a  very  short 
time — often  but  a  day,  a  week,  or  a  month — 
long  enough  to  awaken  to  a  full  realization 
that  they  are  no  longer  upon  a  physical  plane 
in  the  physical  body,  and  long  enough  to  di- 
vest themselves  of  the  physical,  magnetic 
bond  which  binds  them  to  their  former  phys- 
ical life.  Thence  they  pass  into  the  first  spir- 
itual plane,  and  from  there  they  evolve  in 
accordance  with  their  several  conditions. 

It  would  seem  that  possibly  one-half  of  all 
humanity  stops  in  the  magnetic  field,  for 
some  period,  from  a  few  hours  to  many  years 
of  time — depending  upon  their  evolutionary 
status  at  the  time  of  physical  death,  together 
with  their  desire  (or  lack  of  it),  their  earnest 
eflFort  (or  lack  of  it),  to  rise  above  that  plane 
and  condition  of  life. 

Leaving  this  magnetic  field  out  of  our 
count,  because  of  the  fact  that  it  is  so  inti- 
mately connected  with  the  physical  plane  be- 
low and  the  first  spiritual  plane  above  it,  we 
will  say  that  the  Soul  passes  through  this  half- 

76 


SPIRITUAL  TRANSITIONS 

way  plane  in  its  flight  to  the  first  spiritual 
plane.  But  when  it  arrives  upon  the  first  spir- 
itual plane  it  is  able  to  realize  the  fact  that  it 
is  in  a  vastly  more  refined  and  intense  material 
body,  and  that  it  is  moving  in  the  midst  of  a 
world  of  material  things  that  seem  especially 
consistent  with  and  fitted  to  its  refined  body. 
In  due  time  the  individual  learns  that  he  has 
passed  out  of  the  coarse,  slow-moving,  phys- 
ical world,  and  has  entered  a  world  of  much 
greater  refinement  and  intensity"  of  activity. 
In  passing  from  the  first  spiritual  plane  to 
the  second,  one  does  not  "die"  in  exactly  the 
same  way  he  does  when  he  passes  from  this 
earth  plane  into  the  first  spiritual  plane.  It 
is  true  that  one  passes  out  of  the  material 
body  he  inhabits  on  the  first  spiritual  plane, 
and  finds  himself  inhabiting  another  and  a 
finer  material  body  upon  the  second  spiritual 
plane.  But  there  is  no  complete  lapse  of  con- 
sciousness in  making  the  transition.  Before- 
hand he  is  prepared  for  the  change,  and 
knows  almost  to  the  hour  when  it  will  occur. 
When  the  time  comes  he  realizes  that  he  is 
withdrawing,  or  being  withdrawn,  from  the 
material  body  on  the  first  spiritual  plane.   He 

77 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

knows  also  that  he  is  being  received  into  the 
second  spiritual  plane. 

There  is  another  respect  in  which  the  tran- 
sition from  the  first  spiritual  plane  to  the  sec- 
ond differs  from  physical  death.  That  is, 
it  is  accompanied  by  no  previous  suffering  of 
any  kind.  It  seems  to  be  more  like  a  "grad- 
uation" from  one  school  to  another. 

In  passing  from  the  second  spiritual  plane 
to  the  third,  the  conditions  attending  the  tran- 
sition are  entirely  conscious.  The  same  rela- 
tive conditions  follow  each  transition  but  with 
the  fuller  consciousness  of  a  progressive  un- 
foldment. 

Those  who  claim  to  know  from  actual  ex- 
perience, tell  us  that  in  passing  to  the  sixth 
spiritual  plane  of  life  the  last  material  body 
is  left  behind.  Beyond  that  point,  the  proc- 
ess of  passing  from  one  plane  to  the  next 
above  it  involves  merely  the  refining  of  the 
same  material  body,  and  thereafter  it  is  truly 
a  "graduation"  rather  than  a  dissolution. 

There  comes  a  time  in  the  spiritual  evolu- 
tion of  every  Soul  that  has  been  "born  of 
woman"  upon  the  plane  of  earth,  when  the 
evolving  Soul  ceases  to  manifest  itself  person- 

78 


SPIRITUAL  TRANSITIONS 

ally  upon  the  earth  plane,  or  even  upon  any 
of  the  lower  planes  of  spiritual  life  upon  this 
planet. 

This  is  suggested  by  what  the  Great  Friends 
tell  us  of  the  "Interplanetary  Life  and  Con- 
ditions" which  obtain  after  the  individual  has 
completed  his  evolution  upon  the  thirteenth 
plane  of  life  upon  this  planet.  Nothing  but 
the  personal  experience  ever  can  give  to  any- 
one more  than  a  very  imperfect  intellectual 
concept  of  exactly  what  each  transition  means, 
and  just  what  changes  attend  it.  But  the  same 
general  principle  of  ''motion  and  number,"  or 
refinement  and  activity,  prevails. 

In  point  of  actual  distance,  the  inhabitants 
of  the  thirteenth  plane,  when  they  are  living 
and  moving  normally  upon  the  surface  of  that 
plane,  are  vastly  farther  away  from  the  inhab- 
itants of  the  earth  than  are  the  inhabitants  of 
the  first  spiritual  plane,  or  of  the  magnetic 
field. 

But  one  must  remember  that  the  individual 
who  has  evolved  to  the  thirteenth  plane  also 
has  acquired  the  knowledge  and  the  added 
power  which  together  enable  him  to  retrace 
his  steps  back  through  all  the  spiritual  condi- 

79 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

tians  intervening,  and  to  stand  upon  the  plane 
of  the  physical  earth.  In  order  to  do  this, 
however,  he  must  take  on,  or  invest  himself 
with,  the  conditions  of  all  the  several  inter- 
vening planes  of  life  and  materiality.  While, 
in  one  sense,  the  actual  doing  of  this  involves 
a  corresponding  effort  on  the  part  of  the  indi- 
vidual who  thus  desires  to  descend  from  the 
thirteenth  plane  and  personally  visit  the  sur- 
face of  the  material  earth  plane  of  life,  at  the 
same  time,  one  must  keep  in  mind  the  fact 
that  in  evolving  to  the  thirteenth  plane  he  has 
acquired  the  added  knowledge  and  power 
which  enable  him  to  make  this  descent  into 
the  coarser  conditions  of  materiality.  And  in 
the  possession  of  this  added  knowledge  and 
power,  one  can  understand  that  it  is,  in  es- 
sence, no  more  difficult  for  him  to  return  from 
the  surface  of  the  thirteenth  plane  than  it  is 
for  him  to  descend  from  the  surface  of  the 
tenth,  when  he  had  only  evolved  to  that  plane 
and  condition  of  life  and  had  acquired  the 
knowledge  and  added  power  which  go  with 
that  degree  of  evolution. 

Hence,  in  this  sense,  it  could  hardly  be  said 
with  scientific  exactness,  that  he  is  "less  in 

80 


SPIRITUAL  TRANSITIONS 

touch"  with  the  plane  of  earth  than  he  was 
when  he  had  evolved  only  to  the  first  spiritual 
plane  of  life  and  conditions. 

But  here  is  another  phase  of  the  subject 
which  must  be  taken  into  account:  As  the 
individual  evolves  to  higher  planes,  his  nor- 
mal life,  activities  and  labors  are  upon  the 
surface  of  his  own  plane  of  life.  Whatever 
he  may  desire  to  accomplish  for  the  benefit  of 
those  in  the  plane  or  planes  below  him,  is 
normally  accomplished  by  the  aid  and  co- 
operation of  those  in  the  planes  below  him. 
That  is  to  say,  if  one  in  the  thirteenth  plane 
desired  to  accomplish  a  definite  work  for  the 
inhabitants  of  the  earth  plane,  he  would  em- 
ploy the  services  and  the  aid  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  next  lower  plane  (the  twelfth),  who 
would  hand  it  down  to  the  next,  and  so  on, 
until  when  it  had  reached  the  first  spiritual 
plane  there  would  be  those  upon  that  plane 
fully  equipped  and  ready  to  do  the  thing  de- 
sired. This  is  the  general  method  employed 
in  such  events.  But  it  does  not  mean  that  the 
individual  could  not  himself  descend  to  the 
plane  of  earth  and  accomplish  the  thing  de- 
sired, or  superintend  its  accomplishment. 

SI 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

One  of  the  things  which  every  individual 
must  learn,  when  he  passes  through  one  spir- 
itual plane  to  the  next  higher,  is  how  to  take 
upon  himself  the  material  conditions  of  the 
lower  plane  from  which  he  has  passed.  To 
make  this  entirely  clear,  when  one  makes  the 
transition  from  the  first  spiritual  plane  to  the 
second,  it  is  necessary  to  learn  how  to  clothe 
oneself  in  the  material  conditions  of  the  first 
spiritual  plane.  In  other  words,  every  indi- 
vidual on  the  spiritual  side  of  life  must  be 
able  to  manifest  himself  and  his  presence 
upon  each  and  all  of  the  spiritual  planes  be- 
low him.  This  is  one  of  his  important  duties. 
It  is  by  the  right  use  of  his  knowledge  that  he 
is  able  to  clothe  himself  in  the  material  condi- 
tions of   any  of  the  lower  spiritual   planes. 

The  various  "planes"  represent  the  differ- 
ent states  and  conditions  of  materiality 
through  which  the  individual  Soul  must  pass 
on  its  way  to  its  individual  goal — whatever 
and  wherever  that  may  be.  The  only  things 
that  remain  fixed  and  permanent,  in  this  re- 
gard, are  the  "planes"  themselves  and  the  con- 
ditions of  individual  life  they  represent.  The 
individual  himself  is  never  in  a  state  or  condi- 

82 


SPIRITUAL  TRANSITIONS 

tion  of  '^fixedness."  He  is  forever  mov- 
ing. He  is  ''passing  through"  these  various 
"planes,"  on  his  vs^ay  to  Individual  Comple- 
tion. As  he  passes  from  one  plane  to  another, 
he  makes  v^ay  for  another  to  follow  him. 
Hence,  in  a  sense,  the  great  stream  of  human 
life  upon  the  spiritual  planes,  just  as  it  is  on 
the  physical,  is  moving  on  and  on  in  an  end- 
less procession — coming  in  at  the  "bottom" 
and  going  out  at  the  "top."  Thus,  as  rapidly 
as  one  generation  passes  out  of  any  plane  of 
life,  another  comes  in.  Nature  herself  takes 
care  of  the  problem  of  "congestion"  in  her 
ov^n  w^ay — and  in  the  only  way  that  could 
possibly  solve  it. 


83 


CHAPTER  VIII 


SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  AND  COLOR 


To  those  whose  spiritual  evolution  is  such 
as  to  leave  them  in  the  lov^est  round  of  the 
magnetic  field,  the  condition  is  that  of  al- 
most, but  not  quite,  complete  darkness.  From 
that  deep  shade  of  darkness  there  is  a  gradual 
ascending  of  the  scale  tov^ard  Light.  At  the 
point  just  before  it  emerges  into  the  pure 
spiritual  plane,  it  represents  a  fair  analogy  to 
the  bright  moonlight  of  the  earth  plane. 

Running  through  the  entire  magnetic  field 
there  is  also  a  phenomenon  of  the  color 
scheme  of  Nature  that  is  perfectly  clear  and 
distinct  to  one  who  is  able  to  look  at  it  from 
the  higher  spiritual  view.  But  the  individual 
who  spiritually  belongs  in  the  magnetic  field, 
is  unable  to  see  these  colors,  except  as  he  has 
passed  through  them  from  the  earth  side. 

In  the  process  of  individual  evolution  and 
unfoldment  from  lower  to  higher  planes  of 
spiritual  life,  there  is  always  a  corresponding 

85 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

increase  in  the  intensity  of  the  vibratory  state 
and  condition  of  the  material  organism,  or 
body,  of  the  individual.  This  increase  in  the 
vibratory  activity  of  the  body  manifests  itself 
by  a  corresponding  increase  of  light. 

In  passing  from  the  lower  to  the  higher 
planes  of  spiritual  life,  the  individual  de- 
velops within  himself  the  dynamic  powers 
and  elements  of  Light  exactly  corresponding 
with  his  degree  of  evolutionary  unfoldment. 
The  material  body,  as  it  evolves  upon  the 
spiritual  planes  of  life,  becomes  a  dynamo  of 
ever-increasing  power  and  light. 

The  Great  Friends  who  are  far  above  and 
beyond  us  in  their  evolutionary  unfoldment, 
come  from  their  several  abodes  in  the  higher 
realms  of  spiritual  life  and  clothe  themselves 
in  the  material  conditions  of  all  the  interven- 
ing planes  of  life  between  them  and  the  first 
spiritual.  The  light  which  radiates  from  them 
is  so  intense,  and  the  power  of  its  active  radia- 
tion so  irresistible,  that  the  spiritual  eyes  of 
a  physical  individual  would  be  blinded  for  a 
time,  at  least,  until  they  would  be  able  to  ad- 
just themselves  to  the  dynamic  force  and 
condition  of  their  presence  and  environment. 

86 


SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  AND  COLOR 

Since  this  condition  obtains,  one  can  readily 
understand  and  appreciate  to  what  added  de- 
gree of  intensity  and  dynamic  power  it  would 
obtain  in  the  case  of  psychics  who  have  been 
developed  through  the  subjective  process  of 
mediumship.  In  truth,  it  would  be  impossi- 
ble for  the  Great  Friends  to  manifest  their 
presence  to  a  medium  (unprotected)  without 
destroying  his  or  her  spiritual  sight  entirely, 
for  the  time  being. 

The  evidence  of  personal  unfoldment  and 
spiritual  progress  translate  themselves  to  the 
senses  as  added  LiGHT.  While  it  is  true  that 
one  takes  on  the  material  conditions  of  the 
spiritual  planes  when  he  comes  to  the  physical 
plane,  it  is  also  true  that  back  of  these  mate- 
rial conditions,  and  shining  through  them, 
are  the  higher  and  more  intense  vibratory 
conditions  of  the  finer  spiritual  bodies  within. 
In  other  words,  each  spiritual  plane  reflects 
some  of  its  intensity,  in  the  form  of  light,  upon 
each  and  all  of  the  planes  that  lie  below  it. 

This  will  explain  why  it  is  that  the  presence 
of  one  of  the  Great  Souls  upon  any  spiritual 
plane  is  always  accompanied  by  a  marvelous 
halo  of  light.    And  that  is  why  so  many  upon 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  earth  plane,  whose  spiritual  senses  have 
been  temporarily  opened,  have  been  so  vividly 
impressed  with  the  conviction  that  they  have 
seen  the  Master  Jesus.  The  various  physical 
representations  of  that  Great  Master  have  al- 
most universally  been  made  to  show  a  halo  of 
light  either  about  his  head,  or  enveloping  his 
entire  body — as  in  the  artistic  representations 
of  the  supposed  "Ascension"  of  the  Master. 
These  artistic  representations  have  educated 
the  majority  of  mankind,  upon  the  physical 
plane,  into  the  idea  and  the  conviction  that 
wherever  the  Master  goes  he  walks  in  the 
midst  of  a  "Great  Light."  This,  in  turn,  has 
been  followed  by  the  idea  that,  if  He  should 
ever  appear  to  anyone  upon  the  earth  plane, 
it  would  be  in  the  midst  of  a  great,  miraculous 
illumination.  And  it  is  but  one  more  step  for 
them  to  assume  that  this  luminosity  of  pres- 
ence is  the  special  and  exclusive  sign,  index, 
or  badge  of  the  Master  Jesus.  Hence,  when- 
ever any  spiritual  individual  has  manifested 
itself  in  the  midst  of  a  great  radiance  of  light, 
this  fact  alone  has  been  accepted  as  positive 
evidence  that  the  individual  could  be  none 
other  than  the  Master  Jesus. 

88 


SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  AND  COLOR 

The  writings  since  the  great  war  mention 
the  fact  that  the  Master  Jesus  was  seen  upon 
the  battlefields  of  Europe,  by  many  of  the 
soldiers;  and  that  the  evidence  of  His  iden- 
tity was  definitely  established  by  the  fact  that 
he  appeared  in  the  midst  of  a  wonderful  halo 
of  Light. 

Now,  whilst  I  believe  in  the  perfect  hon- 
esty and  sincerity  of  those  who  have  been  so 
profoundly  impressed;  nevertheless,  I  am 
convinced,  in  my  own  mind,  that  they  are 
mistaken  as  to  the  identity  of  the  Great  Mas- 
ter. In  the  first  place,  any  Great  Soul  from 
a  higher  spiritual  plane,  manifesting  to  indi- 
viduals upon  the  earth  plane — as  in  this  in- 
stance— would  appear  in  the  midst  of  a  great 
and  wonderful  light.  Hence,  the  presence  of 
light  is  not  the  distinctive  sign,  index  or  badge 
of  the  Master  Jesus,  but  belongs  to  any  and 
all  Advanced  Souls  upon  the  higher  planes  of 
spiritual  life  who  manifest  themselves  under 
similar  conditions. 

I  have  never  ceased  to  reverence  the  Mar- 
tyred Master  Jesus,  yet  it  has  never  been  my 
great  privilege  to  see  Him,  nor  in  any  manner 
whatsoever  to  sense  His  immediate  presence. 

89 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

I  have  been  present  on  occasions  when  in- 
dividuals in  the  physical  body  have  obtained 
spiritual  glimpses  of  spiritual  presences  ac- 
companied by  light.  In  every  such  instance 
the  individual  believed  he  or  she  was  in  the 
presence  of  the  Master  Jesus.  But  I,  who 
was  present,  and  personally  knew  the  Lumi- 
nous One,  knew  that  the  individual  was  mis- 
taken in  his  assumption  as  to  the  personality 
of  the  Master. 

The  various  states  of  consciousness,  which 
are  in  reality  states  of  the  Soul,  express  them- 
selves so  definitely  and  so  accurately  through 
the  color  scheme  of  Nature,  the  spiritual  aura 
of  an  individual  upon  the  spiritual  planes, 
through  its  various  gradations  and  shadings 
of  color,  the  psychic  spectrum  becomes  a  pow- 
erful aid  in  determining  the  real  experience, 
emotions,  impulses,  desires,  anticipations  and 
purposes  of  the  individual  at  any  given  time. 
Hence,  hypocrisy  and  deliberate  deception 
are  much  more  easily  discovered  upon  the 
spiritual  side  of  life  than  upon  the  physical. 
The  more  advanced  the  individual  is,  the 
more  perfectly  does  the  Soul  express  itself. 
The  higher  he  develops,  the  less  is  there  either 


SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  AND  COLOR 

desire  or  occasion  for  hypocrisy  or  deception. 

Upon  the  first  spiritual  plane  it  would  be 
much  more  possible  to  conceal  hypocrisy  than 
upon  the  fourth  or  fifth — until  it  becomes 
virtually  impossible  in  the  Celestial  Realms. 
Evolution  is  always  TOWARD  the  Light.  Ev- 
olution of  the  individual  involves  constantly 
increasing  Knowledge.  But,  Knowledge — 
upon  the  spiritual  planes — expresses  itself  in 
Light.  Light  is  definitely  related  to  the  abil- 
ity to  See.  The  greater  the  Light,  the  more 
clearly  we  see  (within  the  power  of  the  organ- 
ism to  react  to  Light) . 

And  now  we  come  to  the  significance  of 
these  various  colors.  They  are  the  objective 
phenomena  by  which  Nature  indicates  the 
various  degrees  and  steps  by  which  the  indi- 
vidual evolves  through  any  given  spiritual 
plane  in  his  evolutionary  progress  toward  the 
Infinite  LiGHT  which  marks  the  goal  of  in- 
dividual endeavor — at  least  theoretically. 

Since  each  individual  takes  on  the  condi- 
tion of  each  and  every  stratum,  as  well  as  of 
each  and  every  intermediate  shade  and  tint, 
he  therefore  expresses  in  his  personality  the 
exact  evolutionary  status  at  which  he  has  ar- 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

rived  at  any  given  time.  To  those  who  have 
traveled  the  evolutionary  pathway  ahead  of 
him  his  life  is  thus  an  open  book.  To  all  who 
are  ahead  of  him,  upon  the  path  of  individual 
evolution,  his  exact  status  is  known  by  the 
color  of  his  spiritual  body;  or,  by  the  emana- 
tions of  spiritual  vitality  which  constitute  his 
spiritual  aura. 


CHAPTER  IX 


SPIRITUAL  PENALTIES 


It  is  true  that  those  in  this  physical  life  who 
defy  the  Laws  of  Nature,  and  of  Nature's 
God,  must  inevitably  suffer  the  penalties  for 
all  such  violations  and  transgressions.  This  is 
as  true  of  the  material  bodies  of  spiritual  men 
and  women  as  it  is  of  the  minds  and  souls  of 
those  who  inhabit  the  spiritual  realm. 

In  this  world  of  physical  material  and 
earthly  conditions  the  individual  who  puts  his 
hand  into  the  fire  sufifers  Nature's  inevitable 
penalty  for  his  violation  of  Natural  Law.  He 
is  burned.  He  thereby  suffers  pain.  The 
same  Law  carries  over  into  the  spiritual 
world.  It  is  just  as  true  of  that  world  as  it  is 
of  this  physical  world.  In  the  spiritual  world 
there  is  the  analogous  process  called  spiritual 
fire.  If  spiritual  men  and  women  violate 
that  law,  they  know  full  well  that  they  must 
suffer  its  inevitable  penalties.  Virtually  the 
only  difference  is  in  the  nature  of  the  penalty. 

93 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

If  we,  in  this  physical  life,  violate  the 
moral  Law  and  thereby  offend  our  conscience, 
we  inevitably  suffer  mental  and  psychical  tor- 
ture. The  same  is  literally  true  in  the  spirit- 
ual life.  In  other  words,  the  five  spiritual 
senses  which  register  the  impressions  of  the 
spiritual  world  upon  the  Soul,  are  just  as  sen- 
sitive as  are  the  five  physical  senses  which 
register  the  impressions  of  this  physical  world 
upon  the  Soul.  Nay,  they  are  even  more  sen- 
sitive, because  they  are  more  active  and  in- 
tense. When  they  are  impressed  with  the 
constructive  and  beneficent  conditions  and 
processes  of  Nature  they  convey  to  the  Soul 
the  sensation  of  pleasure.  When  they  are  im- 
pressed by  the  destructive  and  disintegrating 
conditions  and  processes  of  Nature  they  con- 
vey painful  conditions  and  experiences,  just 
as  they  do  in  this  physical  world. 

As  we  come  to  the  full  maturity  of  our 
intelligence  and  wisdom,  we  come  to  know 
more  and  more  definitely  just  what  Mother 
Nature  has  in  store  for  us  at  every  step  of  the 
way.  When  we  defy  or  violate  one  of  her 
established  organic  Laws,  we  know  beyond 
the  peradventure  of  a  doubt  that  we  are  go- 

94 


SPIRITUAL  PENALTIES 

ing  to  suffer  for  that  same  defiance  and  vio- 
lation. And,  in  proportion  to  our  knowledge 
of  the  Law,  is  our  knowledge  of  exactly  just 
what  her  penalty  will  be.  In  like  manner, 
when  we  comply  with  the  righteous  demand 
of  one  of  Nature's  Laws  we  know,  in  exact 
proportion  to  the  degree  of  our  knowledge  of 
the  Law  itself,  not  only  that  we  will  receive 
our  just  reward,  but  exactly  what  that  re- 
ward will  be. 

Even  the  infant,  after  it  has  learned  by  ex- 
perience, knows  the  fire  is  hot  and  that  if  he 
defies  it  he  will  suffer.  He  also  knows  that 
the  suffering  will  be  in  the  nature  of  pain 
resulting  from  the  burn.  There  is  no  uncer- 
tainty about  it;  and  the  little  individual 
learns  from  experience  that  he  can  always 
depend  upon  the  same  resultant  penalty. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  same  infant,  after 
sufficient  experience,  knows  that  by  comply- 
ing with  the  benign  effects  of  the  Law,  he 
will  enjoy  the  life-giving  warmth  and  com- 
fort of  that  same  fire  which,  under  wrong  or 
destructive  conditions,  has  caused  him  great 
suffering.     There    is    no    uncertainty    about 

95 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

it.  The  result  is  as  fixed  and  definite  as  the 
Law  itself  is  immutable. 

This  is  why  the  Great  Friends  and  Masters 
of  Natural  Science  have  said  throughout  the 
ages:  "Know  Thyself";  for  man  is  an  epi- 
tome of  Nature.  He  is  its  microcosm. 
Hence,  insofar  as  we  know  ourselves,  we 
know  Nature  and  the  ultimate  goal  of  man- 
kind is  to  know  himself  thoroughly;  and  in 
so  knowing  himself  he  learns  to  know  Nature 
and  her  Laws,  her  rewards  and  her  penalties, 
that  he  may  walk  ever  in  the  sunlight  of 
Eternal  Truth  and  enjoy  the  beauties  and 
beneficences  of  Nature.  Thus  he  may  com- 
mand the  approval  of  the  Great  Universal 
Intelligence  of  which  Nature  is  but  a  mani- 
festation and  an  objective  expression. 

The  individual  who  passes  from  the  phys- 
ical life  into  the  spiritual  is  neither  better  nor 
worse,  neither  wiser  nor  more  ignorant,  when 
he  arrives  in  the  spiritual  life  than  he  was 
when  he  departed  from  the  physical.  He 
takes  up  the  new  life  exactly  where  he  leaves 
off  the  old.  He  brings  into  the  spiritual  life 
all  the  hopes,  ambitions,  desires  and  purposes 
which  stimulated  him  to  personal  eflFort  upon 

96 


SPIRITUAL  PENALTIES 

the  earth  plane.  If  he  is  profoundly  reli- 
gious when  he  leaves  the  physical  life,  he 
will  be  profoundly  religious  when  he  arrives 
upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life.  If  he  has 
been  surcharged  with  all  manner  of  super- 
stition during  his  physical  life,  he  will  carry 
these  superstitions  with  him  over  into  the 
spiritual  life.  He  will  be  just  as  deeply  im- 
pressed with  them,  and  just  as  profoundly  in- 
fluenced by  them  in  the  spiritual  life  as  he 
was  in  the  physical — until  he  has  had  time 
and  opportunity  to  learn  that  he  has  been  in 
error.  This  takes  time,  and  often  it  requires 
patient  educational  effort  as  well  as  Faith  in 
the  eternal  verities  of  Nature,  and  in  the 
Great  Architect  of  the  Universe. 

Hence  it  is,  that  there  are  religious  fanatics 
in  the  magnetic  field,  and  even  in  the  first 
spiritual  plane,  just  as  there  are  in  the  phys- 
ical world.  They  are  equally  earnest  in  their 
efforts  to  impress  their  beliefs  and  their  su- 
perstitions upon  their  spiritual  fellows  as  they 
were  upon  their  physical  companions;  and 
when  they  learn  that  it  is  possible  for  them  to 
join  with  those  of  the  physical  life  in  these 
religious  revivals  and  other  religious  works, 

97 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

many  of  them  do  so  with  all  the  energy  and 
enthusiasm  they  possess.  This  is  the  class  of 
spiritual  individuals  who  attend  the  revival 
meetings  assisting  the  evangelists,  the  minis- 
ters and  co-workers  in  their  labor  of  "Con- 
verting" the  irreligious,  the  ignorant  and  the 
superstitious. 

The  Law  of  Individual  Unfoldmcnt  and 
Growth  is  just  as  inevitable  and  as  true  in  the 
spiritual  life  as  in  the  physical.  The  indi- 
vidual who  expects  to  find  the  spiritual  life 
one  of  eternal  inertia,  inaction  and  "rest,"  has 
in  store  a  great  and  beneficent  surprise.  He 
finds  that  physical  death  is  not  the  end  of  all 
his  possibilities  of  progress.  He  finds  that 
the  same  Law  of  Individual  Unfoldment  and 
Progress  obtains  there  as  here,  namely,  the 
Law  of  Individual  Effort.  He  learns  that  the 
spiritual  life  is  as  truly  a  life  of  action  as  the 
physical,  but  with  manifold  intensity.  He 
observes  that  evolution  proceeds  in  that  life 
from  the  exact  point  to  which  he  attained 
in  this. 

In  short,  he  learns  that  the  spiritual  life  is 
but  a  continuation  of  the  physical,  except 
upon  a  higher  and  finer  plane  of  intensified 

98 


SPIRITUAL  PENALTIES 

activity,  and  that  the  Laws  of  Spiritual  Life 
are  but  a  natural  extension  of  the  Laws  of 
the  physical ;  that  there  is  nowhere  a  break  in 
the  perfect  continuity  of  Nature;  that  no- 
where does  this  Law  of  Continuity  appear 
more  wonderful  than  it  does  in  the  evolution 
and  development  of  Individual  Life,  on  both 
planes  of  existence. 

He  learns  to  know  and  appreciate  the  fact 
that  God,  or  Nature,  bestows  upon  us  our 
powers  and  senses,  so  that  we  may  use  them 
in  conformity  with  the  Law  of  Individual 
Being;  that  the  fundamental  purpose  of  our 
life,  both  here  and  there,  is  based  upon  the 
Law  of  Service. 

If  men  and  women  abuse  their  powers, 
their  capacities  and  their  just  privileges, 
they  only  miss  that  much  of  the  joyous  pos- 
sibilities of  life;  and  that  is  equally  as  true 
upon  the  spiritual  planes  as  it  is  upon  the 
plane  of  earth.  Obedience  to  Law  always 
means  organic  and  right  development, 
growth,  unfoldment  and  the  highest  meas- 
ure of  personal  enjoyment.  Disobedience 
and  defiance  of  the  Law  just  as  inevitably 
bring  to  the  individual  penalties  which  the 

99 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Law  prescribes.  And  there  is  no  such  thing 
as  evading  or  avoiding  the  Law  or  its  con- 
sequences. 

But,  it  takes  some  individuals  many  years 
to  learn  all  these  things  in  a  manner  to  apply 
them  to  their  own  lives  in  the  spiritual  life, 
just  as  many  of  them  never  learn  the  Law  of 
Individual  Unfoldment  while  they  remain 
upon  the  physical. 

The  individual  comes  to  realize  that  he 
can  progress  in  the  spiritual  life  just  as  in 
the  life  of  earth,  only  by  his  patient  and  per- 
sistent Personal  Effort  along  the  Pathway  of 
Evolution.  And  the  progressive  intelligence 
inevitably  comes  to  appreciate  the  fact  that 
the  corollary  of  this  is  just  as  true  and  just  as 
vitally  important,  namely,  that  the  sooner  he 
sets  out  upon  his  path  of  Personal  Achieve- 
ment, the  earlier  will  he  arrive  at  the  natural 
goal  of  his  endeavors;  that  the  more  intensely 
he  strives  and  the  more  closely  he  conforms 
to  Nature's  Laws,  rules,  principles  and  regu- 
lations, the  more  rapid  will  be  his  progress 
and  the  greater  the  rewards  of  his  labor. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  for  men  and 
women  yet  in  the  physical  body,  to  under- 

100 


SPIRITUAL  PENALTIES 

Stand,  as  early  as  possible,  that  they  need  not 
wait  until  they  arrive  upon  the  spiritual  side 
of  life  to  begin  their  study  of  the  noble  lesson 
nor  the  application  of  its  principles  to  their 
daily  lives  and  conduct. 

For,  by  their  own  Personal  Effort,  in  con- 
formity with  Nature's  plan,  it  is  possible  for 
them  to  earn  her  reward,  by  being  permitted 
to  pass  at  once  through  the  darkness  of  the 
magnetic  field,  and  to  find  their  natural 
spiritual  habitat  and  home  far  up  the  heights 
of  evolutionary  unfoldment,  in  the  midst  of 
the  Radiant  Splendor  beyond  all  their  pres- 
ent ideals  and  concepts.  In  this,  again,  we  see 
the  beneficent  consistency  of  Nature  in  all 
her  wondrous  works.  She  has  so  provided 
that  no  effort,  even  of  her  humble  children, 
is  ever  lost,  forgotten  or  omitted  from  the 
balance-sheet  of  Individual  Life. 

Even  the  lowliest  child  of  earth  may  enter 
upon  his  journey  toward  the  Light  at  any 
moment  he  so  elects.  And  he  may  rest  con- 
tent in  the  absolute  assurance  that  every  hon- 
est effort  he  exerts  in  the  right  direction  will 
advance  him  a  step  nearer  the  goal  toward 
which  he  travels.    The  rewards  of  the  Law 

101 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

are  as  inevitable  and  as  sure  as  the  Law  itself. 

Men  may  establish  their  social  and  civil 
laws  and  customs,  and  they  may  evade  or 
avoid  them  at  will — so  long  as  their  fellows 
permit  them  to.  Thus  they  may,  and  do, 
evade  and  avoid  the  penalties  of  their  own 
self-made  laws,  in  many  ways  and  in  many 
instances.  Not  so  with  the  Laws  of  Nature, 
These  are  inexorable.  They  need  no  man  or 
set  of  men  to  enforce  them.  They  are  as 
automatic  in  their  penalties  as  they  are  self- 
acting  in  their  rewards.  No  man  can  evade 
or  avoid  them.  Obedience  is  the  only  safe 
road,  as  well  as  the  only  just  and  happy 
pathway  of  life.  Hence,  obey  them  to  the  full 
measure  of  your  knowledge  and  abilities. 
This  is  the  Way  of  Life.  It  is  likewise  the 
Way  of  Health.  Moreover,  it  is  the  Way 
of  Happiness. 

The  earlier  the  individual  sets  his  way- 
ward feet  in  the  Evolutionary  Pathway  and 
pushes  forward  along  The  Right  Way,  the 
farther  he  will  find  himself  on  his  journey 
when  he  crosses  the  Great  Divide. 


102 


CHAPTER  X 


SPIRITUAL  SOCIOLOGY 


It  seems  difficult  for  us  to  learn  that  the  in- 
habitants of  the  spiritual  world  are  only  ex- 
human  beings,  in  feeling  as  well  as  in  fact. 
We  take  for  granted  that  all  spiritual  people 
— who  are  old  enough — find  serious  work  to 
occupy  all  their  time  and  efforts.  It  does  not 
occur  to  us  that  there  is  a  purely  social  side 
to  mature  spiritual  life.  Most  of  us  seem  to 
think  the  spiritual  life  is  too  serious  for  that. 
But,  if  one  w^ill  bear  in  mind  the  fact  that 
the  spiritual  world  is  but  a  world  of  finer 
material  substance  than  the  physical,  but  pos- 
sessing the  same  properties,  it  will  help  him 
to  understand  the  perfect  naturalness  of  the 
spiritual  life  in  all  its  varied  manifestations. 

It  may  seem  to  those  in  the  physical  life 
that  those  in  the  spiritual  life  have  no  room 
for  anything  apparently  "so  frivolous"  as  so- 
cial gatherings,  or  mere  entertainment  and 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

enjoyment — especially  among  those  who  are 
no  longer  children. 

It  will  help  us  if  we  will  remember  always 
the  fact  that  Nature  is  consistent.  She  never 
creates  anything  without  a  definite  purpose. 
Having  bestowed  on  us  our  five  channels  of 
sense,  she  is  careful  to  furnish  us  the  means 
upon  which  to  exercise  them  in  a  manner  to 
derive  from  them  the  highest  measure  of 
wholesome  enjoyment  possible. 

Bear  this  one  important  fact  in  mind:  The 
conditions  of  the  spiritual  life  are,  in  every 
sense,  but  a  finer  replica  of  the  physical. 
Science  has  accomplished  many  things  in  the 
spiritual  life  that  have  not  yet  been  accom- 
plished on  the  physical  plane.  Especially  in 
the  matter  of  eating,  and  of  renewing  the 
spiritual  body,  they  have  gone  far  ahead  of 
us  upon  the  physical  plane.  It  is  not  at  all 
necessary  for  people  upon  the  spiritual  side  of 
life  to  go  through  the  process  of  eating  and 
drinking  to  nourish  and  sustain  their  spir- 
itual bodies.  They  have  learned  how  to  ac- 
complish that  result  by  taking,  directly  from 
the  elements  of  spiritual  nature  about  them, 
whatever  is  necessary  and  proper  to  sustain 

104 


SPIRITUAL  SOCIOLOGY 

the  spiritual  body.  Hence,  eating  and  drink- 
ing, in  the  spiritual  life,  constitute  nothing 
more  than  one  of  the  methods  the  spiritually 
embodied  individuals  make  use  of  in  the  en- 
joyment of  their  sensuous  epicurean  desires. 

Through  the  process  of  eating  and  drinking 
spiritual  people  are  able  to  enjoy  their  senses 
of  taste  and  smell  far  more  intensely  than  it 
is  possible  for  us  to  do  through  our  physical 
senses.  This  is  because  all  the  processes  and 
experiences  of  Nature  and  Life  are  more  in- 
tense in  the  spiritual  world  than  they  are  in 
the  physical.  Hence,  there  are  those  in  the 
spiritual  life,  as  there  are  in  the  physical,  who 
employ  much  of  their  time  and  energies  in 
catering  to  the  senses  of  their  fellows.  The 
methods  of  deriving  enjoyment  have  been  re- 
duced to  a  much  more  exact  science  upon  the 
spiritual  side  of  life  than  they  have  been 
upon  the  physical. 

Sometimes  they  play  games.  Sometimes 
they  have  music.  Sometimes  they  dance. 
Sometimes  they  have  someone  give  them  an 
address  on  some  subject  in  which  they  are 
mutually  interested.  Sometimes  they  just 
visit  and  talk  concerning  all  manner  of  sub- 

105 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

jects.  And  sometimes  they  have  a  feast  of 
good  things  to  eat  and  drink. 

Their  social  enjoyments  are  correspond- 
ingly more  intense  and  their  gratifications 
correspondingly  more  perfect. 

When  spiritual  people,  on  the  various  spir- 
itual planes,  meet  together  for  the  purpose  of 
enjoying  a  feast  of  the  senses,  they  confine 
themselves  entirely  to  the  mineral  and  the 
vegetable  kingdoms  of  the  spiritual  world. 
For  instance:  They  have  an  abundance  of 
the  most  delicious  fruits  of  all  kinds — many, 
in  truth,  very  unlike  anything  we  see  upon 
the  physical  plane.  It  would  seem  that  Na- 
ture has  stored  up  in  these  wonderful  fruits 
and  vegetables  every  possible  shade  of  enjoy- 
able appeal  to  the  senses  of  taste  and  smell. 
The  spiritual  people  eat  these  fruits  and 
vegetables,  not  because  that  process  is  really 
necessary  to  their  bodily  life — as  it  is  here — 
but  because  they  derive  from  their  juices  and 
essences,  the  most  intense  sensuous  enjoyment. 

Then,  again,  these  harmless  and  innocent 
indulgences  of  the  senses  during  their  social 
functions,  only  add  to  their  social  enjoyment 
and  increase  the  sense  of  mutual  fellowship. 

106 


SPIRITUAL  SOCIOLOGY 

One  should  be  able  to  understand  and  appre- 
ciate this  from  the  analogous  experience  upon 
this  earth  plane.  No  doubt,  if  he  will  go  back 
over  his  past  life,  he  will  agree  that  some  of 
the  most  enjoyable  experiences  of  himself 
and  his  friends  have  come  from  the  spirit 
of  fellowship  and  good  cheer,  as  they  have 
gathered  about  the  festal  board  and  there 
have  partaken  of  the  food  and  drink  offered. 
Through  it  all  runs  the  golden  thread  of  mu- 
tual companionship,  intellectual  enjoyment, 
real  fellowship,  and  the  desire  to  add  to  the 
happiness  of  the  occasion. 

One  should  bear  in  mind  also,  in  this  con- 
nection, that  the  senses  become  keener  and 
more  actively  responsive  in  proportion  as  the 
individual  evolves  from  lower  to  higher 
planes  of  life.  Since  it  is  possible  for  us 
upon  the  physical  plane  of  life  to  derive 
pleasure  and  satisfaction  from  the  innocent 
and  proper  gratification  of  our  senses,  re- 
member that  upon  the  higher  and  finer 
planes,  those  of  the  spiritual  life  have  a  great 
advantage  over  us  in  that  respect.  Their  en- 
joyment of  the  senses  is  beyond  the  ability  of 

107 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  people  of  this  physical  plane  to  under- 
stand or  appreciate. 

They  build  themselves  spiritual  houses  be- 
cause there  is  in  them — as  there  is  in  us — 
that  which  craves  an  abiding  place.  It  may 
be  that  a  time  will  come  in  our  development 
when  we  shall  outgrow  this  "homing"  de- 
sire. I  do  not  know  how  this  may  be;  but  sO 
far  as  I  have  traveled  the  evolutionary  path- 
way, the  concept  of  "home"  seems  to  be  vital 
and  fundamental  in  every  Soul. 

In  this  they  are  but  following  the  same 
impulse  and  the  sarrie  desire  which  impel  us 
upon  the  earth  plane  to  build  our  homes  that 
we  may  have  a  place  wherein  to  provide 
whatever  may  seem  to  us  necessary  and  desir- 
able in  making  that  particular  place  attrac- 
tive to  those  we  love  to  have  near  us.  It  fur- 
nishes us  a  center  of  influence  toward  which 
we  seek  to  attract  those  whose  inmost  lives 
seem  to  be  in  harmony  with  our  own.  In 
these  we  have  our  greatest  pleasure.  Our 
"home"  constitutes  the  radiating  center  from 
which  our  vital  influence  reaches  out  and 
impresses  itself,  for  good  or  for  evil,  upon 
the  rest  of  the  world. 

108 


SPIRITUAL  SOCIOLOGY 

The  people  of  the  spiritual  world  build 
their  homes  from  the  spiritual  materials  at 
their  command.  In  this  they  are  permitted 
far  greater  facilities  for  gratifying  their 
aesthetic  tastes  and  ideals  than  is  possible 
upon  the  earth  plane.  They  all  have  their 
individual  concepts  of  what  their  own  par- 
ticular home  ought  to  be  in  order  to  make 
it  conform  to  their  highest  and  most  perfect 
ideal.  Therefore,  they  think  out  their  plan 
something  as  we  do  upon  the  earth  plane. 
They  then  select  the  kinds  of  material  that 
appear  to  them  best  adapted  to  the  execution 
of  that  plan.  In  their  homes  they  employ 
all  the  science  and  art  which  they  possess,  to 
make  the  combination  one  harmonious  whole 
which  shall  express,  in  the  highest  measure 
possible,  their  best  concept  of  utility  and 
beauty  combined.  The  impelling  motive  is  to 
make  this  the  central  depot  of  all  their  in- 
dividual enjoyments.  Into  this  home  they 
invite  those  whom  they  love  and  admire. 
There  they  do  what  they  can  to  add  to  their 
enjoyment  and  happiness.  With  them,  far 
more  than  with  us  upon  the  earth  plane, 
home  is  the  center  from  which  they  radiate 

109 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  vital  energy  of  both  their  personality  and 
their  individuality,  for  good  or  for  evil,  upon 
all  who  come  within  the  radius  of  their 
influence. 

In  their  spiritual  homes  they  are  not 
bound,  as  you  and  I  so  often  are,  to  harbor 
discordant  elements;  for  they  obey  the  nat- 
ural Law  of  Attraction  which  impels  them 
all  to  seek  only  those  who  are  in  harmony 
with  their  own  ideals  and  purposes. 

The  same  general  principle,  but  upon  a 
broader  application  thereof,  applies  in  the 
development  and  upbuilding  of  their  spirit- 
ual cities  and  villages. 


110 


CHAPTER  XI 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 


On  each  spiritual  plane  there  are  great 
universities,  colleges  and  schools  of  learning, 
covering  every  department  of  educational  en- 
deavor. As  soon  as  the  individual  conditions 
make  it  possible,  those  who  pass  from  the 
earth  plane  to  the  first  spiritual  plane  m.ake 
their  w^ay  to  some  one  of  these  great  educa- 
tional institutions.  Therein  they  are  taught 
all  the  various  branches  of  learning  neces- 
sary to  their  complete  education,  to  qualify 
them  as  loyal  and  intelligent  citizens  of  their 
new  environment  and  state. 

The  very  first  thing  after  arriving  on  the 
spiritual  side  of  life,  to  attain  the  largest  and 
most  rapid  spiritual  growth  and  develop- 
ment is  for  the  individual  to  adjust  himself 
to  the  new  environment  and  conditions  of  his 
life.  This  involves  a  careful  study  of  his  new 
environment,  of  each  and  every  condition  of 
life  and  nature  involved  in  it,  a  clear  and 

111 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

accurate  understanding  of  the  meaning  and 
purpose  of  each  individual  phase  of  that  en- 
vironment and  a  definite  knowledge  of  its 
effects  upon  himself.  Having  done  this,  he 
is  in  position  to  know  just  how  to  adjust  him- 
self to  the  new  conditions  so  that  he  may 
take  up  his  life  with  the  least  possible  delay, 
push  forward  along  constructive  lines  and 
take  the  next  regular  step  in  his  own  evolu- 
tionary unfoldment  and  growth. 

The  individual  must  possess  the  quality 
and  degree  of  Intelligence  to  enable  him  to 
understand  the  instructions  he  is  to  receive 
and  how  to  make  an  intelligent  application 
of  that  knowledge  to  the  Work  in  which  he 
is  engaged.  He  must  possess  natural  Desire 
for  Knowledge  which  complies  with  the  de- 
mands of  the  Constructive  Principle  of  Na- 
ture. It  must  be  a  wholesome  and  construc- 
tive desire.  He  must  have  the  necessary 
power  of  individual  Attention,  the  Moral 
Courage,  the  Determination,  the  Persever- 
ance, the  Unselfishness,  the  Cheerfulness,  the 
Humility,  the  Tolerance  and  all  the  other 
characteristics  and  qualities  of  a  "Good 
Student." 

lis 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 

Nature  has  her  own  methods  of  working 
out  the  evolution  of  humanity.  An  important 
link  in  the  chain  of  her  method  is  this  physi- 
cal life.  No  other  link  can  take  its  place. 
Those  who  make  the  most  of  this  life  of  earth 
have  traveled  far  more  rapidly  toward  the 
goal  of  individual  life  than  if  they  had  spent 
the  same  time  upon  the  spiritual  plane. 
This  is  because  during  physical  life  Nature 
is  giving  the  individual  a  special  schooling 
fitted  exactly  to  his  then  existing  state  and 
condition.  If  he  puts  forth  the  same  effort 
during  this  earthly  schooling  he  will  make 
more  evolutionary  progress  than  he  could 
have  done  had  he  been  on  the  spiritual  plane 
making  the  same  effort.  Why  is  this?  It  is 
because  the  physical  life  has  its  own  definite 
and  specific  part  to  perform  in  the  evolution 
of  the  individual.  He  may  overcome  the 
handicap  of  not  being  permitted  to  take  the 
physical  schooling  all  the  way  through,  but 
it  will  take  him  longer  just  the  same. 

It  is  also  equally  true  that,  after  one  has 
had  the  advantage  of  the  physical  schooling, 
he  will  progress  more  rapidly  upon  the  spir- 
itual planes.   This  is  simply  because  Nature 

us 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

knows  her  own  business.  She  fits  the  physical 
life  to  the  needs  of  the  Soul  during  the  al- 
lotted span  of  physical  life.  Those  who  are  en- 
abled to  live  out  this  life  through  a  reasonable 
span,  have  had  the  very  best  schooling  pos- 
sible for  them  during  that  part  of  the  journey. 
If  the  individual  dies  young  he  is  denied  the 
opportunity — in  this  one  incarnation — to  get 
the  benefit  of  what  physical  life  can  give 
him.  But,  if  what  the  Great  Friends  tell  us 
about  Reincarnation  be  true.  Nature  will 
give  him  his  chance  some  time,  and  he  will 
make  up  anything  he  may  have  lost  by  rea- 
son of  the  misfortune  of  an  early  death. 

We  are  taught  to  look  upon  the  physical 
life  as  equally  important  with  the  spiritual, 
but  not  more  so.  Each,  in  its  proper  se- 
quence and  turn,  has  its  rightful  place  in  the 
development  of  the  Individual  Intelligence, 
or  Soul.  And  the  individual,  who  desires  to 
hurry  on  out  of  this  physical  life,  just  because 
he  finds  it  hard,  or  because  he  has  come  to 
believe  the  spiritual  life  will  prove  more 
pleasant,  is  making  one  of  the  greatest  mis- 
takes possible.  If  he  will  just  bear  in  mind 
that  both  lives  have  their  definite  and  specific 

114 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 

parts  to  conserve  in  his  Unfoldment  and  Soul 
Growth,  and  then  set  himself  the  task  of  tak- 
ing each  in  its  proper  turn  and  making  the 
most  of  it,  he  will  find  himself  much  farther 
along  the  Evolutionary  Road  than  if  he  had 
neglected  any  of  the  opportunities  which 
each  life  affords  him,  in  its  turn.  Hence,  in 
the  final  results,  the  individual  grows  most 
rapidly  in  whatever  life  he  is  at  the  time — 
provided  he  avails  himself  of  the  oppor- 
tunities therein  afforded  him  for  develop- 
ment and  growth.  He  cannot  improve  his 
condition  by  trying  to  hurry  over  any  part 
of  it,  however  hard  it  may  be. 

The  "Border-Land  Workers"  constitute  one 
of  the  most  important  Schools  of  Spiritual 
Endeavor.  Let  it  be  supposed  that  the  indi- 
vidual desires  to  enter  upon  that  specific  oc- 
cupation. He  must  pass  a  rigid  examination 
before  he  is  permitted  to  assume  the  respon- 
sibility that  every  individual  Border-Land 
Worker  must  be  prepared  to  discharge  in 
full.  His  examination  must  show — to  the 
satisfaction  of  those  whose  business  it  is  to 
pass  upon  the  qualifications  of  those  who  en- 
ter that  service — that  he  possesses  a  sufficient 

115 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

degree  and  quality  of  each  individual  char- 
acteristic to  enable  him  to  develop,  under 
the  necessary  instruction  and  help,  all  the 
qualities  and  characteristics  of  a  Good  Help- 
er in  the  Work.  If  his  Intelligence  is  de- 
ficient, if  his  earnest  Desire  is  wanting,  if 
his  Moral  Courage  is  lacking,  these  things 
would  disqualify  him  for  immediate  service. 
But  if  he  proved  that  he  possessed  all  the 
necessary  qualities  in  sufficient  degree  and 
quality  to  develop  into  a  Good  Helper, 
with  time  and  instruction,  he  is  so  classified 
and  given  the  right  to  enter  the  School  of 
Preparation. 

The  earth-bound  condition  is  one  which 
must  be  overcome,  in  some  manner,  before 
it  is  possible  for  the  liberated  Soul  to  evolve 
from  the  magnetic  field  of  spiritual  life. 
This  is  an  educational  labor  which  devolves 
upon  the  Border-Land  Workers  on  the  spir- 
itual side  of  life.  If  it  could  be  accom- 
plished, the  destruction  of  the  physical  body 
would  destroy  this  earth-bound  condition  at 
once.  But,  inasmuch  as  the  spiritual  workers 
have  no  definite  means  of  accomplishing  that 
end,  they  are  forced  to  rely  exclusively  upon 

116 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 

their  efforts  to  educate  the  individual  in  the 
problem  of  his  own  evolutionary  develop- 
ment until  he  is  able,  by  the  exercise  of  his 
own  evolved  powers,  to  break  the  tie,  or 
overcome  its  effects,  and  thus  liberate  him- 
self from  the  earth-bound  condition. 

Those  who  have  attained  to  a  high  degree 
of  spiritual  evolution  and  unfoldment  before 
physical  death  overtakes  them,  are  corre-. 
spondingly  free  from  the  earth-bound  con- 
dition, from  the  moment  the  separation  of 
the  two  bodies  is  complete.  Or,  if  the  mag- 
netic bond  is  sufficiently  strong  to  hinder 
them  in  their  freedom  of  spiritual  action, 
they  soon  overcome  it  by  their  own  inherent 
power. 

In  truth,  many  of  the  most  highly  evolved 
Souls  upon  earth  have  learned  to  overcome 
this  magnetic  attraction  of  the  physical  body, 
even  before  physical  death  occurs.  Such  as 
these  pass  directly  through  the  magnetic  field 
and  ascend  at  once  into  the  pure  spiritual 
realms. 

The  entire  problem  of  spiritual  evolution 
has  its  foundation  in  the  living  of  a  life  in 

117 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

conformity  with  the  individual's  highest  con- 
cept of  Equity,  Justice  and  Right. 

Such  a  life  results  in  a  constant  refine- 
ment of  the  material  body  in  which  the  indi- 
vidual Soul  clothes  itself  upon  any  given 
plane  of  life.  Accompanying  this  active  ex- 
emplification of  moral  principles  goes  hand 
in  hand  the  educational  work  of  the  individ- 
ual by  which  he  must  acquire  such  knowl- 
edge through  experience  as  enables  him  to 
master  all  those  forces  and  powers  which 
make  it  possible  for  him  to  prove  that  he  is 
ready  to  pass  on  to  a  higher  plane  of  life  and 
endeavor. 

When  he  has  acquired  the  knowledge  nec- 
essary upon  any  given  spiritual  plane,  and 
has  attained  to  the  degree  of  refinement 
necessary  through  the  exemplification  of  a 
moral  life,  his  preparation  for  the  next 
higher  round  of  life  and  experience  is  com- 
plete and,  by  the  natural  law  of  his  Being — 
the  Law  of  Spiritual  Gravity — he  passes  on, 
leaving  behind  him  the  spiritual  conditions 
which  have  bound  him  to  the  lower  plane 
of  life. 

Remember,  however,  that  this  process  of 

lit 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 

refinement  through  the  living  of  a  life  may 
be  accomplished  while  the  individual  is  yet 
in  the  physical  body  and  upon  the  earth  plane 
of  life.  When  he  has  acquired  sufficient 
knowledge,  together  with  sufficient  refine- 
ment of  his  spiritual  body,  he  may  pass  out 
of  the  physical  plane  of  life  directly  into  any 
plane  of  spiritual  life  for  which  he  may  thus 
have  fitted  himself  to  ascend.  And  that,  in- 
deed, is  one  of  the  most  inspiring  rewards 
which  every  individual  has  upon  the  earth 
plane  to  make  his  life  a  living  expression  of 
the  Moral  Law,  and  to  acquire  knowledge 
through  experience  in  conformity  with  the 
Evolutionary  Principle  of  Life. 

Remember  also  that  no  individual  effort  to 
acquire  knowledge  and  experience  for  benefi- 
cent purposes  is  ever  lost.  In  the  great  Book 
of  Nature  is  recorded  every  act  of  true  and 
unselfish  service  in  the  Cause  of  Humanity. 
And  every  such  effort  has  its  specific  and  ade- 
quate reward  in  the  preparation  of  the  in- 
dividual Soul  for  advancement  to  higher 
planes  of  life,  to  greater  accomplishment  and 
happiness. 

The  Man  of  Nazareth  was  not  deceiving 

119 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

his  disciples  when  He  assured  them,  in  ef- 
fect, that  if  they  would  do  the  things  which 
He  indicated,  and  exemplify  in  their  lives 
the  Law  of  Evolutionary  Unfoldment,  the 
time  would  come  when  they  would  not  only 
be  able  to  do  the  things  which  they  had 
marveled  at — when  they  saw  Him  do  them — 
but  they  would  be  able  to  accomplish  even 
"greater  things  than  these". 

He  was  but  outlining  to  them  the  inevit- 
able operation  of  the  great  Law  of  Com- 
pensation. 

This  great  Law  which  is  "the  same  yes- 
terday, today  and  forever"  is  the  key  to  all 
individual  unfoldment  and  development.  It 
works  today  exactly  as  it  did  two  thousand 
years  ago;  yea,  even  two  hundred  thousand 
years  ago,  or  from  the  beginning  of  Time — 
if  Time  ever  had  a  beginning.  And  it  will 
continue  to  work  the  same  inevitable  results 
to  the  individual  who  applies  it  to  his  life, 
tomorrow,  two  thousand  years  hence,  or  two 
hundred  million  years  hence,  or  until  the  end 
of  Time — if  Time  ever  has  an  ending. 

The  great  fact  which  I  desire  to  impress 
indelibly  is  this:    The  Laws  of  Nature  arc 

120 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 

fixed  and  immutable.  Her  processes  are  un- 
varying and  inexorable.  Her  rewards  are 
changeless  and  inevitable.  We  may  rely 
upon  them  today  with  the  same  assurance  and 
the  same  guaranties  as  did  the  Great  Friends 
— the  Wise  Men  of  the  East — who  followed 
the  "Star"  that  led  them  to  their  infant  Mas- 
ter in  Bethlehem  of  Judea.  Knowing  the 
Law,  they  followed  its  leading,  knowing  with 
absolute  certainty  that  it  would  guide  them 
aright. 

The  Great  Friends  of  today  also  know  the 
Law  and  they  travel  the  pathway  of  life  with 
the  same  unwavering  Faith  in  the  beneficence 
of  Nature  and  of  Nature's  God. 

One  of  the  most  common  errors  com- 
mitted by  those  who  pass  into  the  spiritual 
life,  is  to  take  for  granted  that  their  earthly 
philosophic  and  religious  views  are  correct. 
They  seek  only  to  justify  their  earthly  views, 
rather  than  to  learn  wherein  they  have  been 
at  fault.  The  natural  result  is  individual 
stultification  and  a  cessation  of  all  spiritual 
growth.  Such  individuals  often  remain  years 
upon  the  magnetic  field,  before  making  suf- 

121 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ficient  advance  to  gravitate  to  the  first  spir- 
itual plane. 

Some  years  ago  a  devout  minister  of  the 
Baptist  Church  became  interested  in  the  Sci- 
ence and  Philosophy  of  the  Great  School  of 
Natural  Science.  It  so  appealed  to  his  sense 
of  logic  and  good  sense  that,  in  spite  of  all 
his  internal  religious  protests,  he  could  not 
put  the  philosophy  out  of  his  mind  or  con- 
sciousness. He  frankly  admitted  that  he  was 
profoundly  disturbed  lest  he  might  find, 
upon  arriving  in  spiritual  life,  that  his  reli- 
gious views  and  doctrines  were  all  wrong. 
His  friend,  during  the  course  of  a  long  and 
interesting  discussion,  asked  him  what  he 
would  do,  if,  on  arriving  in  the  spiritual  life, 
he  should  find  things  very  unlike  he  had  been 
preaching  them  to  his  congregation: 

"I've  been  thinking  about  that  for  some 
time,  and  I've  made  up  my  mind,  in  that 
case,  to  ask  the  first  man  I  meet  on  the  spir- 
itual side  of  life  to  tell  me  where  I  can  go 
to  find  somebody  who  can  teach  me  the  truth 
about  life.  I'm  not  going  to  preach  baptism, 
predestination,  foreordination,  eternal  pun- 
ishment, nor  infant  damnation  over  there  un- 

122 


SPIRITUAL  EDUCATION 

til  I  know  more  about  that  life  than  I  do 
about  this.  In  fact,  I  think  I'll  take  a  vaca- 
tion the  first  thing,  and  then  organize  an  ex- 
ploration commission  to  find  out  the  Truth 
about  life,  before  I  accept  another  call  to 
preach." 

His  attitude  of  Soul  is  one  that  might  well 
be  recommended  to  a  very  large  number  of 
those  who  carry  their  dogmatism,  full  blown, 
with  them  into  the  spiritual  life,  only  to  find 
their  mistakes  by  the  slow  process  of  humil- 
iations and  defeats. 

The  open  mind  is  the  Highway  to  Knowl- 
edge. Whoso  travels  that  Way  will  earliest 
reach  the  goal  of  his  desires. 


I3S 


CHAPTER  XII 

SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION 


One  cannot  accumulate  vast  treasures  in 
money  and  estates  in  spiritual  life. 

^'Service"  is  the  only  medium  of  exchange, 
and  the  individual  must  therefore  earn  every- 
thing he  possesses,  and  he  must  earn  it  in 
personal  service. 

Remember,  that  a  human  Soul  in  a  physi- 
cal body  is  the  same  identical  Soul  after  it 
passes  on  into  the  spiritual  world.  The  only 
difference  is  in  the  fact  that  it  has  left  its 
physical  body  behind.  It  is  just  as  much  a 
spiritual  being  while  it  yet  occupies  its  physi- 
cal body  as  it  is  after  it  has  withdrawn  from 
that  body  and  emerges  upon  the  spiritual 
plane  clothed  in  its  spiritual  body. 

The  Soul — which  is  the  intelligent  essence 
of  individual  life  back  of  all  its  material 
bodies — is  the  same  essential  individual  at 
all  times.  The  real  individuality,  in  fact,  is 
in  the  Soul  and  not  in  any  of  its  bodies.     It 

125 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

is  the  Soul  that  sees  and  hears  and  feels  and 
hates  and  loves  and  enjoys  and  suffers.  When 
it  discards  its  physical  body  and  enters  into 
the  life  of  spiritual  material  and  spiritual 
conditions,  it  is  the  same  Soul,  possessing  all 
the  attributes,  the  feelings  and  the  desires  it 
possessed  while  it  yet  walked  the  earth 
clothed  in  its  physical  body.  In  other  words, 
it  enters  the  life  of  the  spiritual  at  exactly 
the  point  where  it  leaves  off  the  life  of  earth. 
It  is  in  nowise  changed  in  its  essential  nature. 
In  truth,  it  is  just  a  human  being  who  has 
moved  into  a  new  neighborhood  and  a  new 
environment. 

A  man  who  is  a  "devil"  in  physical  form 
will  continue  to  be  a  "devil"  in  spiritual  form 
— until  he  has  learned  the  great  lesson  that  it 
Joes  not  pay  to  be  a  "devil"  upon  any  plane 
of  life.  If  he  has  been  a  good  man  on  earth 
he  will  continue  a  good  man  after  he  arrives 
in  the  spiritual  life,  because  he  will  soon 
learn  that  goodness  is  the  only  thing  that 
really  pays — in  any  life.  If  he  has  found  his 
place  in  music  upon  the  earth  plane,  he  will 
continue  to  find  it  in  music  upon  the  spiritual 
plane.    If  he  enjoys  social  life  and  entertain- 

126 


i 


SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION 

ment  upon  the  physical  plane,  he  will  seek 
the  same  upon  the  spiritual.  If  his  ambition 
upon  earth  has  been  to  become  a  great  artist, 
the  same  ambition  will  govern  him  in  the 
spiritual  life,  and  he  will  try  just  as  hard 
there  to  gratify  that  ambition  as  he  did  here. 

His  own  natural  desire  and  preference 
determine  the  individual's  occupation  in  the 
spiritual  life.  For  instance:  If  his  natural 
desire  and  preference  are  to  become  a  great 
spiritual  musician,  he  is  first  instructed  in 
what  are  the  duties  and  responsibilities  of  a 
"Great  Musician"  in  the  world  of  spiritual 
liie.  He  is  made  to  know  just  what  are  the 
opportunities  which  that  profession  opens  to 
the  individual  to  serve  his  fellows.  He  is 
schooled  until  he  knows  the  Motives  that 
must  govern  the  musician  in  the  service  he  is 
to  render. 

Those  of  the  spiritual  life  have  musi- 
cal instruments  and  organizations  which 
transcend  beyond  all  comparison,  anything 
we  have  upon  the  earth  plane.  In  some  of 
their  great  symphony  orchestras  there  are 
many  thousands  of  players,  using  hundreds 
of  different  kinds  of  musical  instruments  un- 

127 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

like  anything  we  have  in  our  greatest  earthly 
orchestras.  They  also  have  vocal  associations 
containing  hundreds  of  thousands  of  the 
greatest  vocal  artists.  To  hear  one  of  their 
grand  operas  or  concerts  is  a  musical  treat  to 
those  who  hear  it  beyond  anything  that  we 
of  earth  are  permitted  to  enjoy.  It  is  in  such 
instances  as  these  that  those  of  the  spiritual 
life  employ  their  records  for  the  benefit  of 
the  masses  and  the  public.  These  records 
can  be  transmitted  and  reproduced  in  such 
manner  that  many  millions  of  their  people 
may  thus  enjoy  their  benefits. 

At  this  point  arises  a  suggestion  which 
should  be  of  especial  interest  to  artists  of  all 
kinds  upon  the  earth  plane,  including  musi- 
cians, painters,  artistic  designers,  and  so  on. 
It  is  this:  We  upon  the  earth  plane  have  a 
musical  scale  of  only  seven  distinct  tones. 
But  running  between  these  seven  tones  of  our 
musical  scale  are  infinite  shades  of  tone  which 
are  not  expressed  by  any  of  our  arbitrary  in- 
struments upon  the  earth  plane.  Even  the  hu- 
man voice  and  such  instruments  as  the  violin 
and  the  cello  conform  themselves  to  the  strict 
seven-tone  skeleton,  or  conventional  scale,  in 

i2i 


SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION 

all  forms  of  musical  expression  excepting 
what  we  term  the  "slur."  In  this  expression, 
the  voice  slides  from  one  tone  to  another  and 
in  its  course  touches  all  the  intermediate 
tones  possible. 

But  in  the  spiritual  life  their  musical  in- 
struments, as  well  as  their  methods  of  vocal- 
ization, are  constructed  upon  an  infinite 
scale,  instead  of  a  scale  limited  to  seven 
tones.  Thus  they  are  able  to  express  every 
conceivable  shade  of  musical  tone  the  Soul 
is  able  to  conceive.  The  work  of  artists, 
therefore,  becomes  infinitely  more  complex 
but  at  the  same  time  infinitely  more  perfect 
and  beautiful.  When  compared  with  the 
musical  instruments  of  the  spiritual  planes 
our  physical  instruments  appear  clumsy  and 
imperfect,  as  well  as  inadequate. 

The  spiritual  painter  makes  use  of  every  con- 
ceivable shade  of  color  running  between  the 
recognized  primary  colors  of  the  physical 
universe.  They  give  expression  to  sense  ex- 
perience which  is  unknown  upon  the  physical 
plane.  Our  physical  painters,  in  their  en- 
deavors to  "mix"  colors,  are  able  to  obtain 
certain  intermediate  colors  which  only  serve 

129 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

to  suggest  the  infinite  possibilities  of  art  upon 
the  spiritual  planes,  where  every  conceivable 
shade  of  every  color  is  utilized  in  bringing 
out  the  finer  effects  of  their  artistic  ideals. 

This  differentiation  in  the  power  of  ex- 
pression is  observable  in  every  department  of 
artistic  lines  of  endeavor  upon  the  spiritual 
planes.  The  intensified  refinement  of  spir- 
itual material  adapts  itself  to  the  unfoldment 
of  the  higher  and  finer  designs  of  the  Soul 
in  every  department  of  Nature. 

After  the  individual  has  been  educated 
sufficiently  in  the  basic  principles  of  spiritual 
life  to  have  a  clear  understanding  and  ap- 
preciation of  just  what  is  involved  in  any 
particular  occupation,  he  is  informed  in 
the  same  way  concerning  other  lines  of  en- 
deavor; and,  when  he  is  able  to  do  so  intelli- 
gently, he  is  permitted  to  select  his  vocation 
and  proceed  to  qualify  in  it,  with  every  fa- 
cility to  that  end.  If  he  should  learn,  how- 
ever, that  some  other  department  of  endeavor 
will  afford  him  greater  opportunity  for 
Service,  he  may  abandon  his  "Chosen  Ca- 
reer"— as  one  may  in  this  life — and  substitute 
some  other  vocation.    But  every  inducement 

130 


SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION 

which  may  influence  his  decision  in  this 
physical  life  may  exert  its  influence  in  that 
life.  After  all,  he  is  left  free  to  determine 
the  field  and  the  lines  of  his  occupation  there, 
as  here.  And  this  is  entirely  consistent  with 
the  Law  of  Life  which  makes  each  individual 
the  sole  arbiter  of  his  own  destiny.  If  this 
were  not  true,  what  would  become  of  the 
Law  of  Personal  Responsibility  and  Moral 
Accountability?  Remember  that  Nature  is 
Consistent. 

There  are  special  times  and  conditions 
when  and  wherein  an  individual  in  the  spir- 
itual body  may  be  of  special  service  to  one 
or  more  in  the  physical  life — provided  he 
knows  definitely  the  conditions  existing. 
Under  other  conditions,  however,  he  may  be 
of  far  greater  service  to  his  fellows  of  spir- 
itual life,  because  of  the  fact  that  they  are 
upon  the  same  plane  of  life  with  him,  and 
the  facilities  at  his  command  for  service  are 
better  adapted  to  his  uses  and  needs.  Here, 
again,  it  is  a  case  of  "each  in  its  proper  turn." 

If  the  individual  does  everything  in  his 
power  to  live  a  constructive  Life  upon  the 
earth  plane,  that  fact  of  itself  cannot  fail  to 

131 


THE  GREAT  KNO^VN 

carry  great  and  beneficent  help  to  all  within 
his  environment  on  all  the  planes  of  life 
within  the  range  of  his  influence.  After  all, 
the  greatest  problem  is  to  be  found  in  the 
Living  of  the  Life  in  such  manner  as  to 
Exemplify  the  Law — and  this  whether  one  is 
in  the  physical  or  in  the  spiritual  life. 

There  is  not  a  scientist  or  inventor  upon 
the  earth  plane  of  life  but  has  a  strong  spir- 
itual support  consisting  of  a  group  of  spir- 
itual intelligences  who  are  interested  in 
the  particular  lines  of  their  scientific  discov- 
eries and  inventions.  These  form  themselves 
into  a  strong  force,  surround  the  physical 
scientist  or  inventor,  make  a  spiritual  environ- 
ment of  strong  magnetic  conditions  which 
are  most  favorable  for  clear  and  concentrated 
thinking  on  the  part  of  the  earthly  scientist 
or  inventor.  At  the  same  time,  they  estab- 
lish conditions  which  enable  them  to  carry 
on  a  method  of  mental  suggestion,  so  delicate 
and  so  unobtrusive  as  not  to  disturb  the  sci- 
entist or  inventor,  nor  suggest  to  him  that  he 
is  being  influenced  or  helped  by  spiritual 
intelligences. 

Thus,  the  spiritual  intelligences  are  able  to 

132 


SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION 

make  an  environment  for  each  and  ever^' 
physical  scientist  or  inventor,  in  which  he 
is  not  only  able  to  do  his  own  best  indepen- 
dent thinking  and  mental  work,  but  in  which 
they  may  also  drop  a  mental  suggestion  now 
and  then,  which  will  set  him  thinking  along 
new  channels,  and  often  in  the  very  line 
which  enables  him  to  make  a  new  discovery 
of  great  value. 

Doubtless  there  are  many  instances  where 
spiritual  intelligences  exercise  hypnotic  con- 
trol over  inventors  upon  the  earth  plane.  All 
such  cases  result  in  great  harm  to  the  indi- 
vidual under  hypnotic  control. 

It  is  possible  to  make  spiritual  conditions 
which  will  constitute  a  wonderful  environ- 
ment and  atmosphere  in  which  a  physically 
embodied  man  or  woman  may  be  able  to 
work  out  results  which  otherwise  would  be 
virtually  impossible,  and  do  it  without  in  the 
least  exercising  control  of  any  kind  or  de- 
gree over  the  mind  or  powers  of  the  indi- 
vidual. It  simply  results  in  removing  from 
the  individual  every  spiritual  condition  and 
obstruction  which  would  divert  or  hinder  the 
absolutely  free  and  normal  activities  of  the 

1S3 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

physically  embodied  mind  and  intelligence. 

It  is  even  possible,  as  in  the  instances  I 
have  already  mentioned,  for  spiritual  scien- 
tists and  helpers  to  make  conditions  through 
which  independent  telepathic  suggestions 
may  be  transmitted  from  them  to  the  phys- 
ically embodied  cooperator,  v^ithout  in  the 
smallest  degree  invoking  the  destructive 
power  of  subjective  psychic  control. 

To  understand  this  it  is  necessary  to  keep 
in  mind  the  fact  that  any  sort  of  mental  as- 
sociation which  leaves  each  mind  free  and 
independent  to  act  according  to  its  own  ra- 
tional volition,  does  not  involve  subjection  or 
control  to  any  extent  or  in  any  form.  When 
you  and  your  neighbor  meet  upon  the  street 
and  hail  each  other,  or  stop  and  pass  the  time 
of  day,  or  discuss  the  weather,  or  the  news  of 
the  day,  or  even  engage  in  political  contro- 
versy, there  is  no  subjective  psychic  control 
of  either  over  the  other.  You  are  simply  ex- 
changing independent  thoughts  voluntarily. 

Now,  it  is  possible  for  spiritual  intelli- 
gences to  establish  such  conditions  and  rela- 
tions between  them  and  an  individual  in  phys- 
ical life,  that  the  same  sort  of  independent 

134 


SPIRITUAL  OCCUPATION 

exchange  of  thought  can  occur  without  harm 
to  either. 

These  thoughts  and  suggestions  thus  trans- 
mitted are  free  and  independent  mental  sug- 
gestions, transmitted  over  spiritual  wires,  as 
it  were.  They  reach  the  individual  through 
his  spiritual  channels  of  sense,  even  while  he 
is  using  his  physical  channels  to  their  full  ca- 
pacity. You  may  call  this  telepathy,  spiritual 
suggestion,  mental  suggestion,  or  anything 
you  like  —  except  hypnotic  or  subjective 
control. 

Thus,  it  will  be  observed,  the  occupations 
are  as  many  and  varied  upon  the  spiritual 
planes  of  life  as  upon  the  physical. 


135 


CHAPTER  XIII 


SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 


The  method  of  communication  among 
those  on  the  spiritual  planes  is  entirely  a  mat- 
ter of  individual  choice.  Those  who  are  best 
learned  in  the  English  tongue  speak  the  Eng- 
lish language;  those  who  are  accustomed  to 
speaking  the  French  language  make  use  of 
that  language;  others  use  German,  Italian, 
Greek,  Hebrew,  etc.  In  truth,  every  lan- 
guage of  earth  is  spoken  upon  the  spiritual 
planes  of  life.  But,  as  soon  as  the  spiritual 
individual  learns  the  forceful  language  of 
impulse,  these  various  forms  of  speech  are  of 
no  special  advantage  to  the  individual.  This 
is  because,  no  matter  what  language  an  indi- 
vidual may  employ  upon  the  spiritual  planes 
in  which  to  clothe  his  thought,  the  thought 
itself,  is  the  thing  which  is  transmitted,  and 
not  the  words  in  which  it  is  clothed. 

Thought  is  a  force;  or,  at  least,  it  involves 
the  exercise  of  a  force.        This  means  that 

137 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

each  and  every  thought  the  mind  formulates, 
sets  in  motion  the  etheric  substance  of  the 
universe. 

This  thought-force,  v^rhen  not  definitely 
directed  by  the  thinker,  radiates  in  all  direc- 
tions from  the  center  of  thought,  just  as  do 
the  etheric  and  atmospheric  waves  radiate  in 
all  directions  from  one  of  our  modern  radio 
stations.  But  the  direction  of  their  travel  is 
absolutely  within  the  control  of  the  thinker, 
so  that  he  may  direct  them  into  definite  cur- 
rents, as  he  wills.  When  I  call  the  Master, 
I  fix  him  definitely  in  my  own  mind.  That 
act  alone,  on  my  part,  establishes  a  fixed  and 
definite  line  of  sympathy  (or  communica- 
tion) between  my  mind  and  his.  This  cre- 
ates the  definite  channel  (or  wire)  over  and 
upon  which  my  thought  then  travels  directly 
to  him  along  that  fixed  and  definite  line. 

The  nearest  approach  to  this  process  which 
we  have  on  our  side  of  life  is  in  our  use  of 
wireless  telegraphy  and  wireless  telephony. 
This  is  but  a  much  coarser  physical  means 
of  transmitting  thought  than  the  one  I  use  to 
call  the  Master. 

By   the   wireless   telephone,   the   sound   of 

138 


SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 

the  voice  travels  upon  the  etheric  waves  of 
the  earth  plane.  One  can  direct  them  in 
straight  lines,  by  the  establishment  of  wire- 
less stations,  or  "nodes"  —  as  our  spiritual 
scientists  call  them. 

I  make  use  of  the  same  method  in  calling 
and  talking  with  the  Master,  only  I  am  on 
the  earth  plane,  while  he  is  on  the  spiritual. 
It  is  all  a  matter  of  the  degree  of  fineness  of 
the  force  employed. 

Thought  is  not  only  a  mere  force;  it  is  a 
force  that  is  set  in  motion  by  the  Soul  of  the 
thinker.  The  Soul  impulse — or  psychic  force 
— carries  through  all  the  planes  of  matter, 
and  can  be  caught  and  understood  by  all  who 
are  sensitive  enough  to  respond  to  it.  The 
physical  words,  which  are  but  a  crude  cloth- 
ing of  the  soul  impulse,  carry  solely  upon  the 
physical  plane — and  often  but  a  very  short 
distance  even  there.  They  can  be  heard  only 
by  those  who  are  equipped  with  a  physical 
ear  and  a  physical  brain;  for  these  are  the 
physical  instruments  for  the  transmission  and 
the  reception  of  purely  physical  sounds  from 
one  individual  to  another  on  the  earth  plane. 

Thought  is  simply  an  impulse,  propelled 

139 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

from  the  individual  mind  through  the  power 
of  his  own  Will  and,  when  it  reaches  the 
thought  receiver  of  another  Soul,  that  other 
Soul  registers  the  exact  impulse  of  the  mind, 
or  Soul,  of  the  sender.  In  this  case  it  is  not 
expressed  in  words  at  all,  but  is  merely  an 
impulse  of  the  Soul.  It  is  something  more 
than  what  we  generally  term  "Thought 
Transference"  or  "Mental  Telepathy,"  as  we 
know  of  these  methods  upon  the  earth  plane 
at  the  present  time.  The  important  distinc- 
tion lies  in  this:  In  the  process  of  mental 
telepathy,  as  we  employ  it  upon  the  earth 
plane,  the  sender  endeavors  to  transmit  some 
definite  statement  expressed  mentally  or 
otherwise  in  definite  words.  This  is  not 
always  true,  but  it  is  the  more  frequent 
method  employed. 

In  the  Language  of  Impulse,  however, 
there  is  no  effort  to  transmit  any  message 
expressed  in  words.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
consists  of  an  impulse  of  the  Soul  which  the 
sender  desires  to  transmit  to  another  individ- 
ual Soul.  It  may  be,  and  often  is,  but  a  very 
definite  desire  or  a  very  definite  sense  experi- 
ence.  The  sender  realizes  in  himself  the  ex- 

140 


SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 

act  impulse  that  would  express  the  meaning 
he  desires  to  transmit.  Then  by  the  power 
of  his  Will,  fixed  upon  the  receiver,  he  gives 
the  propelling  power  which  transmits  that 
impulse  as  a  definite  experience.  The  re- 
ceiver gets  it,  not  as  a  spoken  message,  but  as 
an  exact  experience  which  is  being  realized 
in  the  Soul  of  the  sender  at  the  time. 

Every  thought  expressed  in  physical  words 
is  an  impulse  of  the  Soul  and,  as  such,  is  also 
expressed  at  the  same  time,  and  by  the  same 
impulse,  in  spiritual  words.  You  will  bet- 
ter understand  just  what  this  means,  if  you 
will  bear  in  mind  the  scientific  fact  that  the 
impulse  of  speech  is  an  impulse  of  the  Soul. 
It  expresses  itself  through  both  the  physical 
channels  and  the  spiritual  at  the  same  time — 
provided  both  sense  channels  are  open  and 
active. 

This  is  equally  true  of  those  upon  the 
physical  plane,  even  as  they  go  about  their 
daily  tasks  and  occupations.  It  is  for  this 
reason  that  those  upon  the  spiritual  plane 
can  hear  what  we,  upon  the  physical  side, 
say  to  each  other  when  we  converse  without 
any  thought  or  intention  of   conveying  our 

141 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

thoughts  to  any  but  those  upon  the  physical 
plane  with  whom  we  are  directly  talking. 
Even  though  we  are  conscious  of  using  only 
our  physical  organs  of  speech,  those  upon  the 
spiritual  plane  who  desire  to  do  so  can  get 
our  thoughts  which  are  conveyed  to  them 
through  their  spiritual  channels  of  communi- 
cation entirely.  The  Soul,  which  is  back  of 
both  our  material  bodies,  and  expresses  itself 
through  them,  sends  its  impulse  of  speech 
through  the  sense  channels  of  both  bodies. 
Therefore,  when  both  channels  of  sense  are 
open  and  clear,  each  receives  and  registers 
every  Soul  impulse  at  the  same  time. 

Those  upon  the  spiritual  side  who  hear  us 
get  the  spiritual  impulse  only — but  it  is  just 
as  clear  and  distinct  to  them  as  it  is  to  the 
individual  who  hears  it  upon  the  physical 
plane  with  his  physical  ears  only. 

The  power  of  thought  is  so  potent  and  so 
refined  in  its  action  that  a  physically  em- 
bodied Soul,  through  the  channels  of  its  spir- 
itual body,  may  transmit  its  thoughts,  its  de- 
sires and  its  purposes  to  those  upon  the  spir- 
itual plane  with  definite  certainty.  In  truth, 
whether  the  individual  so  intends  or  othcr- 

142 


SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 

wise,  whether  he  knows  it  or  not,  virtually 
all  his  spiritualized  thoughts  and  desires 
communicate  themselves,  through  its  spirit- 
ual channels  to  the  spiritual  planes  of  life, 
somewhat  as  the  Radio  operates — where  they 
may  be  "picked  up"  by  anyone  who  comes 
within  the  radius  and  plane  of  their  activ- 
ities. The  individual,  however,  who  know- 
ingly and  intentionally  makes  a  definite  effort 
to  communicate  with  one  upon  the  spiritual 
plane,  and  transmit  a  message  of  love  or  of 
sympathy  and  helpfulness,  accomplishes  his 
purpose  with  a  definite  certainty  far  beyond 
his  powers  to  transmit  thought  upon  the 
earth  plane. 

He  does  this  by  first  fixing  his  attention 
upon  the  individual  to  whom  he  desires  to 
send  his  message.  The  instant  his  attention  is 
so  fixed  in  loving  attitude,  the  magnetic  bond 
of  communication  is  definitely  established  be- 
tween those  two  specific  individuals.  Then 
if  he  will  formulate  his  mental  message,  as 
clearly  and  definitely  as  possible  even  in 
spoken  or  unspoken  words,  his  message  will 
travel  over  the  magnetic  bond  thus  estab- 
lished in  a  scientific  way  analogous  to  that 

143 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

which  accompanies  the  transmission  of  a 
telegraphic  message  over  the  telegraph  wire. 

This,  however,  does  not  mean  that  there 
are  no  other  methods  of  communication  on 
the  spiritual  planes  of  life.  Indeed,  they  can 
employ  any  one,  or  all,  of  the  channels  of 
sense  for  the  purpose  of  communicating  their 
definite  thoughts  from  one  to  another.  But 
aside  from  the  Language  of  Impulse,  the 
channel  of  sound  is  the  one  most  frequently 
employed.  By  this  is  meant  the  spoken 
words;  for,  spiritual  intelligences  are  able  to 
express  their  thoughts  in  any  language  of 
words  with  which  they  are  familiar,  as  well 
as  we  upon  the  earth  can  do.  And,  for  al- 
most all  purely  social  purposes,  this  is  the 
method  employed. 

Those  of  the  spiritual  life  also  have  vari- 
ous methods  of  transmitting  their  thoughts  in 
written  form.  These  methods  are  employed 
where  it  may  be  important  to  refer  promptly 
to  an  exact  record  of  what  has  been  said  con- 
cerning some  definite  subject  by  some  par- 
ticular individual.  Those  of  the  spiritual 
life  not  only  keep  certain  written  records  for 
reference,  but  they  employ  a  more  perfect 

144 


SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 

record  which  is  clearly  analogous  to  our 
physical  phonograph.  By  this  method  they 
are  able  to  make  a  record  which,  when  re- 
produced, gives  back  an  exact  expression  in 
vocal  words,  with  every  shade  of  vocal  em- 
phasis and  inflection  of  the  voice  so  recorded. 
They  can  transmit  these  records  to  almost 
any  distance  instantaneously.  This  method  is 
employed  whenever  and  wherever  it  is  in- 
tended or  desired  that  the  records  shall  be 
reproduced  in  the  presence  and  for  the  bene- 
fit of  a  number  of  individuals  at  a  distance. 
It  is  employed  when  any  of  the  Great  Spir- 
itual Friends  are  speaking  for  the  benefit  of 
the  general  public,  or  for  the  benefit  of  the 
students  in  the  various  spiritual  institutions 
of  learning.  The  record  of  a  public  address 
may  thus  be  duplicated  and  sent  wherever 
desired  and  there  reproduced  in  the  presence 
of  all  those  who  desire  to  hear  the  address. 

Suppose  an  audience  consisted  of  an 
Englishman,  a  Frenchman,  a  German,  a 
Bulgarian,  a  Persian,  a  Turk,  a  Hindu,  a 
Japanese,  a  Chinaman,  a  Swede,  and  a  rep- 
resentative of  each  additional  language  on 
earth.  Suppose  also  they  were  able  to  receive 

145 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

a  message  conveyed  by  the  language  of  im- 
pulse. If  they  were  each  to  attempt  to  con- 
vey the  same  message  in  words,  each  of  them 
would  employ  the  language  in  which  he  is 
accustomed  to  express  his  thoughts.  The 
Englishman  would  clothe  his  thought  in 
English,  the  Frenchman  in  French,  the  Ger- 
man in  German,  and  so  on  throughout  the 
entire  list.  This  fact  is  here  explained  in  or- 
der that  the  reader  may  understand  what  oc- 
curs upon  the  spiritual  planes  when  a  speaker 
is  delivering  to  an  immense  audience  a  mes- 
sage in  the  language  of  impulse.  His  audi- 
ence may  be  composed  of  those  who  naturally 
speak  the  various  languages  of  earth.  Each 
one  of  them  will  formulate  his  impulse  re- 
ceived in  the  language  with  which  he  is 
familiar;  and  if  he  attempts  to  pass  it  on  to 
another  who  is  not  able  to  receive  the  lan- 
guage of  impulse,  he  will  clothe  it  in  the 
words  with  which  he  is  familiar. 

The  "Language  of  Impulse,"  is  the  lan- 
guage most  commonly  employed. 

There  are  a  few  on  the  earth  plane  who  are 
able  to  transmit  and  to  receive  Soul  impulses 
of   thought.   They    do    this,    however,    inde- 

146 


SPIRITUAL  COMMUNICATION 

pendently  of  their  physical  bodies  or  phys- 
ical organs  of  sense. 

It  is  possible  to  receive  a  telepathic  mes- 
sage from  one  beyond  the  magnetic  field,  by 
an  individual  who  is  fully  awake  upon  the 
physical  plane. 

This  does  not  mean,  however,  that  all  in- 
dividuals upon  the  earth  plane  are  suffi- 
ciently developed  to  receive  such  messages. 
It  refers  only  to  those  who  are. 


147 


CHAPTER  XIV 


SPIRITUAL  GOVERNrvlENT 


Each  and  every  spiritual  plane,  from  the 
lowest  to  the  highest,  has  its  own  distinct 
form  of  government.  In  most  particulars 
these  various  forms  of  government,  on  the 
different  spiritual  planes,  find  their  analogies 
upon  the  earth  plane.  Perhaps  the  more  exact 
expression  would  be  that  each  and  every 
form  of  government  existing  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane  of  life  has  its  analogy  upon  some 
one  or  more  of  the  spiritual  planes. 

But  there  is  one  essential  particular  in 
which  the  analogy  does  not  hold — as  yet. 
This  is  in  the  fact  that  the  earth  plane  of  life 
has  no  centralized,  general  government  for 
the  entire  physical  plane.  Up  to  the  present 
time,  each  nation  upon  earth  has  its  own  form 
of  government,  and  that  government  is  su- 
preme. Its  citizens  recognize  no  other  gov- 
ernment as  having  any  authority  whatsoever 
over  them. 

149 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

I  think  it  would  not  be  unfair  to  say  that 
we  have  virtually  every  known  form  of  gov- 
ernment existing  anywhere  on  the  spiritual 
planes — on  the  earth  plane.  We  have  every- 
thing, from  the  absolute  autocracy  to  the 
broadest  and  most  liberal  democracy. 

But  we  have  no  centralized  government — 
as  yet — to  which  all  the  nations  of  earth 
acknowledge  allegiance,  and  to  which  they 
all  submit  as  the  one  supreme  governmental 
authority  for  the  entire  earth. 

The  one  difference  between  the  govern- 
ments of  the  various  planes  is  in  the  fact  that 
each  spiritual  plane  has  its  central  govern- 
ment which  extends  through,  and  has  juris- 
diction over,  the  entire  plane.  There  are  no 
nations,  or  states,  with  their  separate  and  dis- 
tinct jurisdictions  and  supreme  authorities  to 
contend  with.  There  is  but  one  government, 
to  which  every  individual  upon  any  given 
spiritual  plane  acknowledges  supreme  and 
unqualified  allegiance,  so  long  as  he  remains 
upon  that  spiritual  plane.  When  he  evolves 
beyond  that  plane  and  enters  upon  the  next 
higher,  he  becomes  a  citizen  of  that  next 
higher  plane  and  acknowledges  its  authority 

ISO 


SPIRITUAL  GOVERNMENT 

without  reservations,  until  he  has  evolved  to 
a  yet  higher  plane  of  spiritual  life — and 
so  on. 

No  two  spiritual  planes  of  life  have  exactly 
the  same  form  of  government.  And,  taken 
together,  the  governments  of  the  several  spir- 
itual planes  of  life  represent  virtually  all  the 
various  forms  of  government  existing  in  the 
various  nations  upon  the  earth  plane. 

For  illustration:  The  government  of  the 
first  spiritual  plane  of  life  is  a  pure  democ- 
racy. It  is,  indeed  and  in  truth,  a  govern- 
ment of  the  people,  for  the  people  and  by 
the  people.  It  has  its  president,  its  senate,  its 
house  of  representatives  and  its  departmental 
heads.  These  are  all  chosen  by  the  people  by 
direct  vote.  Their  duties,  responsibilities, 
prerogatives  and  powers  are  all  defined  by 
the  people.  They  are  chosen  in  such  manner 
as  to  establish  the  absolute  loyalty  of  each 
individual  to  the  cause  he  represents.  In  this 
plane  the  machinery  of  government  involves 
the  combined  energies,  intelligence  and  con- 
science of  a  vast  number  of  men  and  women. 

The  machinery  of  government  is  so  much 
cleaner,  so  much  more  easily  understood,  so 

151 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

much  more  wisely  administered,  that  polit- 
ical intrigue  and  treachery  are  virtually  un- 
known, even  upon  the  first  spiritual  plane. 

Upon  the  second  spiritual  plane  the  form 
of  government  is  still  democratic,  but  the 
machinery  is  simpler.  The  number  of  indi- 
viduals chosen  by  the  people  as  the  represen- 
tatives is  much  smaller.  This  is  because,  with 
added  intelligence  and  increasing  loyalty  on 
the  part  of  the  people,  the  task  of  govern- 
ment becomes  less  and  less  difficult  and  bur- 
densome. There  is  a  natural  tendency  toward 
self-government  in  all  the  evolutionary 
rounds  of  spiritual  life. 

It  will  not  be  necessary  for  me  to  follow 
the  development  of  government  through  all 
the  planes  of  spiritual  life;  for  I  will  be  able 
to  state  the  principle  which  governs  the  evo- 
lution of  governments,  or  of  government,  so 
you  will  be  able  to  understand  it.  All  I  need 
to  say  in  this  connection  is  that,  with  each 
higher  spiritual  plane  of  life,  the  form  of 
government  becomes  more  and  more  central- 
ized, until  in  the  highest  spiritual  plane  of 
this  planet  the  entire  governmental  authority 
is  vested  in  one  single  Individual. 

152 


SPIRITUAL  GOVERNMENT 

This  Individual,  however,  is  still  chosen 
by  the  people.  His  position  is  not  heredi- 
tary, as  in  the  monarchies  upon  the  earth 
plane.  He  is  still  the  representative  of  the 
people.  But  He  is  vested  with  absolute 
power  and  authority  to  administer  the  laws 
of  His  plane.  This  is  because  He  possesses 
the  intelligence,  the  conscience  and  the  Soul 
Evolution  and  Unfoldment  necessary  to  dis- 
charge the  Responsibilities  which  His  posi- 
tion fixes  upon  Him. 

Furthermore,  inasmuch  as  He  represents 
the  highest  development  of  intelligence  pos- 
sible to  the  evolutionary  status  of  the  earth, 
as  an  individual  planet  in  the  solar  system, 
He  has  general  jurisdiction  over  all  the  vari- 
ous governments  of  all  the  planes  of  life  be- 
low Him.  He  stands  alone  as  the  authorized 
and  chosen  "Ruler  of  the  Planet." 

By  adoption  He  is  recognized  as  the  Great 
Father  of  all  the  children  of  earth.  If  you 
will  consider  Him  in  this  sense,  you  will 
have  a  clear  and  definite  answer  to  many  of 
the  perplexing  questions  which  grow  out  of 
the  various  religious  concepts  of  earth  con- 
cerning "God,"  or  the  "Planetary  Ruler." 

153 


THE  CREAT  KNOWN 

Women  are  recognized  as  the  equal  of 
men  in  importance — in  all  that  pertains  to 
the  well-being  of  all  political  interests  and 
the  maintenance  of  social  and  political  insti- 
tutions, and  in  upbuilding  the  power  and  au- 
thority of  governments.  There  seems  to  be  as 
natural  a  cleavage  in  the  political  relations 
of  men  and  women  —  upon  the  spiritual 
planes — as  there  is  in  the  sex  relation  upon 
the  physical  plane. 

Women,  as  they  advance  upon  the  spiritual 
planes  of  life,  more  and  more  markedly 
gravitate  toward  the  sphere  of  educational 
activities  and  responsibilities.  They  become 
the  great  moral  force  back  of  all  govern- 
mental activities.  They  find  their  natural 
sphere  of  activity  and  effort  in  all  the  great 
educational  institutions.  They  also  represent 
the  aesthetic  and  artistic  background  of  so- 
ciety. In  music  and  art,  they  become  the 
natural  leaders  and  teachers,  especially  of  the 
young  upon  the  lower  planes,  and  of  the  less 
developed  upon  the  higher  planes. 

Men  as  naturally  gravitate  toward  the 
legal,  administrative  and  executive  phases  of 

154 


k 


SPIRITUAL  GOVERNMENT 

both  society  and  government.  It  is  for  this 
reason  that  the  active  responsibilities  of  the 
government  machinery  are  more  especially 
laid  upon  the  shoulders  of  men,  while  the 
educational  and  aesthetic  responsibilities  arc 
laid  upon  women.  It  is  still  the  same  prin- 
ciple which  impels  men  upon  the  earth  plane 
to  assume  the  positive,  aggressive,  forceful 
roles  of  life,  while  women  seek  the  more 
passive,  domestic,  aesthetic,  artistic  and  moral 
activities. 

Upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life  more  and 
more  clearly  the  Soul  of  woman  is  attuned 
to  the  aesthetic,  the  social,  the  altruistic,  the 
moral  and  the  Love  Principle  of  Nature; 
while  that  of  man  is  drawn  with  equal  force 
and  intensity  to  the  more  positive  and  aggres- 
sive activities  of  governmental  and  adminis- 
trative problems  of  Nature. 

This  natural  cleavage,  which  seems  to  run 
parallel  with  the  cleavage  of  sex,  appears  to 
contain  within  it  the  one  element  which  nat- 
urally and  automatically  avoids  what  might 
be  termed  "sex  competition."  By  this  I 
mean  that  it  leads  men  and  women  to  select 
naturally  those  lines  of  activity  which  no- 

155 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

where  bring  them  into  personal  competition 
for  either  place,  power,  influence  or  position. 

It  is  for  this  reason  that,  upon  the  lower 
spiritual  planes,  where  this  principle  has  not 
yet  found  expression  in  the  sexes,  we  find, 
here  and  there,  women  in  positions  of  gov- 
ernmental and  political  importance.  For  the 
same  reason,  the  sphere  of  men  upon  the 
lower  planes  of  spiritual  life  is  not  so  defi- 
nitely marked  nor  perfectly  defined  as  it  is 
in  the  higher  planes. 

But,  as  they  evolve  to  higher  planes,  and 
the  Law  of  Sex  operates  with  less  and  less 
obstructions,  both  men  and  women  find  their 
natural  places  as  harmonic  concomitants  in 
the  economy  of  Nature.  Upon  the  higher 
planes  of  spiritual  life,  the  active  responsi- 
bilities of  government  are  laid  upon  men  ex- 
clusively, and  women  are  not  found  in  posi- 
tions of  political  power  or  administrative 
responsibility.  But  they  do  stand  as  the 
great  Moral,  Altruistic  and  Love  Force  back 
of  government,  which  all  men  honor,  and  to 
which  all  men  acknowledge  allegiance. 

In  this  exemplification  of  sex  evolution  we 
note  the  fact  that  Nature  never  loses  sight  of 

156 


SPIRITUAL  GOVERNMENT 

the  great  fundamental  principle  of  Harmony 
which  finds  expression  in  every  phase  of  life 
and  activity. 

Thus,  it  will  be  observed,  that  "govern- 
menf  is  one  of  Nature's  established  institu- 
tions; that  it  exists  on  all  the  planes  of  life; 
and  that  it  adapts  itself  to  the  progressive 
development  of  all  conditions  of  Individual 
Life,  Intelligence  and  Society,  corresponding 
to  their  development  at  any  given  time. 


157 


CHAPTER  XV 


SPIRITUAL  WARS 


There  is  not  a  principle  of  life  or  of  rela- 
tionships which  impels  men  to  go  to  war 
upon  the  physical  plane  but  has  its  sup- 
porters upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life.  To 
make  this  entirely  clear,  even  before  the  great 
World  War,  there  were  those  upon  the  spir- 
itual plane  of  life  who  were  deeply  interested 
in  the  controversy.  Some  of  these  were  on 
one  side  of  the  question  and  some  on  the 
other.  There  were  millions  on  the  spiritual 
side  of  life  who  were  in  sympathy  with  the 
Germans,  and  there  were  millions  more  who 
were  in  sympathy  with  the  Allies. 

The  ablest  scientists  of  the  spiritual  world 
were  at  work  constantly,  endeavoring  to  as- 
sist our  earthly  scientists  and  inventors  in  the 
discovery  of  new  and  improved  methods  of 
warfare.  It  is  equally  true  that,  in  m.any 
ways,  their  efforts  were  successful. 

When  the  actual  clash  of  arms  came,  these 

159 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

opposing  spiritual  legions  aligned  themselves 
upon  either  side  of  the  great  controversy,  ac- 
cording to  their  sympathies.  While  they 
could  not  actually  bear  physical  arms  and 
fight  in  the  same  sense  that  the  contending 
armies  of  earth  fought;  nevertheless,  they 
could  and  did  align  themselves  as  closely  as 
possible  with  the  contending  forces  of  earth, 
and  they  exerted  all  the  influence  and  force 
in  their  power,  through  psychic  methods,  to 
sustain  the  courage  and  fighting  spirit  of  the 
contending  earthly  armies,  navies  and  air 
forces. 

Those  who  desired  the  Germans  to  win 
gathered  their  spiritual  forces  into  great 
armies,  and  entered  into  the  magnetic  field, 
where  they  could  approach  as  closely  as 
possible  to  the  German  armies  upon  earth. 
They  went  with  the  Germans  and  their  allies 
into  every  battle,  accompanied  their  forces  in 
every  charge,  exerted  all  their  powers  to 
make  their  presence  known  to  their  earthly 
comrades,  cheered  them  as  far  as  they  could 
do  so,  through  psychic  means,  sustained  their 
courage,  took  away  from  them  all  dread  of 
physical  death,  added  the  strength  of  their 

160 


SPIRITUAL  WARS 

magnetic  force  to  every  blow  that  was  struck 
by  their  earthly  allies,  and  did  everything  in 
their  power  to  help  win  the  war  for  the  side 
they  had  espoused. 

The  same  thing  was  equally  true  of  the 
spiritual  forces  that  aligned  themselves  with 
the  cause  of  the  Allies.  They  not  only  did  all 
they  could  to  sustain  the  soldiers  of  the  Allies 
upon  the  physical  plane,  but  they  exercised 
all  their  savage  powers  to  overcome  the  in- 
fluence of  the  spiritual  hosts  arrayed  against 
them. 

But  this  was  not  a  hand-to-hand  struggle 
of  the  spiritual  forces  with  each  other,  nor 
with  the  purpose  or  intent  of  "killing"  each 
other;  for  this  would  have  been  impossible. 
Nevertheless,  it  was  possible  for  one  of  the 
spiritual  armies  to  exercise  its  powers  against 
the  other  in  such  manner  as  to  destroy  its 
support  of  the  physical  armies  of  its  choice. 

There  were  some  very  definite  instances 
also  where  it  was  possible  for  the  spiritual 
forces  to  exercise  so  powerful  a  magnetic 
impulse  upon  the  physical  plane  as  to  turn 
aside,  or  push  back,  the  clouds  of  poisonous 
gases  that  covered  the  earth.     In  a  number 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

of  instances  the  Germans  were  completely 
dumbfounded  by  the  fact  that  their  poisonous 
gases  were  turned  back  upon  their  own 
armies,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the 
wind  and  other  physical  conditions  were  such 
that,  by  all  the  known  laws  and  conditions 
upon  the  physical  plane,  they  should  have 
been  carried  straight  forward  upon  the 
armies  of  the  Allies  and  should  have  over- 
whelmed them. 

These  apparent  "miracles"  were  due  en- 
tirely to  the  fact  that  the  spiritual  forces 
opposing  the  Germans  were  able,  at  those 
points,  to  center  their  spiritual  magnetic 
forces  upon  the  physical  magnetic  conditions 
of  the  earth  and  reverse  the  currents  which 
carried  the  poisonous  gases. 

In  many  other  instances  the  spiritual  forces 
were  so  numerous  and  the  magnetic  condi- 
tions they  made  were  so  strong  and  intense, 
that  there  must  have  been  a  semi-materiali- 
zation of  the  spiritual  armies  upon  the  earth 
plane.  It  was  not  an  uncommon  thing  for 
the  physical  soldiers  to  see  their  spiritual 
comrades.  In  some  instances  they  were  able 
to  get  well-defined  glimpses  of  great  armies 

162 


SPIRITUAL  WARS 

of  spiritual  soldiers  marching  with  them  into 
the  very  heart  of  the  most  terrific  battles  of 
the  war. 

Reports  of  these  conditions  were  sent  from 
the  battle-front,  from  time  to  time,  and  were 
published  in  some  of  the  leading  newspapers 
of  the  world.  Little  credence,  however,  was 
given  to  these  reports.  They  were  considered 
mere  fairy  tales,  or  gross  exaggerations  of 
natural  conditions,  and  of  no  value  from  a 
scientific  or  psychic  viewpoint. 

It  has  been  stated  by  reputable  correspond- 
ents of  the  leading  newspapers  of  England, 
France,  Germany  and  our  own  country,  at 
various  times,  that  it  was  not  an  uncommon 
experience  among  the  soldiers,  especially  just 
before  some  very  important  advance,  charge 
or  battle — and  more  especially  in  the  midst  of 
the  most  terrific  battles — to  see  great  hosts 
of  spiritual  soldiers  accompanying  the  move- 
ments of  the  physically  embodied  army,  and 
often  leading  the  advance  with  charging  cav- 
alry and  waving  banners. 

Such  experiences  are  entirely  within  the 
range  of  scientific  possibility.  Of  course,  due 
allowance  should  be  made  for  such  literary 

163 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

and  dramatic  ornamentation  as  would  fall 
under  the  head  of  "reportorial  license,"  in 
the  labor  of  putting  such  narratives  into  ac- 
ceptable verbal  expression.  Those  who  have 
been  present  with  the  spiritual  forces  on  such 
occasions,  or  who  have  accompanied  them  for 
the  purpose  of  observation,  are  in  position  to 
view  the  entire  subject  with  more  calmness 
than  have  been  most  of  those  who  have  given 
iheir  written  reports  to  our  physical  world. 
This  does  not  mean  that  they  question  the 
integrity  or  good  faith  of  any  writer  who  has 
had  the  rare  courage  to  give  to  the  world 
such  information  as  has  come  within  the  range 
of  his  investigations.  Neither  does  it  mean 
that  they  are  assuming  any  more  exalted 
standard  of  morality  for  themselves  than  that 
which  has  actuated  our  best  writers.  It  means 
only  that  their  point  of  observation  has  been 
such  that  they  could  view  the  activities  upon 
both  planes  of  life  at  the  same  time  and  could, 
perhaps,  differentiate  more  clearly  and  accu- 
rately between  them. 

When  great  bodies  of  men  meet  upon  the 
earth  plane,  they  generate  and  give  off  a  vast 
amount  of  physical  magnetism,  until  the  sur- 

144 


SPIRITUAL  WARS 

rounding  environment  is  surcharged  with  it. 
Assuming  that  such  a  vast  body  of  men  upon 
the  earth  plane  v^ill  attract  to  it  an  equally 
large  body  of  men  upon  the  spiritual  plane; 
and  assuming  that  it  is  a  common  Interest  in 
some  great  movement  that  thus  attracts  them 
together — all  of  which  is  true  In  many  in- 
stances— you  can  readily  understand  that 
these  conditions  bring  the  two  bodies  of  men 
very  closely  together,  in  fact  as  well  as  in 
sympathy.  This  vast  spiritual  throng  also  is 
generating  and  giving  off  into  the  common 
environment,  a  constant  flood  of  spiritual 
magnetism  which  mingles  with  the  physical 
magnetism  of  the  physically  embodied  hosts. 
The  quality  of  this  magnetic  energy,  in 
every  instance,  is  governed  very  largely  by 
the  grade  and  quality  of  the  emotions  and 
passions  of  the  men  constituting  these  two  co- 
ordinating throngs  of  men  so  brought  to- 
gether into  sympathetic  association.  And  the 
grosser  the  emotions  and  passions  which  im- 
pel them  to  action,  the  coarser  and  more 
tangible  to  physical  men  is  the  magnetism 
they  generate  and  contribute  to  their  mutual 
environment. 

165 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

These  two  vast  armies  of  men,  meeting  in 
one  coordinate  body  from  the  two  planes  of 
life,  are  actuated  by  the  emotions  and  passions 
which  take  men  into  battle  to  face  death  and 
destruction.  Following  the  principle  just  ex- 
plained, it  is  but  natural  that  the  magnetic 
conditions  of  the  common  environment  are 
not  only  of  the  coarsest,  but  also  of  the  most 
intense.  Hence,  we  have  here  all  the  condi- 
tions most  favorable  for  the  production  of 
phenomena  that  would  enable  the  spiritual 
forces  to  manifest  themselves  to  the  sense 
channels  of  the  hosts  of  men  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane.  The  spiritual  forces  have  been 
drawn  down  as  nearly  to  the  plane  of  earth 
as  possible.  That  is,  they  have  been  drawn 
into  the  magnetic  field  and  thus  are  in  such 
close  contact  with  their  physically  embodied 
comrades  that  almost  nothing  separates  them 
from  each  other. 

On  such  tragic  occasions,  and  under  such 
intense  magnetic  conditions,  it  is  possible  for 
the  magnetic  forces  so  to  combine  as  to  bring 
the  entire  spiritual  army  clearly  within  the 
physical  view  of  an  entire  earthly  army  of 
men.  On  some  of  the  most  intense  occasions, 


SPIRITUAL  WARS 

during  the  great  war,  it  is  more  than  likely 
that  just  this  thing  occurred.  It  is  virtually 
impossible  to  get  together  a  dozen  men  and 
women  upon  the  physical  plane  without  find- 
ing that  one  or  more  of  them  possess  a  con- 
siderable degree  of  spiritual  development. 
Some  of  them,  however,  appear  to  have 
virtually  no  spiritual  development  whatever. 
Others  have  but  little.  Others,  still,  possess  a 
greater  degree;  and  so  on,  running  the  entire 
gamut  between  virtually  no  spiritual  develop- 
ment at  all,  and  a  very  high  degree  of  spir- 
itual unfoldment. 

Bearing  this  simple  fact  of  Nature  in  mind, 
you  can  readily  understand  that,  in  a  vast 
army  of  men  such  as  made  up  the  hundreds 
of  miles  of  battle-front,  on  either  side,  there 
would  be  a  considerable  number,  all  along 
the  battle-front,  who  possessed  sufficient  spir- 
itual development  and  unfoldment  to  enable 
them  to  get  many  very  clear  visions  of  what 
was  transpiring  upon  the  spiritual  plane, 
within  the  range  of  their  immediate  environ- 
ment. Naturally,  there  would  be  a  very  large 
percentage  of  such  an  army  who  would  be 
entirely  oblivious  to  all  but  the  things  that 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

appealed  to  their  physical  senses  alone.  Then 
there  would  be  many  who  would  obtain  but  a 
fleeting  vision,  now  and  then,  governed  by 
their  natural  state  of  being  and  the  intensity 
of  the  magnetic  environment. 

The  type  and  character  of  spiritual  people 
who  would  thus  be  impelled  to  participate 
in  wars  upon  the  earth  plane  are  only  those 
who  naturally  inhabit  the  magnetic  field 
and  the  lower  strata  of  the  first  spiritual 
plane.  This  includes  the  fanatical  types,  and 
those  whose  spiritual  development  is  least  ad- 
vanced. There  are  many  upon  the  first  spir- 
itual plane  who  have  not  outgrown  the  im- 
pulses, desires,  prejudices,  superstitions  and 
evil  propensities  of  their  earthly  development. 

The  religious  fanatic  of  earth  remains  a 
fanatic  upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life  un- 
til education,  environment  and  the  evolution- 
ary impulse  have  lifted  him  above  that  level 
of  development.  The  political  fanatic  and 
partisan  on  earth  is  a  political  partisan  and 
fanatic  when  he  passes  into  the  spiritual  life, 
and  remains  so  until  he  evolves  above  that 
level  of  development.  The  criminal  and  the 
degenerate  of  earth  are  impelled  by  the  same 

168 


SPIRITUAL  WARS 

desires  and  impulses  in  this  higher  life  until 
time  and  the  evolutionary  process  of  Nature 
have  lifted  them  into  higher  rounds  of  spirit- 
ual life.  Many  of  these  various  classes  are 
natural  leaders  of  men  and  pow^erful  organ- 
izers of  concerted  movements.  In  such  great 
impulsive  crises  as  that  of  the  great  World 
War  they  find  inspiration  for  the  unlimited 
indulgence  of  all  their  fanatical  zeal  and  in- 
telligence. It  is  these  vv^ho  organize  and 
direct  the  spiritual  armies  in  their  activities 
during  such  crises ;  and  it  is  the  less  intelligent 
masses  who  follow  where  they  lead. 

In  many  instances  the  results  upon  them 
are  devolutionary  and  destructive,  and  they 
retrogress  until  they  come  to  recognize  their 
fundamental  error,  or  by  superior  educational 
influences  they  are  made  aware  of  the  de- 
structive nature  of  the  process  they  thus 
invoke.  Others  who  follow  are  often  able  to 
recognize  the  destructive  effects  of  their  activ- 
ities, and  they  voluntarily  abandon  the  de- 
structive attitude  and  seek  to  participate  in 
good  endeavors.  As  the  masses  of  humanity 
upon  the  earth  plane  evolve  to  higher  and 
more  constructive  attitudes  of  soul,  the  effect 

169 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

will  be  to  diminish  the  number  of  those  upon 
the  spiritual  side  who  will  participate  in  such 
wars  and  destructive  movements  of  earth  life. 


m 


CHAPTER  XVI 


SPIRITUAL  ANIMALS 


Animals  of  all  kinds,  from  the  lowest  forms 
to  the  highest,  have  spiritual  bodies.  They 
pass  out  of  their  physical  bodies  at  death  as 
do  men  and  women.  They  find  themselves 
inhabiting  a  finer  material  body  upon  a 
higher  material  plane.  But  all  animals  pass 
directly  at  death  into  the  magnetic  field. 

All  the  lower  forms  of  the  animal  kingdom, 
such  as  the  insects,  reptiles,  fish  and  many 
others,  never  rise  above  the  magnetic  field. 
There  they  live  their  little  round  of  spiritual 
life,  die,  or  disappear,  and  are  seen  no  more 
— as  such. 

But  the  higher  orders  of  the  animal  kind- 
dom,  such  as  the  dog,  the  cat,  the  horse,  the 
birds — especially  those  we  designate  as  "do- 
mestic," and  which,  upon  the  earth  plane, 
become  the  helpers  and  the  pets  of  mankind 
— possess  the  inherent  capacity,  under  the  in- 
telligent fostering  care  and  scientific  training 

171 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

of  their  masters,  and  those  who  love  them  as 
pets,  of  rising  above  the  magnetic  field  and 
condition  of  life  into  the  first  spiritual  plane. 
By  those  who  understand  the  natural  Law  of 
Refinement,  this  may  be  accomplished  in  a 
very  short  time.  If  left  to  themselves  en- 
tirely, comparatively  few  of  them  would 
reach  the  first  pure  spiritual  plane. 

We  can  obtain  some  suggestion  of  this  ap- 
plication of  scientific  knowledge  to  the  lives 
of  animals,  in  all  the  various  improved  forms 
of  animal  and  bird  life  upon  our  own  plane, 
wholly  due  to  the  scientific  knowledge  of  men. 
By  their  knowledge  of  the  Law  they  have 
improved  the  various  species,  such  as  the  dog, 
the  cat,  the  horse,  the  hog,  the  cow,  the 
chicken,  the  pigeon,  so  far  above  the  wild 
animals  and  birds  from  which  they  originally 
sprang,  that  it  would  tax  the  credulity  of  most 
men  if  they  could  but  compare  the  wild  an- 
cestors with  their  domestic  progeny.  And  all 
this  breeding  and  improving,  through  the 
application  of  the  scientific  knowledge  of 
mankind,  has  been  along  the  line  of  material 
refinement. 

If  left  to  themselves,  however,  these  domes- 

172 


SPIRITUAL  ANIMALS 

tic  improvements  would,  in  a  very  fev^  gen- 
erations of  miscellaneous  breeding,  revert  to 
Nature's  original  types.  The  domestic  dog 
would  revert  to  the  wild  coyote  or  wolf;  the 
beautiful  angora,  or  Persian  cat,  would  revert 
to  the  savage  wildcat;  the  splendid  race  horse 
and  the  mighty  draft  horse  would  revert  to 
the  wild  mustang;  the  wonderful  types  of  the 
domestic  pigeon  would  revert  to  the  common 
wild  pigeon;  the  Plymouth  Rock  chicken, 
and  all  other  fine  breeds,  would  revert  to  the 
sagehen  or  the  prairie  chicken;  and  so  on. 

I  call  attention  to  these  facts  (which  you 
can  readily  verify)  only  that  you  may  obtain 
some  slight  suggestion  of  the  power  which 
human  intelligence  has  to  supplement  Nature 
in  all  her  evolutionary  methods.  Through 
this  line  of  inquiry  you  may  learn  how  it  is 
possible  for  man  to  lift  certain  animals  far 
above  their  normal  spiritual  level  and  thus 
keep  them  as  their  pets  almost  indefinitely. 

And  this  is  important,  because  there  seems 
to  be  great  diversity  of  doctrin-es,  beliefs,  and 
so-called  scientific  pronouncements,  among 
the  best  intelligences  of  our  physical  world, 
concerning  the  subject. 

173 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

From  the  foregoing,  it  will  be  observed 
that  the  subject  of  animal  life  upon  the  spir- 
itual side  is  one  of  profound  importance  and 
well  worth  our  serious  consideration,  as  it 
gives  us  a  better  understanding  of  Nature's 
Evolutionary  Plan. 

Among  some,  if  not  all,  of  our  tribes  of 
American  Indians,  there  is  a  custom  which 
has  its  interest  in  this  connection.  At  the 
physical  death  of  an  Indian  brave,  his  friends 
and  fellow  warriors  upon  the  physical  side 
kill  his  favorite  horse  and,  in  some  instances, 
bury  the  bodies  of  the  two  together. 

This  custom  grows  out  of  the  fact  that 
the  Indians,  through  their  psychics,  come 
to  know  that  both  animals  and  men  persist 
after  physical  death.  They  also  know  that 
the  Indian  finds  his  greatest  pleasure  in  his 
horse.  Assuming  that  he  carries  with  him 
into  the  spiritual  life  the  same  desires,  ambi- 
tions, loves  and  longings,  they  conclude  that 
when  he  arrives  upon  the  spiritual  plane  the 
one  thing  he  will  most  keenly  miss  is  the  horse 
that  has  afforded  him  so  much  enjoyment  on 
the  physical  plane  of  life.  Therefore,  they 
send  him  his  horse  at  once,  so  that  he  may 

174 


SPIRITUAL  ANIMALS 

have  with  him  the  means  of  finding  greater 
happiness  in  his  new  life. 

In  this  they  have  reasoned  correctly,  for 
it  is  true  that  the  first  thing  an  Indian  brave 
inquires  after  when  he  arrives  upon  the  spir- 
itual side  of  life,  is  his  horse.  And  often 
the  horse  is  quite  as  much  gratified  to  be  with 
his  master  again  as  is  the  master  to  have  him. 

This  knowledge  among  the  Indians  is  the 
result  of  their  exact  knowledge  of  the  spirit- 
ual world.  There  are  many  among  them  who 
are  natural  psychics  and  who  are  far  more 
definitely  conscious  of  the  spiritual  environ- 
ment than  are  the  majority  of  the  older  races 
of  humanity. 


175 


I 


CHAPTER  XVII 


SLEEP 


Sleep  is  a  state  and  ccndition  of  the  indi- 
vidual Intelligence. 

But  what  is  that  particular  ''state  and  con- 
dition" of  the  Intelligence  we  designate  as 
Sleep? 

The  Great  School  has  made  a  special  study 
of  the  subject  for  more  than  100  centuries. 
During  that  time  it  has  learned  some  things; 
but  it  does  not  profess  to  have  learned  all 
there  is  to  be  known  on  that  subject. 

Among  the  things  definitely  known  are: 

The  physically  embodied  individual,  in  the 
sleeping  state  or  condition,  is  for  the  time  be- 
ing unconscious  of  the  physical  channels  of 
sense. 

But  he  is  not  entirely  unconscious.  This  is 
proven  by  the  fact  that  he  is  still  intensely 
susceptible  to  the  power  of  intelligent  sug- 
gestion. 

He  is,  for  the  time  being,  conscious  of  im- 

177 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

pressions  that  reach  him  through  the  channels 
of  the  spiritual  senses. 

In  perfect  physical  sleep  the  physical  body 
is  generating  magnetic  energy  rapidly,  but  ex- 
pends none  whatever. 

In  physical  sleep  the  Soul  withdraws,  as  it 
were,  away  from  its  direct  and  immediate 
touch  with  and  relation  to  the  exclusively 
physical  elements  of  its  organism.  This  does 
not  mean  that  the  Soul  gets  outside  the  phys- 
ical body,  nor  entirely  independent  of  it,  dur- 
ing physical  sleep.  The  withdrawing  is 
rather  a  drawing  within,  until  the  conscious- 
ness is  out  of  touch  with  the  purely  physical 
texture  of  the  body.  For  the  time  being  it  has 
taken  refuge  in  the  purely  spiritual  texture 
and  elements  of  the  composite  body.  Its  chan- 
nels of  communication  with  the  physical 
world  are,  for  the  time  being,  closed,  or  sus- 
pended. 

During  this  condition  the  Soul  is  in  im- 
mediate touch  with  and  relation  to  the  purely 
spiritual  elements  of  the  composite  body.  In 
its  receding  from  and  letting  go,  as  it  were,  of 
the  physical  elements  of  the  composite  body, 
it  has  merely  laid  down  temporarily  its  phys- 

17t 


SLEEP 

ical  instrument  and  for  the  time  is  identified 
with  and  operating  through  the  spiritual  only. 
This  letting  go  of  the  physical  has  reference 
not  only  to  the  physical  brain  but  equally  to 
all  parts  and  particles  of  the  physical  organ- 
ism. But  bear  in  mind  that  it  does  not  mean 
the  separation  of  the  two  bodies.  These  sus- 
tain virtually  the  same  relation  to  each  other 
as  they  do  when  the  individual  is  physically 
awake.  They  still  interpenetrate  and  inter- 
blend. 

Sleep  is  also  a  normal  condition  on  the 
spiritual  planes,  in  that  (within  certain  con- 
ditions and  limitations)  it  is  one  of  the  estab- 
lished provisions  of  Nature  for  the  renewing 
and  rejuvenation  of  the  spiritual  organism, 
very  analogous  to  that  of  the  physical 
organism. 

But  you  will  please  note  the  parenthetical 
phrase, — "within  certain  conditions  and  limi- 
tations." This  has  reference  to  the  fact  that 
in  the  refining  process  of  the  spiritual  body, 
as  it  evolves  from  lower  to  higher  spiritual 
planes,  sleep  becomes  less  and  less  a  vital 
necessity — in  direct  proportion  to  the  degree 
of   evolutionary    refinement    and    intensified 

179 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

activity — until  the  seventh  plane  is  attained. 
From  this  point  forward  sleep  is  not  necessary 
to  the  renewing  and  rejuvenating  process  of 
the  spiritual  organism. 

Up  to  this  evolutionary  point,  however, 
sleep  is  a  necessity — but  its  amount  is  invari- 
ably proportionate  to  the  degree  of  refinement 
and  evolutionary  unfoldment  of  the  individ- 
ual organism. 

Sleep  is  a  state  and  condition  of  Soul 
wherein  it  has  withdrawn,  temporarily,  from 
the  plane  of  physical  consciousness  and  closed 
the  physical  channels  of  sense.  In  deep, 
dreamless  sleep  the  physical  channels  of  sense 
are  entirely  closed  to  all  sense  impressions; 
and  the  Soul  is  functioning  only  through  the 
spiritual  senses. 

The  Soul  is  in  the  spiritual  body  always; 
but  the  spiritual  body  may  be  locked  in  the 
physical  body,  or  it  may  be  out  of  the  phys- 
ical body — depending  upon  the  conditions 
which  obtain  during  physical  sleep. 

In  the  very  largest  number  of  instances  the 
spiritual  body,  during  physical  sleep,  is 
locked  within  the  physical.  In  this  case  the 
Soul  is  actively  functioning  through  the  spir- 

ito 


SLEEP 

itual  body  and  is  completely  awake  on  the 
spiritual  plane;  because,  as  previously  ex- 
plained, the  physical  senses  are  entirely  closed 
during  deep  sleep,  and  the  spiritual  experi- 
ences make  no  impression  upon  them  at  all. 
It  is  only  during  partial  sleep  that  the  indi- 
vidual is  able  to  carry  the  spiritual  experi- 
ences over  into  physical  consciousness;  and 
this  is  because  the  physical  channels  are  par- 
tially open  and  capable  of  receiving  impres- 
sions to  that  extent. 

In  a  few  cases,  comparatively  speaking,  the 
spiritual  body  leaves  the  physical  during 
deep  sleep.  In  such  cases,  there  is  no  phys- 
ical remembrance  after  physical  awakening. 
This,  however,  does  not  occur  often.  In 
truth,  very  rarely  does  it  occur. 

The  last  three  sentences  are  especially  im- 
portant in  that  they  directly  contradict  the 
idea  that  in  ordinary  physical  sleep  the  two 
bodies  (physical  and  spiritual)  separate,  and 
that  the  Soul  during  that  time  inhabits  the 
spiritual  body  and  travels  at  will  throughout 
the  spiritual  realms,  independently  of  the 
physical  body.  This  is  not  true,  in  natural 
sleep.     It  is  seldom  true  even  in  hypnotic 

281 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

sleep.  It  is  only  under  the  most  extreme  con- 
ditions of  subjectivity  that  it  is  possible  to 
force  a  separation  of  the  two  organisms,  and 
whenever  it  does  occur  through  the  subjective 
process  it  is  accompanied  with  the  greatest 
danger. 

In  natural  and  complete  physical  sleep  the 
Soul  recedes  into  the  spiritual  body,  relin- 
quishing for  the  time  its  hold  upon  and  use  of 
both  the  physical  body  and  physical  mag- 
netism, and  retaining  its  direct  touch  with, 
hold  upon,  and  use  of  the  spiritual  body  and 
spiritual  magnetism  in  its  conscious  opera- 
tions. 

Upon  the  physical  plane  of  life,  sleep  may 
be  either  voluntary  or  involuntary.  For  illus- 
tration :  With  the  infant,  before  it  has  arrived 
at  an  age  where  it  has  any  understanding  of 
the  process  involved,  there  is  no  question  as 
to  the  fact  that  sleep  comes  and  goes  without 
the  control  of  the  individual  Will.  In  other 
words,  during  infancy  sleep  is  entirely  invol- 
untary. 

And,  indeed,  the  same  is  literally  true  of 
most  men  and  women.  With  them  sleep  seems 
to  be  quite  beyond  their  individual  control. 

182 


SLEEP 

But,  now  and  then,  we  find  an  individual 
who  has  made  the  subject  a  matter  of  deep 
and  profound  consideration.  He  finds  that, 
when  he  is  not  disturbed,  or  when  he  is  in  a 
state  of  nervous  relaxation  and  rest,  he  is  able 
to  banish  from  his  consciousness  all  the  condi- 
tions that  interfere  with  sleep;  and  he  will 
tell  you  that  he  is  able,  consciously  and  inten- 
tionally, to  put  himself  to  sleep.  What  he 
does,  however,  is  merely  to  remove  from  his 
consciousness,  for  the  time  being,  all  recog- 
nition of  the  things  and  conditions  that  keep 
his  attention  awake  and  fixed  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane  of  consciousness.  When  he  has 
done  this.  Nature  closes  the  channels  of 
physical  consciousness,  and  he  is  asleep — 
without  really  knowing  how  and  why  he 
became  so. 

But  there  is  yet  another  degree  of  Self- 
Control,  attained  after  long-continued  study 
and  personal  effort,  in  which  the  individual 
attains  what  is  known  as  "Mastership".  This 
is  a  development  and  growth,  the  direct  re- 
sult of  individual  effort  in  alignment  with  his 
individual  attention.  From  this  condition  of 
Mastery,  he  is  able,  of  his  own  volition,  to 

1S3 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

withdraw  his  consciousness  from  the  plane 
of  physical  nature,  as  truly  and  voluntarily 
as  the  average  man  is  able  to  remove  his 
clothing,  turn  down  the  cover  of  his  bed, 
cover  himself  and  do  everything  else  neces- 
sary to  induce  the  relaxation  of  nerves  out  of 
which  sleep  comes  to  his  physical  con- 
sciousness. 

One  who  has  attained  to  the  development 
of  complete  Mastership  is  personally  able  to 
control  the  channels  of  physical  sense  to  a 
point,  or  degree,  where  it  is  not  only  possible 
but  very  easy  for  him  to  withdraw  his  con- 
sciousness from  the  plane  of  physical  sensi- 
bility, and  voluntarily  close  the  channels  of 
physical  sense  perception.  In  this  state  of  de- 
velopment the  individual  is  master  of  phys- 
ical sleep. 

But  it  must  be  understood  that  this  volun- 
tary closing  of  the  physical  sense  channels 
produces  nothing  more  than  what  we  call 
''physical  sleep".  In  other  words,  it  pro- 
duces only  a  state  of  individual  unconscious- 
ness upon  the  purely  physical  plane.  During 
complete  sleep  on  the  physical  plane  there  is 
no  consciousness  of  anything  whatsoever  that 

184 


SLEEP 

is  occurring  on  the  purely  physical  plane  of 
life. 

But  this  must  not  be  understood  to  mean 
that  the  individual  Soul  is  also  asleep  upon 
all  the  spiritual  planes  of  life  at  the  same 
time. 

In  truth,  so  far  as  Science  knows,  the  in- 
dividual Soul  never  sleeps.  If  this  be  true, 
then  what  we  call  "sleep"  is  nothing  more 
than  a  state  and  condition  of  individual  con- 
sciousness wherein  the  channels  of  sense  are 
closed  to  one  or  more  of  the  planes  of  life 
upon  which  the  individual  consciousness 
functions. 

It  would  seem  that  throughout  the  evolu- 
tionary development  of  individual  conscious- 
ness, what  we  call  "sleep"  is  a  "universal 
need  of  life  processes",  until  the  Soul  has 
evolved  to  the  state  and  condition  of  the 
seventh  plane.  From  the  time,  however,  that 
the  Soul  arrives  at  the  plane  of  individual 
unfoldment  corresponding  to  the  seventh,  that 
need — which  has  been  "universal"  up  to  that 
point  of  evolution — is  entirely  overcome. 


185 


CHAPTER  XVIII 


DREAMS 


Dreams  are  of  two  distinct  classes  and 
arise  from  two  distinct  psychological  condi- 
tions of  the  dreamer,  namely: 

1.  The  ordinary,  illogical,  disjointed,  un- 
sequential  jumble  of  impressions  from  which 
the  dreamer  is  unable  to  bring  back  to  wak- 
ing memory  anything  of  intelligent  meaning 
or  significance.  These  seem  to  be  nothing 
more  than  a  kaleidoscopic  series  of  unrelated 
impressions,  without  intelligent  significance. 
One  will  see  a  horse  with  a  silk  hat  on  one 
ear  and  a  grin  on  his  face  resembling  some 
individual  he  knows.  The  horse  speaks  to 
him,  but  while  he  is  talking  the  horse  be- 
comes a  negro  mammy  with  a  pickaninny  un- 
der one  arm.  She  honks  like  a  Ford  machine, 
falls  over  a  precipice,  turns  into  a  negro 
camp-meeting,  and  a  crow  sits  on  a  treetop 
and  sings  the  Toreador  song  in  a  bass  voice. 

In  the  process  of  going  to  sleep  the  chan- 

187 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

nels  of  physical  sense  become  closed,  if  the 
sleep  reaches  the  depth  of  complete  uncon- 
sciousness. But  on  the  way  to  that  state  of 
deep  unconscious  sleep,  or  on  the  way  back 
to  physical  consciousness  from  that  same 
state  of  deep  sleep,  the  consciousness  passes 
through  the  process  of  letting  go  of,  or  grasp- 
ing again,  the  physical  channels  of  sense.  In 
many  instances  the  individual  does  not  reach 
the  state  of  profound  unconscious,  or  dream- 
less sleep. 

In  either  of  these  cases,  the  physical  chan- 
nels of  sense,  which  are  but  partially  closed, 
register  upon  the  physical  consciousness  the 
fleeting  scraps  of  memory,  without  sequence, 
neither  clear  nor  complete,  but  in  a  sort  of 
fleeting  jumble  of  unrelated  impressions. 
Doubtless  you  have  had  many  such  experi- 
ences and  have  been  amused  by  them.  They 
arise  from  the  fact  that  the  physical  chan- 
nels of  sense  are  not  completely  closed,  but 
are  just  sufficiently  open  to  catch  the  fleeting 
impressions  that  flit  through  the  semi-con- 
scious mind  on  its  way  to  or  from  the  land  of 
deep  and  dreamless  sleep. 

188 


DREAMS 

These,  in  truth,  are  the  only  real  "dreams" 
we  experience. 

2.  As  the  consciousness  of  the  individual 
is  on  its  way  to  or  from  the  land  of  dreamless 
sleep — before  the  physical  channels  of  sense 
are  entirely  closed — consciousness  begins  to 
register  through  the  spiritual  channels  of 
sense  impressions  which  it  is  receiving  di- 
rectly from  its  spiritual  environment  on  the 
other  side  of  life.  These  are  real  spiritual 
experiences,  but  they  are  brought  back  to 
waking  physical  consciousness  only  because 
the  channels  of  physical  sense  are  not  entirely 
closed.  Sometimes  the  fleeting  physical  im- 
pression of  real  dreams  becomes  confused  in 
the  consciousness  with  these  purely  spiritual 
experiences,  and  the  sequence  of  spiritual 
experiences  is  lost. 

But  in  most  of  these  experiences,  where  the 
spiritual  channels  of  sense  are  registering 
vivid  impressions,  definite  personalities  im- 
press themselves  upon  the  senses  with  suffi- 
cient vividness  to  carry  the  spiritual  experi- 
ence to  the  threshold  of  physical  sense  per- 
ception, and  the  waking  consciousness  carries 

189 


THE  GliEAT  KNOWN 

the   complete   spiritual    experience   back   to 
physical  consciousness. 

Before  the  physical  senses  are  entirely 
closed,  or  suspended,  the  attention  of  the  in- 
dividual becomes  definitely  fixed  upon  the 
spiritual  plane  and  its  environment.  The 
result  is  that  the  partially  opened  phys- 
ical sense  channels  pick  up  the  spiritual  im- 
pressions and  carry  them  back  to  physical 
consciousness. 

In  such  so-called  "dreams"  there  is  alvs^ays 
a  definite  and  sequential  chain  of  experiences 
which  carry  the  unmistakable  impression  of 
actual  experiences.  Many  times  these  expe- 
riences take  the  form  of  a  clear  and  distinct 
"vision."  The  individual  actually  sees  the 
spiritual  environment,  the  spiritual  people, 
and  hears  with  distinctness  what  the  spiritual 
individuals  are  saying.  In  most  of  these  spir- 
itual experiences  (for  that  is  what  they  are) 
there  is  a  definite  purpose  which  seems  to 
run  through  all  the  "vision,"  This  is  be- 
cause oftentimes,  in  such  experiences,  the 
spiritual  Friends  are  endeavoring  to  convey 
to  the  "dreamer"  some  definite  suggestion, 
message,  vision  or  experience  which  they  de- 

190 


DREAMS 

sire  him  to  carry  back  to  physical  memory. 

Sometimes  one  is  distinctly  conscious,  after 
awaking  to  physical  consciousness,  that  he 
has  been  with  somebody  of  importance, 
or  in  the  midst  of  some  definite  situation  and 
experience  that  has  an  important  meaning 
for  him — and  yet,  he  is  unable  to  bring 
back  the  consciousness  of  any  definite  person- 
ality, or  any  distinct  situation  or  scene.  He 
brings  back  with  him  only  the  impression 
of  something  important  and  significant.  He 
gets  no  intimation  or  suggestion  of  just  what 
it  is,  or  what  it  is  like;  but  nothing  can  erad- 
icate the  fixed  impression  of  the  experience 
as  a  fact,  and  that  it  was  of  importance  either 
to  himself  or  to  others. 

In  such  an  experience  one  may  see,  with 
great  distinctness,  a  group  of  people,  men 
and  women,  sitting  about  a  table,  or  moving 
among  one  another  in  a  reception  room,  or 
listening  to  one  who  is  addressing  them  from 
a  rostrum.  Every  phase  of  the  picture,  or 
vision,  is  suggestive  of  some  definite  purpose. 
The  events  observed  are  natural  and  sequen- 
tial, and  are  definitely  related  to  each  other 
as  a  part  of  the  whole  experience.   The  peo- 

191 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

pie  may  be,  some  of  them,  relatives  or 
friends  of  earth  who  have  passed  into  spiritual 
life.  In  any  event,  the  dreamer  brings  back 
to  physical  consciousness  enough  of  the  ex- 
perience to  identify  it  as  something  definite 
and  distinct,  having  a  purposeful  meaning  of 
some  sort;  but  often  he  is  not  able  to  carry  it 
back  to  physical  consciousness.  He  may  have 
the  distinct  impression  that  this  is  an  experi- 
ence he  must  remember  after  he  is  physically 
awake.  He  knows  that  it  has  some  definite 
meaning  for  Him,  and  he  determines  to 
remember  it  all  after  he  is  physically  awake. 
In  many  instances  the  very  effort  he  makes  to 
carry  back  the  message  or  the  vision  or  the 
experience  to  physical  consciousness  is  the 
thing  that  closes  the  physical  channels  an  in- 
stant before  his  consciousness  is  physically 
awake.  In  such  instances  he  comes  back  to 
physical  consciousness  with  the  distinct  real- 
ization that  he  was  making  an  intense  effort 
to  remember,  but  that  '^something  slipped'* 
just  at  the  wrong  time,  and  the  meaning  of 
the  experience  is  not  brought  back  to  phys- 
ical consciousness.  He  can  even  see  the  per- 
sonalities  with   vivid   distinctness,    and    hear 

192 


DREAMS 

their  voices.  He  can  hear  the  central  figure 
in  the  vision  say  to  him:  "Now,  remember 
this  that  I  am  telling  you,  and  do  not  let  it 
get  away  from  you."  He  tries  to  obey,  and 
is  sure  of  his  success;  but  just  at  the  crucial 
instant  when  he  is  on  the  very  threshold  of 
physical  awakening,  that  "something  slips," 
and  he  comes  back  to  physical  consciousness 
with  a  gasp,  but  with  the  disappointing  sense 
that  "the  thing  got  away"  from  him. 

There  are  infinite  variations  upon  these 
real  spiritual  experiences;  but  they  generally 
differentiate  themselves  from  the  jumble  of 
real  dreams  by  the  fact  that  there  is  some- 
thing in  them  that  impresses  one  with  the 
fact  that  there  is  a  purpose  back  of  them, 
and  that  he  was  on  the  verge  of  learning 
some  lesson  of  great  importance — //  he  only 
could  carry  it  back  to  physical  memory. 

Again,  one  awakes  to  physical  conscious- 
ness with  the  definite  and  distinct  impression 
that  he  has  been  out  of  his  physical  body  and 
has  traveled  to  some  great  distance  and  re- 
turned again.  He  may  have  the  distinct  im- 
pression that  someone  accompanied  him  on 
his  journey  into  the  unknown  country;   but 

193 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

he  could  not  see  the  individual  clearly,  or  the 
individual  kept  himself  concealed  purposely, 
for  some  unknown  reason. 

In  some  of  the  experiences  of  traveling  "in 
foreign  countries"  one  is  able  to  bring  back 
to  physical  consciousness  the  fact  of  leaving 
the  physical  body.  He  even  turns,  after  he  is 
out  and  free,  and  looks  at  his  own  physical 
body  lying  upon  the  bed.  He  starts  to  leave 
it,  turns  and  looks  back  at  it,  and  indulges 
himself  in  rational  speculations  concerning  it. 
Then  he  goes  away,  and  is  conscious  of  trav- 
eling, of  sailing  through  space  at  great  speed, 
of  seeing  many  wonderful  things;  then  he  re- 
turns. He  realizes  with  definite  certainty, 
that  he  is  coming  back  to  his  physical  body. 
Finally,  after  moving  on  and  on  through 
seemingly  endless  space,  he  at  last  arrives  at 
his  starting  point.  Sure  enough,  there  is  his 
physical  body,  lying  just  as  he  left  it.  He 
watches  it  for  a  time.  It  lies  there  breathing 
as  if  it  were  sleeping  naturally.  He  wonders 
if  it  is  really  necessary  for  him  to  enter  it  and 
take  up  the  physical  life  again.  The  ex- 
perience through  which  he  has  just  passed 
is  one  of  such  a  delightful  sense  of  liberty 

194 


DREAMS 

and  freedom  from  all  limitations,  that  he  is 
reluctant  to  leave  it  and  come  back  to  earth. 
He  is  tempted  to  say  "goodbye"  to  the  phys- 
ical body  and  sail  back  into  space  again. 
Perhaps  he  would  do  so,  if  it  were  not  for  the 
fact  that  he  feels  the  urge  of  the  mysterious 
companion  who  keeps  himself  concealed  from 
his  view,  silently  but  positively  impressing 
him  with  the  fact  that  he  must  go  back  into 
the  physical  body  again,  and  that  he  must 
not  delay  the  matter  longer. 

Then  there  comes  the  acquiescing  impulse 
to  get  back.  He  wakens  and  knows  that  he  is 
back  again  in  the  physical  body.  But  still 
there  persists  the  unmistakable  realization  of 
the  fact  that  he  has  literally  and  truly  been 
out  of  his  physical  body,  has  traveled  swiftly 
through  great  distances,  seen  many  unusual 
things,  experienced  many  inexpressible  emo- 
tions, and  is  back  at  his  starting  point  to  take 
up  his  physical  life  where  he  left  it. 

These  are  not  ''dreams." 

True,  they  are  generally  treated  as  dreams, 
and  are  so  classified  by  some  of  those  who 
are  recognized  as  professional  psychologists. 
Nevertheless,    these    are    actual    experiences 

195 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

upon  the  spiritual  plane  of  life.  One  is 
able  to  carry  them  back  into  physical  con- 
sciousness because,  in  that  particular  state 
of  consciousness,  the  spiritual  senses  are  wide 
open  and  functioning  clearly  and  normally; 
and,  at  the  same  time,  the  physical  channels 
of  sense  are  partly  open,  and  just  sufficiently 
active  to  permit  the  spiritual  experiences  to 
carry  over  and  consciously  register  upon  the 
physical  consciousness. 

In  the  course  of  the  perfect  development 
of  the  independent  psychic,  the  time  comes 
when  the  consciousness  will  register  clearly 
upon  both  planes  of  life  at  the  same  time. 
This  only  means  that  the  individual  is  fully 
awake  both  physically  and  spiritually  at  the 
same  time.  Both  channels  of  sense  are  func- 
tioning normally.  In  this  case  the  individual 
knows  perfectly  what  is  occurring  upon  both 
sides  of  life. 

It  sometimes  occurs  that  this  same  condi- 
tion exists  in  what  we  call  "sleep."  Both 
channels  of  sense  are  open  and  functioning 
normally,  but,  at  the  same  time,  neither  is 
sufficiently  active  to  lift  the  consciousness  to 
the  plane  of  complete  wakefulness.    In  such 

19( 


DREAMS 

case,  when  the  individual  returns  to  full 
physical  consciousness,  he  is  under  the  im- 
pression that  he  has  been  dreaming.  In  one 
sense  he  has;  but,  in  another,  the  thing  he 
called  a  dream  was,  in  reality,  a  spiritual 
experience. 


197 


CHAPTER  XIX 


PROPHECY 


Now  and  then,  we  learn  of  psychological 
experiences  which  are  called  dreams,  but 
which  seem  to  possess  the  element  of  Proph- 
ecy. One  will  "dream"  that  a  friend  or  rela- 
tive is  coming  from  a  distance,  is  on  the 
way  and  will  arrive  on  a  certain  day,  at  a 
definite  hour.  When  that  day  and  hour  ar- 
rive, the  individual  arrives.  Or,  the  "dream" 
may  be  to  the  effect  that  someone  whom  we 
love  devotedly  is  going  to  die  at  a  certain 
time,  and  even  in  a  certain  definite  manner. 
When  the  time  comes  the  death  occurs,  and 
in  the  exact  manner  indicated. 

You  may  call  them  dreams  if  you  like,  but 
in  just  so  far  as  the  element  of  prophecy  en- 
ters, the  experience  is  not  properly  classified 
as  a  "dream."  So  far  as  the  individual  him- 
self is  concerned,  it  is  a  genuine  "prophecy" 
or  "prophetic  experience." 

199 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

The  prophetic  element  works  itself  out  in 
the  following  manner: 

The  condition  or  state  of  the  Soul  is  that 
of  partial  sleep.  The  physical  sense  chan- 
nels are  but  partially  closed.  In  truth,  they 
are  sufficiently  open  and  active  to  carry  over 
into  wakeful  consciousness  the  real  experi- 
ences that  have  occurred  spiritually.  In  the 
spiritual  experience,  some  spiritual  friend  or 
associate  who  is  able  to  see  certain  actual 
conditions  as  they  exist,  having  a  much 
clearer  perception  of  the  principle,  or  Law 
of  Cause  and  Effect,  perceives  that,  in  the 
nature  of  things,  a  certain  event  is  going  to 
occur;  and  according  to  the  speed  with  which 
events  are  moving,  it  should  occur  at  a  cer- 
tain time.  This  individual,  by  the  language 
of  impulse,  conveys  the  suggestion  to  the 
semi-sleeper.  It  is  done  so  subtly  that  the 
sleeper  fails  to  realize  that  the  suggestion 
comes  to  him  from  any  other  individual.  He 
simply  seems  to  realize  that  the  event  is  go- 
ing to  occur,  and  at  a  certain  time,  etc.  To 
him,  it  is  as  if  the  cosmic  universe  has  opened 
to  him  for  an  instant  and  this  prophetic  sug- 
gestion   comes    to    him    out    of    its    deepest 

200 


PROPHECY 

depths.  The  partially  open  channels  of  phys- 
ical sense  carry  the  prophetic  suggestion  and 
impression  over  to  the  physical  waking  con- 
sciousness, and  the  thing  is  accomplished. 
For  illustration: 

A  railroad  and  a  country  automobile  road 
both  run  upon  the  level  of  the  ground  over 
which  they  pass.  They  cross  each  other  at  a 
point  where  corn,  at  its  full  height,  is  grow- 
ing on  both  sides  of  both  these  roads.  In 
these  conditions  neither  the  engineer  of  the 
railroad  train  nor  the  chauffeur  of  the  auto- 
mobile approaching  the  crossing,  can  see 
the  other.  This  is  because  they  are  both 
down  on  the  level  of  the  two  roads,  and  the 
corn  obstructs  their  view. 

But  at  a  distance  of  a  hundred  yards  from 
the  crossing,  in  the  midst  of  the  corn,  a  great 
rock  rises  to  the  height  of  200  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  two  roads.  A  man  is  standing  on 
the  top  of  it.  Neither  the  engineer  nor  the 
chauffeur  can  see  that  the  other  is  approach- 
ing the  crossing.  Both  the  train  and  the 
automobile  arc  making  so  much  noise  that 
neither  party  can  hear  the  approach  of  the 
other.     Hence,  neither  is  aware  of  the  dan- 

201 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ger  that  is  approaching  him.  But  the  man 
on  top  of  the  rock  can  see  them  both  with 
perfect  distinctness.  He  can  see  that  they 
are  both  traveling  at  a  terrific  speed.  He  cal- 
culates quickly  the  distance  each  is  from  the 
crossing.  He  then  estimates  the  speed  at 
which  each  is  traveling.  He  finds  that  dis- 
tance and  speed  will  bring  them  to  the  cross- 
ing at  the  same  instant  of  Time.  He  is  in 
position  to  see  who  is  driving  the  automobile, 
and  he  knows  him  well.  He  foresees,  as  an 
inevitable  fact  of  Nature,  that  there  is  going 
to  be  a  wreck,  and  his  reason  tells  him  that 
his  friend  is  going  to  be  killed. 

Now,  solely  because  he  is  at  a  greater  alti- 
tude than  the  others,  he  is  able  to  foresee  the 
inevitable  fact  of  an  approaching  wreck.  He 
also  sees  the  death  of  his  friend  "in  a  wreck 
at  a  crossing." 

Now,  he  is  not  a  "prophet."  He  is  sim- 
ply up  where  he  can  see  what  is  happening 
on  all  sides  of  him.  Just  ordinary,  good, 
common  sense  tells  him,  in  advance,  that  a 
wreck  will  occur  at  a  certain  time  and  place, 
and  that  his  friend  is  going  to  be  killed. 

Down  on  the  other  side  of  the  rock,  how- 

202 


PROPHECY 

ever,  away  from  the  crossing  is  another  man. 
He  happens  to  be  what  is  called  a  "sensitive." 
When  the  man  on  the  rock  first  realizes  the 
fact  of  the  impending  wreck,  his  whole  being 
is  centered  in  an  impulse  that  goes  out  from 
him  with  intense  force.  The  sensitive  man  on 
the  other  side  of  the  rock  gets  the  shock  of 
that  impulse.  He  "senses,"  for  an  instant, 
what  is  in  the  mind  of  the  man  on  the  rock. 
He,  also,  "senses"  the  impending  wreck,  His 
impression  is  that  a  wreck  will  occur  "at  a 
crossing  of  a  railway  and  an  automobile  road, 
at  a  certain  time."  He  doesn't  know  a  thing 
about  the  train  and  the  automobile,  nor  the 
engineer  nor  the  chauffeur;  but  he  knows  the 
chauffeur,  and  that  he  is  a  friend  of  the  man 
on  the  rock. 

He  rushes  home  and  relates  his  vision.  His 
neighbors  and  friends  call  it  a  "prophetic 
vision"  —  and  he  becomes  a  ^^ prophet"  —  to 
them. 

Now,  let  us  apply  this  to  the  conditions 
v^hich  often  obtain  in  so-called  "dreams," 
or  in  semi-sleep :  The  individual  in  semi- 
sleep  is  in  a  state  of  consciousness  wherein 
he  becomes  an  excellent 

203 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  place  of  the  man  down  on  the  side  of  the 
rock,  away  from  the  crossing.  He  can  sec 
nothing  himself;  but  some  spiritual  friend  is 
up  in  the  clear  atmosphere  of  a  spiritual  al- 
titude, where  he  can  see  all  that  is  occurring 
on  every  hand.  With  his  clearer  vision,  his 
greater  facilities  for  determining  the  results 
of  cause  and  effect,  he  sees  that  a  certain  in- 
dividual is  traveling  in  a  certain  direction 
along  a  certain  road.  Through  his  greater 
spiritual  facilities  he  learns  who  the  individ- 
ual is.  He  sees  also  that  if  he  travels  at  the 
same  speed  along  the  same  road  he  will 
reach  a  certain  point  just  as  a  tornado  travel- 
ing across  his  trail  will  reach  the  same  point. 
He  foresees  the  result  instantly,  that  the  man 
will  be  killed  in  the  tornado.  That  impulse 
is  so  strong  that  it  communicates  itself  to  the 
"sensitive"  who  is  in  semi-sleep.  The  sleeper 
awakes  and  carries  the  spiritual  vision  into 
his  waking,  physical  consciousness.  He  re- 
lates it  to  his  wife,  who  is  the  sister  of  the 
traveler.  Next  day  she  receives  word  that 
her  brother  was  killed  in  a  tornado — "just  as 
her  husband  had  dreamed  he  was." 
This  was  a  "prophetic  dream."    And  this 

204 


PROPHECY 

is  the  exact  method  whereby  many  such  so- 
called  prophetic  dreams  occur.  But  would 
You  call  it  "prophecy"?  Is  it  not  merely  a 
case  of  clear  vision  on  the  part  of  one  who 
is  in  position  to  see  and  estimate  the  results 
of  the  Law  of  Cause  and  Effect  more  defi- 
nitely than  others  who  are  about  him?  If 
you  ask  Him,  he  would  tell  you  there  was  no 
element  of  prophecy  in  it  at  all.  He  would 
tell  you  exactly  how  he  figured  it  all  out. 

But  not  so  with  the  sensitive  who  telepath- 
ically  receives  the  picture  that  came  to  him 
over  the  invisible  wires  of  spiritual  sense.  He 
would  call  it  a  "prophetic  dream."  And,  so 
far  as  he  is  concerned,  that  is  not  so  far  from 
the  truth.  The  only  trouble  about  the  whole 
thing  is  that  we  have  taken  all  the  mystery 
out  of  it — and  by  so  doing  we  have  reduced 
the  incident  itself  to  a  mere  matter  of  mathe- 
matics— and  ijoho  cares  for  mere  mathematics, 
or  exact  science,  in  a  matter  of  this  nature, 
where  all  the  enchantment  lies  concealed  in 
the  "mystery"  of  it? 

It  is  true  that  there  are  many  instances  of 
so-called  "prophetic  dreams"  very  much  more 
complex    than    the    illustration    here    given. 

205 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Some  of  them  contain  elements  which  do  not 
lend  themselves  to  definite  comparison  nor 
exact  figures.  But  it  is  the  wisdom  of  the 
Great  Friends  that  so-called  "prophecy"  is 
as  much  a  matter  of  exact  science  as  any 
other  experience  of  life.  It  is  a  mere  ques- 
tion of  discovering  the  process  by  which  re- 
sults are  accomplished.  When  that  is  done 
"prophecy"  becomes  as  much  a  matter  of 
fact  as  anything  else  in  Nature. 

Portraits  of  dying  individuals  are  flashed 
to  the  consciousness  of  distant  relatives  and 
friends  on  earth  in  the  same  manner. 

Some  spiritual  intelligence  is  present  who 
is  mutually  interested  in  the  dying  individual 
and  the  living  relative  or  friend.  He  finds 
that  the  relative  or  friend  is  sufliciently  sensi- 
tive to  spiritual  impressions  to  receive  the 
picture  from  him.  He  gives  out  the  impulse 
with  intensity,  and  the  sensitive  picks  it  up 
as  the  radio  picks  up  any  message  that  comes 
over  a  wave  length  of  ether  to  which  the 
radio  will  respond.  It  is  all  a  matter  of 
science. 


CHAPTER  XX 


GUARDIAN  ANGELS 


There  is  a  basis  of  truth  in  the  religious 
concept  of  earth,  that  each  individual — 
especially  those  who  belong  to  the  various 
churches — has  upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life 
one  or  more  "Guardian  Angels"  whose  chief 
duty,  responsibility,  pleasure  and  occupation 
are  concentered  in  the  one  business  of  look- 
ing after  the  individual,  guarding  him  from 
harm,  ministering  to  his  needs  and  satisfying 
his  wants,  while  he  yet  remains  upon  the 
earth  plane. 

But  here  again  may  be  observed  the  in- 
dustrious activities  of  human  imagination,  as 
well  as  of  religious  idealism.  It  is  true  that 
while  every  human  infant  has  a  physical 
mother,  father,  or  other  friends  to  receive  it 
and  care  for  it  when  it  arrives  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane,  until  it  has  grown  to  a  develop- 
ment that  enables  it  to  assume  the  burden 
and  the  responsibility  of  its  own  individual 

Tfa 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

care,  yet  that  is  not  all.  At  the  same  time, 
some  definite  spiritual  individual  either  vol- 
untarily assumes,  or  is  definitely  assigned  to, 
the  responsibility  of  becoming  a  helper  and 
more  or  less  a  guardian  to  each  individual 
born  into  the  physical  world.  It  is  the  duty 
and  responsibility  of  every  such  spiritual 
guardian  to  do  whatever  can  be  done  to  im- 
prove the  spiritual  environment  of  the  child, 
and  thus  render  it  such  help  as  will  enable 
it  to  grow  into  a  wholesome  mental,  moral 
and  spiritual  development. 

While  there  is  always  at  least  one  such  spir- 
itual individual  for  each  human  infant,  there 
may  be  a  number  of  others  who  volunteer 
their  services  also  to  the  same  child — always, 
however,  subordinate  to  the  one  who  assumes 
the  chief  responsibility.  These  spiritual  guar- 
dians usually  become  deeply  attached  to  their 
human  wards  and  derive  great  pleasure  and 
satisfaction,  not  only  in  the  association  but 
also  in  the  services  they  are  able  to  render. 
But  these  spiritual  guardians  have  their  own 
limitations,  and  it  is  not  always  possible  for 
them  to  control  the  spiritual  environment  of 
an  individual.     They  merely  do  what  they 

m 


GUARDIAN  ANGELS 

can  to  render  unselfish  service  and  give  a 
wholesome  spiritual  impulse  to  the  life  of  the 
individual  entrusted  to  their  spiritual  guar- 
dianship. The  spiritual  guardian  is  but  a 
complementary  addition  to  the  family  circle 
in  each  and  every  earthly  home,  thus  often 
bringing  into  very  close  association  a  con- 
siderable number  of  spiritual  individuals,  all 
interested  in  the  welfare  and  development  of 
a  single  earthly  family. 

Based  upon  my  own  personal  observation, 
I  have  never  seen  anything,  so  far  as  I  can 
recall,  to  suggest  that  there  is  a  class  of  ex- 
alted individuals  who  inhabit  the  spiritual 
world  and  who  are  called  ''Angels" — having 
wings  as  a  distinguishing  mark  or  badge  of 
their  angelhood. 

As  a  distinctive  class  of  exalted  beings, 
there  are  no  such  things  as  Angels.  It  is 
true,  however,  that  it  is  not  an  unusual  thing 
upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life  to  see  indi- 
viduals dressed  in  flowing  white  robes  and 
wearing  upon  their  shoulders  artificial  wings 
merely  as  ornaments  of  dress.  It  is  more 
than  likely  that  the  angelic  concept  had  its 
origin  in  the  fact  that  some  earthly  psychics 

209 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

may  have  glimpsed  some  of  these  ministering 
spiritual  people  going  about  their  work  upon 
the  spiritual  planes.  However  this  may  be, 
they  are,  nevertheless,  but  men  and  women 
who,  at  some  time,  have  lived  upon  the  earth 
plane,  and  who  have  passed  from  that  life 
into  the  spiritual  life  and  have  found  their 
places  among  the  spiritual  workers  whose 
special  mission  is  to  serve  those  who  are  in 
need  of  such  help  as  they  can  give.  From  this 
it  can  be  readily  seen  that  there  is  some  slight 
basis  of  truth  in  the  concept  of  angels,  even 
though  it  has  been  distorted  by  superstitious 
minds  and  given  a  meaning  to  suit  the  fancy 
of  the  religious  idealists. 

The  statement  is  often  made  by  mediums 
that  two  "Guardian  Angels"  always  come  to 
one  on  the  physical  plane,  three  days  before 
his  death,  remain  with  him  to  prepare  him 
for  the  transition  and,  at  death,  lead  him  to 
his  appropriate  plane  in  the  spiritual  life. 

The  statement  is  not  true,  in  its  essential 
details.  There  is,  however,  a  sufficient  ele- 
ment of  truth  in  it  to  furnish  some  founda- 
tion for  the  statement.  As  an  illustration,  it 
is  true  that  there  are  always  those  on  the 

210 


GUARDIAN  ANGELS 

spiritual  side  of  life  whose  work,  either  vol- 
untary or  selected,  is  to  care  for  all  who,  by 
death,  pass  from  earth  life  into  the  spiritual 
realm. 

In  all  cases,  where  death  is  the  result  of  any 
character  of  illness  which  enables  those  upon 
the  spiritual  planes  to  anticipate  approxi- 
mately when  death  will  occur,  certain  indi- 
viduals on  the  spiritual  planes,  from  among 
the  specific  workers  referred  to,  are  assigned 
to  the  case.  Sometimes  one  such  spiritual 
worker  alone  is  either  assigned  or  volunteers. 
Sometimes  two  or  more  are  so  assigned,  or 
they  volunteer,  in  certain  of  these  cases. 
These  assignments,  or  volunteers,  are  se- 
lected many  days  ahead  of  the  anticipated 
transition.  Other  times  they  are  selected  but 
a  few  days  in  advance — depending  on  the  na- 
ture of  the  case  and  what,  if  anything,  they 
might  be  able  to  do  to  be  of  service  to  the 
individual  in  their  charge. 

From  the  time  such  assignments  are  made 
the  individuals  selected  for  that  duty  devote 
themselves,  as  far  as  they  can,  to  the  service 
of  the  patient,  in  every  way  possible.  Often- 
times they  are  able  to  allay  the  physical  suf- 

211 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

fering  of  the  patient.  Sometimes  they  are 
even  able,  by  the  aid  of  the  physician  and 
nurse  in  charge,  to  restore  the  individual  to 
a  measure  of  health  and  thus  prolong  his  life 
upon  the  physical  plane.  This  is  a  part  of 
their  work,  wherever  the  experience  would 
seem  to  be  of  value  to  the  patient. 

But  when  the  hour  of  death  comes  the  spir- 
itual workers  who  have  been  so  selected  are 
at  hand  to  render  every  assistance  possible  to 
their  charge  in  making  the  transition.  And 
when  the  patient  emerges  from  the  physical 
body  they  receive  him,  care  for  him  and  min- 
ister to  him  in  every  way  within  their  power. 
It  is  their  specific  duty  to  clothe  him  spir- 
itually, to  minister  to  his  comfort,  and  espe- 
cially to  educate  him  in  a  proper  knowledge 
of  the  fact  that  he  is  no  longer  an  inhabitant 
of  the  earth  plane  of  life,  but  has  actually 
passed  into  the  spiritual  life  and  must  pre- 
pare himself  to  take  up  his  duties  and  respon- 
sibilities in  accordance  with  the  law  of  his 
individual  evolution. 

That  those  of  earth  may  better  understand 
and  appreciate  what  these  "Guardian  An- 
gels" are  able  to  accomplish,  and  the  diffi- 

212 


GUARDIAN  ANGELS 

culties  with  which  they  have  to  contend, 
they  should  know  that  almost  every  individ- 
ual who  passes  out  of  the  physical  life  has 
some  definite  views  and  convictions  as  to  the 
spiritual  life  into  which  he  is  going — pro- 
vided he  is  old  enough  at  that  time  to  have 
acquired  views.  In  a  large  percentage  of 
these  cases  the  individual  is  a  member  of 
some  church,  religious  school  or  cult  which 
teaches  its  members  all  about  what  they  may 
expect  to  see,  hear,  feel,  experience  and  find 
when  they  have  passed  from  earth  and  have 
arrived  in  the  realm  of  spiritual  life  and 
experience. 

It  is  not  saying  too  much  to  state  that,  al- 
most invariably,  their  concepts,  ideas  and 
convictions  are  radically  at  variance  with 
what  they  actually  find  upon  their  entrance 
into  the  spiritual  realms  of  life.  As  a  result, 
they  are  mystified,  uncertain,  incredulous, 
and  sometimes  bitterly  resentful  against  those 
who  are  assigned  to  aid  them  in  the  process 
of  adjustment  to  the  new  life  and  conditions. 
So  at  variance  are  their  beliefs  and  convic- 
tions from  the  facts  of  spiritual  life,  as  they 
find  them,  that  they  refuse  absolutely  to  ac- 

213 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

cept  the  fact  of  their  own  death.  The  only 
alternative  that  will  satisfy  them  is  to  accept 
the  entire  experience  as  a  dream.  It  then 
becomes  the  business  of  their  spiritual  aides 
to  "awaken"  them  from  their  assumed 
"dream,"  and  bring  them  to  full  realization 
of  the  fact  that  they  have  actually  passed 
through  the  experience  of  physical  death, 
have  arrived  upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life, 
and  that  they  are  in  the  midst  of  the  actual 
experience  of  the  new  life. 

This  awakening  process,  to  a  full  realiza- 
tion of  the  new  life,  and  of  the  meaning  of 
the  process  called  death,  oftentimes  involves 
much  time  and  labor  on  the  part  of  the  spir- 
itual workers  and  their  associates.  This  calls 
for  the  utmost  patience,  loving  kindness  and 
consideration  on  the  part  of  these  "guardian 
angels." 

An  authoritative  statement  as  to  the  time 
this  awakening  and  adjusting  process  re- 
quires cannot  be  given.  Perhaps  an  average 
of  all  such  cases  would  be  from  one  to  two 
days.  In  some  instances  the  awakening  and 
full  realization  and  acceptance  of  the  impor- 
tant facts  come  very  swiftly,  even  where  the 

214 


GUARDIAN  ANGELS 

individual  has  entertained  radically  errone- 
ous ideas  and  views  as  to  the  meaning  of 
physical  death  and  the  conditions  awaiting 
him  in  the  spiritual  world.  This  depends 
upon  the  degree  of  spiritual  evolution  the 
individual  has  attained  at  the  time  of  his 
death.  But  there  are  many  instances  where 
weeks,  and  even  months,  are  necessary  to  the 
adjustment  of  the  individual  to  the  new  life 
and  conditions,  and  to  a  full  realization  of 
the  truth. 

A  large  percentage  of  deaths  occur  very 
suddenly.  Many  of  them,  the  result  of  so- 
called  accidents,  cannot  be  anticipated,  either 
by  the  individual  himself,  or  the  spiritual 
workers  whose  responsibility  it  is  to  receive 
him  and  care  for  him  in  the  spiritual  life  and 
help  him  over  the  educational  process  of 
spiritual  adjustment. 

In  all  such  cases  as  these  it  will  be  readily 
understood  that  there  is  no  way  of  making 
assignments  of  ''guardian  angels"  two  days 
ahead  of  death.  But,  even  though  no  specific 
assignments  have  been  made  among  the  spir- 
itual workers,  in  such  cases,  they  are  pro- 
vided for  with  just  as  much  certainty  as  any 

215 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

other.  Among  the  spiritual  workers  in  this 
field  —  called  Border-Land  Workers  —  is  a 
very  large  number  of  "Emergency  Work- 
ers." It  is  the  special  responsibility  of  this 
"Emergency  Corps"  to  be  fully  and  constantly 
prepared  and  on  guard,  so  that  no  so-called 
accidental  death  shall  ever  occur  without  the 
immediate  presence  of  one  or  more  of  these 
emergency  helpers.  The  perfection  of  the 
spiritual  organization  of  workers  in  this  field, 
together  with  the  facilities  for  transmitting 
information  instantaneously,  and  the  ability 
of  the  spiritual  helpers  to  travel  with  the 
swiftness  of  thought,  make  it  impossible  for 
the  most  unexpected  and  sudden  death  to 
occur  without  some  of  the  emergency  help- 
ers arriving  fully  equipped  and  prepared 
for  instant  service  to  meet  every  possible 
contingency. 


M 


CHAPTER  XXI 


THE  BREATH  OF  LIFE 


From  the  instant  that  physical  conception 
occurs,  there  begins  the  development  of  a 
physical  body  which  the  Soul  is  to  inhabit 
when  the  first  "breath  of  life"  is  taken  into 
its  lungs  at,  or  soon  after,  birth.  But,  at  the 
same  time,  and  synchronously  with  the  devel- 
opment of  that  physical  body,  is  a  spiritual 
body  which  interpenetrates  the  physical  and 
is  interpenetrated  by  the  physical,  in  such 
manner  that  when  the  Soul  is  incarnated  it  is 
the  possessor  of  two  bodies,  a  physical  and  a 
spiritual  body.  These  two  bodies  are  not  only 
interrelated  but  interdependent  in  their  rela- 
tion to  their  Soul  inhabitant. 

The  Soul  of  the  incarnating  individual 
does  not  enter  the  physical  body  at  concep- 
tion. It  does  not  enter  at  any  time  during 
the  prenatal  period  of  nine  months  between 
conception  and  physical  birth.  It  does  not 
necessarily  enter  at  the  instant  of  physical 

217 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

birth.  The  Soul  of  the  incarnating  individ- 
ual enters  the  bodies  of  the  infant  synchron- 
ously with  the  first  physical  breath  which  the 
infant  breathes  into  its  lungs.  Normally,  this 
occurs  almost  instantly  with  physical  birth. 
But  this  is  not  always  true,  for  the  reason 
that,  in  many  instances,  the  first  physical 
breath  is  not  taken  into  the  lungs  of  the  in- 
fant until  several  minutes  after  actual  phys- 
ical birth.  In  some  cases  the  attending  phy- 
sician finds  it  necessary  to  use  mechanical 
means  to  induce  the  first  physical  breath. 
Whenever  the  process  of  suscitation  requires 
the  assistance  of  mechanical  means,  it  may 
require  several  minutes  to  accomplish  it. 
Even  so,  the  incarnating — or  reincarnating — 
Soul,  as  the  case  may  be,  does  not  enter  the 
bodies  of  the  infant  until  the  first  physical 
breath  enters  its  lungs. 

And  this  is  the  "breath"  referred  to  as  the 
"Breath  of  Life."  "And  the  Lord  God  formed 
man  of  the  dust  of  the  ground,  and  breathed 
into  his  nostrils  the  Breath  of  Life;  and  man 
became  a  living  Soul."    (Genesis  II,  7.) 

If  it  should  die,  even  before  the  next 
breath  is  taken   into  its  physical   body,   the 

218 


THE  BREATH  OF  LIFE 

Soul  has  en*:ered  the  spiritual  body  of  the  in- 
fant, and  passes  with  it  into  the  spiritual  life, 
as  a  spiritual  infant,  and  follows  the  natural 
course  of  spiritual  growth  and  development 
thenceforward,  as  do  other  spiritual  infants. 

But  suppose  the  physical  body  of  the  infant 
is  born,  and  the  first  physical  breath  is  never 
taken,  what  then?  In  that  event  there  has 
been  no  Soul-incarnation.  The  Soul  has  not 
entered  the  spiritual  body  of  the  infant. 
Hence,  the  spiritual  body  disintegrates  with 
the  physical  and  is  resolved  back  into  the  ele- 
ments from  which  it  was  integrated. 

The  presence  of  the  awaiting  Soul  is  the 
"Fact  of  Nature"  which  makes  the  first 
breath  of  the  infant  possible,  and  that  is  the 
only  instant  when  the  entry  of  the  Soul  is  pos- 
sible. If  the  Soul  did  not  enter  with  the  first 
"Breath  of  Life,"  that  breath  would  be  its  last, 
and  would  become  the  "Breath  of  Death." 

Let  us  suppose  we  have  a  chemical  explo- 
sive. It  consists  of  a  number  of  different 
chemical  ingredients.  They  are  so  propor- 
tioned and  combined  that  the  addition  of  a 
single  drop  of  nitric  acid  will  cause  the  explo- 
sion. Now,  suppose  the  drop  of  acid  is  never 

219 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

added,  the  explosion  will  never  occur.  It  is 
the  presence  of  that  one  drop  which  completes 
Nature's  process.  After  that  one  drop  has 
been  added  and  the  explosion  has  occurred, 
there  can  be  no  other,  or  later,  explosion  from 
that  combination. 

If  the  Soul  were  not  present  and  entered 
with  the  first  "Breath  of  Life,"  then  "Man" 
would  never  become  "A  Living  Soul."  There 
would  be  nothing  remaining  but  a  dead  body. 

Seme  individuals  may  be  inclined  to  be- 
lieve it  would  almost  lead  to  the  extinction  of 
the  human  race  upon  earth,  if  humanity  gen- 
erally knew  that  the  Soul  does  not  enter  the 
bodies  of  the  new-born  infant  until  the  first 
"breath  of  life"  is  breathed  into  the  lungs  of 
the  physical  body.  In  other  words,  if  pros- 
pective mothers  generally  knew  that  they 
could  destroy  the  physical  body  of  an  unborn 
child  without  destroying  a  living  Soul,  would 
not  the  number  of  criminal  abortions  be  mul- 
tiplied many  times — until  it  would  become 
the  rule,  rather  than  the  exception? 

This  is  not  true.  Prospective  mothers  do 
not  consider  that  question  at  all,  when  they 
are  contemplating  an  abortion.  They  are  im- 
am 


THE  BREATH  OF  LIFE 

pelled  to  such  an  act  by  selfish  and  personal 
motives  which  would  override  any  such  con- 
sideration, even  if  they  knew  the  Law.  So 
long  as  man-made  laws  treat  voluntary,  de- 
liberate and  unnecessary  abortions  as  "mur- 
ders," it  is  safe  to  assume  that  no  prospective 
mother  is  going  to  commit  such  an  act  unless 
she  has  made  up  her  mind  to  defy  the  law  and 
take  her  chance  of  evading  its  penalty. 

When  the  mothers  of  the  future  are  taught 
to  know  that  in  the  process  of  motherhood 
they  are  helping  Mother  Nature  to  prepare 
the  way  for  human  Souls  to  come  to  earth  and 
work  out  the  evolution  of  their  Individual 
Completion  and  Happiness,  they  will  enter 
into  cooperation  with  Nature  in  the  most 
glorious  undertaking  it  is  possible  for  the  hu- 
man mind  and  Soul  to  conceive.  This  knowl- 
edge will  stimulate  the  development  of  the 
Mother-Love  nature  of  womankind. 

Furthermore,  with  this  higher  education 
of  mothers  they  will  be  taught,  and  will  come 
to  realize  the  fact  that  the  future  welfare,  the 
Individual  Completion  of  their  own  Souls, 
and  their  consequent  Perfect  Happiness,  are 
all  involved  in  the  Soul  attitude  of  Cheerful- 

221 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ness  demanded  by  Nature  of  every  prospect- 
ive mother  in  her  glorious  labor  of  mother- 
hood. The  most  profound  responsibility  that 
Nature  lays  upon  her  children  is  that  of  par- 
enthood; and  more  especially  of  motherhood; 
because  this  involves  the  intimate  personal 
relation  of  the  mother  to  her  child  during  the 
preparation  of  its  bodies  for  occupancy  and 
use.  Any  failure  on  her  part  to  discharge  the 
profound  personal  responsibility  which  Na- 
ture fixes  upon  her  in  the  process  of  mother- 
hood, also  fixes  upon  her,  at  the  same  time, 
the  most  terrible  penalty  of  devolutionary 
failure  and  unhappiness  from  which  it  is  im- 
possible for  her  to  escape. 

When  the  future  mothers  of  the  race  come 
to  understand  these  things,  the  personal  re- 
sponsibility of  motherhood,  the  rewards  of 
compliance  with  the  Law,  and  the  penalties  of 
failure  or  refusal — the  personal  happiness  in 
store  for  the  real  mother  on  the  one  hand,  and 
the  personal  degradation  and  suffering  upon 
the  other — no  further  stimulus  will  be  needed 
to  enlist  all  the  constructive  energies  of  her 
body  and  Soul  in  her  glorious  work  for 
humanity  and  herself. 


CHAPTER  XXII 


CHILDREN 


Children  are  not  born  of  spiritual  parents 
upon  any  of  the  spiritual  planes,  insofar  as  we 
know  the  facts  of  life  upon  this  planet.  Upon 
the  planet  of  earth  it  would  seem  that  the  indi- 
vidualizing of  all  intelligent  life  has  its 
inception,  its  beginning,  on  the  physical  plane 
alone.  It  is  true,  however,  that  many  infants 
are,  in  one  sense,  "born"  into  the  spiritual  life; 
but  these  are  "born"  only  through  the  process 
of  physical  death.  They  arrive  upon  the  spir- 
itual plane  as  infants,  but  they  are  the  children 
of  physical  parents,  and  their  infancy  had  its 
real  beginning  upon  the  physical  plane. 

Children  and  infants  appear  upon  all  the 
planes  of  spiritual  life.  And,  they  appear 
there  immediately  after  they  have  been  liber- 
ated from  the  physical  body  by  physical 
death.  I  have  heard  positive  statements  made 
several  times,  by  mediums,  that  there  are  no 
children  in  the  spiritual  life  above  the  first 

223 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

spiritual  plane.  Then,  again,  there  are  those 
who  assure  us  that  there  are  no  children  be- 
yond the  fourth  spiritual  plane.  There  are 
others  who  fix  the  limit  at  the  seventh  spirit- 
ual plane. 

As  explained,  the  spiritual  evolution  of  an 
individual  at  physical  death  determines  the 
exact  level  to  which  he  will  immediately  rise 
when  liberated  from  the  physical  body 
through  the  process  of  physical  death.  If  his 
spiritual  development  is  low  when  he  reaches 
physical  death  he  will  rise  to  a  corresponding 
low  plane  of  spiritual  life.  If  his  spirituality 
is  high  at  the  time  of  his  death  he  will  rise  to 
correspondingly  high  levels  of  spiritual  life  as 
soon  as  he  is  liberated  from  the  physical  body 
through  the  process  of  death. 

But  the  same  Universal  Law  of  Gravity  ap- 
plies to  those  who  die  in  infancy  or  in  child- 
hood, as  well  as  it  does  to  those  who  die  after 
they  have  reached  physical  maturity. 

We  find  that  there  are  many  physical  in- 
fants and  children  who,  at  physical  death, 
stop  in  the  magnetic  field  of  life.  There  are 
many  others  who  pass  at  once  through  the 
magnetic  field   and   find   their  natural   level 

224 


CHILDREN 

and  home  upon  the  first  spiritual  plane. 
There  are  yet  many  others  who  pass  directly 
through  both  the  magnetic  field  and  the 
first  spiritual  plane,  and  stop  upon  the  second 
spiritual  plane.  There  are  yet  many  more 
who  rise  at  once,  when  liberated  from  the 
physical  body  by  death,  into  the  third,  fourth, 
fifth,  and  all  the  other  planes  of  spiritual  life, 
even  to  the  highest. 

This  means,  when  translated  into  scientific 
analysis,  that  there  is  as  much  difference  in 
the  spiritual  evolutionary  status  of  infants  and 
children,  at  physical  death,  as  there  is  in  the 
spiritual  status  of  those  who  have  arrived  at 
physical  maturity  before  death  overtakes 
them. 

We  have  learned  that  spiritual  unfoldment 
and  development  are  the  results  of  Spiritual 
Evolution. 

This  means  that  an  infant  who  stops  in  the 
magnetic  field,  after  physical  death,  has  not 
attained  as  high  a  degree  of  Spiritual  Evolu- 
tion as  the  infant  or  child  who  passes  at  once 
through  the  magnetic  field  and  stops  in  the 
first  spiritual  plane.  It  means  also  that  the 
infant  or  child  who  passes  directly  into  the 

225 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

seventh,  the  ninth,  or  the  thirteenth  spiritual 
plane,  at  physical  death,  has  attained  a  vastly 
higher  degree  of  Spiritual  Evolution  than  the 
infant  or  child  who  stops  in  the  first,  third,  or 
fifth  spiritual  plane. 

But,  Spiritual  Evolution  is  the  result  of 
Individual  Experience.  And,  Individual  Ex- 
perience comes  only  through  the  process  of 
time,  personal  effort,  actual  living  and  doing 
and  accomplishing. 

Other  things  being  equal,  we  know  that  a 
stock  of  corn  which  is  seven  feet  tall,  fully 
tasseled  out  and  having  two  large  ears  of  corn 
upon  it,  is  older  than  the  stock  that  is  just 
peeping  through  the  soil.  In  this  we  see 
plainly  that  the  element  of  time  is  an  impor- 
tant factor  in  the  evolutionary  process. 

In  like  manner,  when  we  see  a  spiritual  in- 
fant whose  spirituality  enables  it  to  reach  up 
through  the  magnetic  field,  the  first,  and  all 
the  intermediate  planes  of  spiritual  life,  into 
the  seventh,  eighth  or  ninth — we  know  that 
this  is  due  to  the  elements  of  time,  experience 
and  personal  effort.  When  we  compare  this 
with  the  infant  whose  spiritual  head  is  just 
peeping  through  the  magnetic  field  and  ap- 

226 


I 


CHILDREN 

pearing  upon  the  first  spiritual  plane,  we 
know  that  the  elements  of  time,  experience 
and  personal  effort  are  the  determining  fac- 
tors which  differentiate  the  one  from  the 
other. 

From  the  moment  an  infant  emerges  from 
its  tiny  infant  body  and  enters  the  spiritual 
world,  it  goes  on  growing  in  size,  as  well  as  in 
mentality.  This  growth  and  development  of 
its  spiritual  body  go  on  very  much  as  it  would 
have  proceeded  had  it  remained  upon  the 
earth  plane.  This  means  that  it  goes  on  grow- 
ing and  developing  until  it  passes  through  all 
the  phases  of  infancy,  childhood,  youth  and 
maturity. 

But  there  are  three  essential  particulars 
wherein  the  spiritual  development  differs 
from  the  physical : 

(a)  Its  bodily  growth  upon  the  spiritual 
plane  is  not  so  rapid  as  it  is  upon  the  physical 
plane.  To  make  this  entirely  clear,  while  a 
child  upon  the  earth  plane  grows  to  its  full 
physical  height  and  weight  in  18  to  21  years, 
it  requires  an  average  of  almost  twice  the 
same  period  upon  the  spiritual  side  to  develop 
the  spiritual  body  alone  to  its  full  size  and 

227 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

proportions.  Why  this  is  so  I  am  unable  to 
tell  you,  except  it  would  seem  that  the  phys- 
ical element  adds  an  impulse  to  the  develop- 
ment and  growth  of  the  material  bodies,  and 
when  this  element  is  eliminated — as  in  the 
event  of  physical  death — Nature  finds  herself 
unable  to  complete  the  process  with  the  same 
facility  as  she  could  have  done  had  the  infant 
remained  upon  the  earth  plane  until  its  phys- 
ical body  had  been  developed  to  maturity. 

(b)  No  matter  how  old  a  spiritual  being 
may  be,  its  spiritual  body  never  becomes 
withered  with  the  marks  of  age  or  decrepi- 
tude. When  the  spiritual  infant  reaches  its 
full  bodily  maturity  it  ceases  to  grow  in  both 
size  and  the  appearance  of  age.  It  always 
remains  what  we  upon  the  earth  plane  would 
call  "youthful"  in  its  appearance;  although 
those  upon  the  spiritual  planes  have  no  diffi- 
culty in  determining  the  relative  age  of  any 
spiritual  individual. 

(c)  The  third  particular  in  which  there  is 
a  marked  difference  between  the  physical  and 
the  spiritual  developments  of  individuals,  in 
point  of  growth,  is  this:  One  who  reaches  old 
age  upon  earth  before  death  overtakes  him, 

228 


CHILDREN 

appears  upon  the  spiritual  plane  as  an  old 
man,  bearing  all  the  bodily  evidences  of  age 
and  decrepitude  that  were  manifest  in  the 
physical  body  at  the  immediate  time  of  death. 
But  instead  of  going  on  from  that  point 
growing  older  in  appearance,  he  begins  at 
once  to  grow  younger  in  bodily  appearance. 
This  rejuvenation  continues  until  the  individ- 
ual has  reached  that  state  and  condition  of 
bodily  development  just  referred  to  as  youth- 
ful. 

This  will  explain  the  experiences  of  many 
earthly  psychics  in  their  endeavors  to  identify 
to  their  earthly  associates  the  relatives  and 
friends  who  have  passed  on  into  the  spiritual 
life  many  years  before.  If  the  individual 
passed  out  of  the  physical  body  in  infancy,  the 
psychic  will  see  him  as  a  youthful  form,  ap- 
parently many  years  older  than  the  little  babe 
that  died.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  individ- 
ual died  in  old  age,  the  psychic  will  see  him 
in  his  rejuvenated  appearance  of  youth. 

It  is  only  where  the  spiritual  individual 
himself  understands  these  facts  and  voluntar- 
ily and  intentionally  takes  on  the  appearance 
of  infancy — in  the  one  case,  and  of  old  age  in 

229 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  other — that  the  psychic  is  able  to  identify 
the  individual  at  all  to  those  who  are  seeking 
for  the  evidences  of  identity  that  will  satisfy 
them. 

These  facts  will  explain  certain  difficulties 
of  some  of  the  most  honest  and  genuine  psy- 
chics who  often  find  themselves  unable  to 
identify  those  on  the  spiritual  side  of  life,  to 
the  satisfaction  of  their  relatives  and  friends 
on  the  earth  plane  of  life.  These  natural  dis- 
crepancies in  the  bodily  appearance  upon  the 
spiritual  planes — when  compared  with  the 
appearance  of  the  individual  in  the  physical 
body  at  the  time  of  death — will  account  for  all 
these  apparent  failures  on  the  part  of  honest 
psychics. 

There  is  always  a  strong  magnetic  bond  be- 
tween a  spiritual  infant  and  the  physical  fam- 
ily into  which  it  is  born.  This  is  usually 
strongest  between  it  and  its  physical  mother; 
although,  where  the  family  relations,  environ- 
ment and  conditions  are  harmonious  and 
happy,  the  same  bond  may  exist  toward  other 
members  of  the  family.  In  this  case,  espe- 
cially, the  spiritual  child  is  permitted  to  grow 

2S0 


CHILDREN 

up  in  very  close  association  with  those  it  has 
left  behind  upon  the  physical  plane. 

But  where  the  mother-love  is  not  strong, 
and  dissension  and  hostility  exist  in  the  family, 
the  spiritual  child  does  not  desire  to  remain 
in  close  association,  and  those  who  have  its 
spiritual  guardianship  and  care,  soon  develop 
other  and  better  conditions  for  its  spiritual 
development  and  welfare.  In  this  case  it  does 
not  remain  a  member  of  the  physical  family. 
It  follows  the  natural  law  of  individual  at- 
traction and  harmony. 

The  men  and  women  on  the  spiritual 
planes  in  whom  the  love  of  and  desire  for 
children  in  the  home  are  still  strong,  voluntar- 
ily seek  and  take  these  little  ones  into  their 
home,  care  for  them,  educate  them  and  help 
them  in  every  way  possible  in  their  evolu- 
tionary growth  and  development,  until  they 
have  grown  to  that  age  of  discretion  which 
stands  for  "spiritual  majority."  From  that 
point  forward  the  parental  adoption  becomes 
null,  and  the  child  is  released  from  all  the 
ties  that  bound  it  thereunder. 

There  are  many  subsidiary  questions  which 
arise  out  of  the  reciprocal  relations  between 

231 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

members  of  the  same  family  on  both  sides  of 
life.  But  they  are  mainly  worked  out  consist- 
ently with  the  Law  of  Individual  Evolution. 
Of  course,  there  are  many  cases  where  the  evil 
and  degrading  influences  of  the  physical  life 
are  magnetically  very  strong  and  hold  the 
spiritual  child  until  the  Border-Land  Work- 
ers are  able  to  help  him  break  the  destructive 
bond  that  holds  him  to  earth. 

Where  the  family  tie  is  strong  and  con- 
structive, those  who  pass  into  the  spiritual  life 
are  joined  together  into  the  family  relations 
upon  the  spiritual  planes.  In  this  case  those 
who  die  in  infancy  are  taken  immediately  into 
the  care  and  guardianship  of  the  family  group 
upon  the  spiritual  side.  But  this  is  a  matter 
which  is  governed  by  the  Law  of  Natural  At- 
traction. The  "tie  of  blood"  alone  is  not 
strong  upon  the  spiritual  side.  There  it  is  far 
more  a  question  of  spiritual  magnetism  and 
psychic  harmony. 

Those  who  are  specially  appointed,  or  who 
volunteer  for  that  purpose,  prepare  for  the 
coming  of  the  spiritual  infant.  They  make 
every  possible  arrangement  and  preparation 
for  its  care  and  its  comfort,  and  they  receive 

232 


CHILDREN 

it  upon  its  arrival,  and  assume  entire  respon- 
sibility for  its  care,  comfort,  education  and 
welfare,  as  rapidly  as  it  develops.  It  takes  up 
its  spiritual  life  exactly  where  it  left  off  its 
physical.  It  has  to  be  cared  for — although 
children  do  not  die  of  starvation  in  the  Spir- 
itual world — until  it  has  evolved  to  a  point 
where  it  is  able  intelligently  and  consciously 
to  cooperate  with  Nature  and  become  an  ac- 
tive participant  in  its  own  evolutionary 
unfoldment  and  growth.  After  it  has  de- 
veloped to  the  point  where  it  becomes  an  in- 
telligent and  voluntary  party  to  its  own  evo- 
lutionary development,  the  process  is  greatly 
intensified  by  the  combined  efforts  of  both 
Nature  and  the  individual  working  together 
in  harmony. 

It  often  occurs  that  spiritual  members  of 
the  family  are  appointed,  or  volunteer,  for 
this  service. 

All  this,  however,  is  within  the  jurisdic- 
tion of  the  duties  and  responsibilities  of  the 
Border-Land  Workers  who  have  general  di- 
rection and  supervision  of  the  work  of  re- 
ceiving and  caring  for  all  who  pass  from 
physical  life  into  the  spiritual.    And  these 

233 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Border-Land  Workers  use  their  best  judg- 
ment in  making  their  selections  of  guardians, 
in  all  cases.  In  this  they  are  largely  gov- 
erned by  the  character  and  condition  of  the 
spiritual  individual  when  he  arrives  upon 
the  spiritual  side  of  life. 

Each  infant  is  clothed  immediately  upon 
its  arrival;  and  its  clothing  is  provided  by 
its  selected  spiritual  guardians,  and  those 
who  volunteer  their  services.  The  quality  and 
style  of  dress  are  likewise  determined  by 
those  who  have  been  selected  and  charged 
with  the  responsibility  of  receiving  and  car- 
ing for  the  individual  infant.  The  same, 
however,  is  equally  true  of  all  others  who 
pass  into  the  spiritual  life.  It  does  not  mat- 
ter whether  they  are  infants,  children,  youths, 
or  those  of  mature  life,  or  those  decrepit  with 
age.  They  all  must  be  cared  for  until  they 
can  be  taught  and  helped  to  care  for  them- 
selves. But  as  soon  as  they  become  self-re- 
liant and  able  to  care  for  themselves,  their 
guardians  are  no  longer  necessary  nor  of  real 
service  to  them.  Hence,  they  pass  on  to 
others  who  need  them. 

From  this  explanation  it  will  be  seen  that 

234 


CHILDREN 

every  possible  contingency  is  provided  for 
upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life — and  that  none 
are  neglected  or  overlooked. 

We  know  that  all  normal,  human  infants 
are  born  natural  psychics.  We  also  know  that 
very  few  of  them  retain  their  psychic  powers 
beyond  the  period  of  childhood. 

One  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  indi- 
vidual development  is  that  all  human  un- 
foldment  is  in  line  with  the  attention  and 
personal  effort  of  the  individual.  This  means 
that  in  whatever  line  the  attention  of  a  child 
is  fixed,  and  his  effort  awakened,  in  that  line 
will  he  develop  most  rapidly. 

Applying  this  principle  to  the  average 
child,  it  will  be  found  that,  almost  from  the 
day  of  his  birth  the  conditions  of  his  life  are 
such  as  to  fix  his  attention  upon  his  physical 
environment  and  hold  it  there  during  his 
waking  moments.  The  mother,  from  the  day 
of  her  child's  birth,  seeks  to  attract  its  atten- 
tion to  her.  The  father  does  the  same  thing. 
He  seeks  to  fix  its  attention  upon  him.  If 
there  be  other  children  in  the  family,  or 
other  relatives  near,  they  all  take  their  turn. 
The  infant  child  has  little  or  no  time  or  op- 

235 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

portunity  to  give  any  attention  to  its  spir- 
itual environment.  Naturally,  it  develops 
the  physical  senses  more  and  more;  and,  in 
exact  proportion,  it  neglects  the  spiritual. 
By  the  Law  of  use  and  non-use,  the  physical 
senses  grow  more  and  more  dominant  and 
the  spiritual  less  and  less  so.  It  requires  but 
a  very  few  years  of  this  manner  of  life  en- 
tirely to  obscure  the  spiritual  senses  and 
powers.  In  due  time,  the  child  ceases  to  use 
them  entirely,  and  then  forgets  that  it  ever 
possessed  them. 

If  parents  understood  that  their  children 
are  all  natural  psychics  at  birth,  and  would 
then  observe  the  natural  Law  of  develop- 
ment, the  Law  of  UsE,  there  would  be  no 
difficulty  in  so  rearing  their  children  as  to 
develop  the  spiritual  senses  and  powers 
equally  with  the  physical.  And,  in  this  case, 
the  child  would  grow  to  maturity,  and  even 
to  old  age,  without  loss,  or  even  obscuration, 
of  its  spiritual  senses  and  powers. 

The  records  of  Atlantean  civilization  dis- 
close the  fact  that,  in  those  ancient  days,  par- 
ents understood  the  law  of  natural  develop- 
ment  and    so   trained    and    instructed    their 

236  , 


CHILDREN 

children  that  most  of  them  grew  to  maturity 
as  natural  psychics,  and  retained  their  natural 
development  throughout  their  entire  lifetime. 
We  are  informed  that  it  was  the  exception, 
rather  than  the  rule,  that  the  child  lost  con- 
scious and  voluntary  touch  with  its  spiritual 
environment.  The  same  condition  might  ob- 
tain in  this  modern  age  and  civilization,  if 
men  and  women  understood  the  Law  of  Life 
and  Individual  Development  and  applied  it 
to  their  own  children.  Indeed,  it  is  one  of 
the  hopes  and  aims  of  the  Great  School  of 
Natural  Science  to  bring  this  knowledge 
back  to  humanity  again,  and  inspire  men  and 
women  once  more  to  become  the  spiritual 
Teachers  and  Educators  of  their  children 
and  aid  them  in  the  work  of  normal  unfold- 
ment  in  all  the  departments  of  life  and  its 
activities. 

All  development  is  in  the  line  of  attention 
and  personal  effort. 

One  of  the  simplest  things  for  the  mother 
to  do  would  be  to  provide  her  baby  a  room 
where  it  could  spend  two  or  three  hours 
every  day  alone,  where  it  would  have  no 
physical  objects  about  to  attract  its  attention. 

237 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

The  room  should  be  absolutely  quiet  so  that 
even  physical  sounds  would  not  obtrude  them- 
selves upon  its  attention.  Being  thus  left 
alone  where  its  physical  environment  could 
not  attract  its  attention,  it  would  naturally 
turn  its  attention  to  its  spiritual  environment. 
Thus  it  would  soon  have  a  number  of  spir- 
itual friends  who  would  keep  its  attention 
fixed  upon  them  and  their  spiritual  environ- 
ment. This  would  normally  develop  the 
infant's  spiritual  senses  and  powers,  and  if 
this  were  continued  through  its  childhood, 
with  proper  instruction,  it  would  retain  those 
spiritual  powers  even  to  maturity. 

The  development  of  the  infant  is  a  nat- 
ural development.  It  is  in  no  sense  negative. 
The  child's  attitude  of  Soul  is  never  negative, 
and  only  the  negative  attitude  could  possibly 
be  taken  advantage  of  by  those  who  would 
control  it  subjectively. 

Furthermore,  under  such  conditions  an  in- 
fant is  always  under  the  protection  of  one  or 
more  of  its  so-called  guardians,  on  the  spir- 
itual side,  whose  responsibility  it  is  to  guard 
it  against  such  conditions. 


2St 


CHAPTER  XXIII 


SOUL  AND  SEX 


The  impulse  of  sex  attraction  obtains  on 
the  spiritual  planes  of  life,  as  it  does  in  this 
life  of  earth,  but  with  the  exception  that  it  is 
upon  a  higher  and  more  exalted  plane. 

Upon  the  physical  plane  of  life  the  impulse 
of  reproduction  is  a  very  strong  element  in 
the  attraction  which  draws  men  and  women 
together  in  marriage,  as  well  as  into  the  home 
and  family  relation.  However  much  the  in- 
dividual may  endeavor  to  disguise  the  fact — 
from  himself  or  herself,  as  well  as  from 
others — there  is,  in  the  attraction  which 
brings  them  together  in  the  marriage  relation 
upon  the  earth  plane,  a  fundamental  desire 
for  and  anticipation  of  children.  The  rear- 
ing of  children  constitutes  the  basis  upon 
which  Nature  perpetuates  the  human  race 
upon  earth,  as  well  as  populates  the  spiritual 
realms  that  belong  to  this  planet.  Hence, 
it  is  but  natural  that  she  has  implanted  io 

239 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  Souls  of  men  and  women  the  impulse  and 
desire  for  children,  which  impel  them  to 
meet  Nature's   demand  for   reproduction. 

But  when  the  physical  life  is  done  and  the 
physical  body  is  put  away,  the  impulse  for 
reproduction  ceases  to  attract  men  and  wo- 
men. The  sex  attraction  is  still  there  in  the 
Soul;  but,  as  soon  as  they  learn  the  meaning 
of  the  transition  and  understand  the  condi- 
tions of  life  upon  the  new  plane,  the  attrac- 
tion shifts  to  the  higher  plane  of  the  spiritual. 
It  is,  however,  none  the  less  potent,  nor  is 
the  relation  any  the  less  exclusive  in  its  de- 
mands upon  the  two  individuals. 

There  are  many,  however,  who  carry  over 
into  the  spiritual  life  the  Soul's  fundamental 
desire  for  children  in  the  home  life.  Nature 
has  provided  for  all  such  cases  by  the  fact  that 
infants  are  constantly  passing  from  the  phys- 
ical life  into  the  spiritual. 

The  spiritual  body  is  an  exact  replica  of 
the  physical  body  with  which  it  was  asso- 
ciated upon  the  earth  plane.  It  has  spiritual 
organs  corresponding  to  the  physical  organs. 
In  other  words,  it  has  a  heart,  a  liver,  a  stom- 
ach and  all  the  other  organs  corresponding  to 

340 


k 


SOUL  AND  SEX 

those  of  the  physical  body,  including  the  sex 
organs  and  the  organs  of  generation.  Each 
of  these  spiritual  organs  has  its  definite  and 
specific  use  and  function.  Reasoning  entirely 
from  the  physical  viewpoint,  one  would  be 
very  apt  to  conclude  that  such  spiritual  or- 
gans perform  functions,  analogous  to  those 
of  their  physical  replicas.  In  this,  however, 
one  would  not  be  entirely  correct. 

Nevertheless,  these  several  spiritual  or- 
gans still  have  their  practical  uses.  They  are 
all  the  seat  of  various  sensations  of  the  body. 
And  on  the  spiritual  side  they  employ  them 
chiefly  for  the  purpose  of  the  sense  enjoy- 
ment of  the  highest  measure  of  harmony  of 
which  they  are  capable.  The  stomach  is  still 
the  seat  of  sensation  which  tells  when  the 
spiritual  body  is  in  need  of  nourishment,  and 
when  that  need  has  been  supplied.  It  still 
gives  that  sense  of  satisfaction  when  the  store 
of  nourishment  is  sufficient  for  all  the  pur- 
poses of  the  body. 

In  the  same  sense,  the  generative  organs 
of  the  spiritual  body  have  their  use  as  cen- 
ters of  sensation.  And,  since  Spiritual  Beings 
have  learned  how  to  conform  their  lives,  in  all 

241 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

their  many  aspects,  to  the  Law  of  Unfold- 
ment,  they  have  learned  how  to  employ  the 
sex  organs  in  processes  that  afford  the  most 
intense  gratification  of  the  individual  love 
nature.  Their  function  in  life  is  to  afford  the 
individual  a  spiritualized  expression  of  the 
love  relation.  An  illustration  from  the  plane 
of  our  own  life  may  help  you  to  understand 
the  meaning  of  this  explanation  more  fully: 

In  the  warm  climate  of  our  physical  world 
men  often  wear  coats.  In  these  coats  are 
pockets.  They  use  these  pockets  as  con- 
venient receptacles  in  which  to  carry  various 
of  their  personal  possessions.  In  the  northern 
countries,  where  the  winters  are  cold,  they 
use  these  same  pockets  for  the  purpose  of 
keeping  their  hands  warm;  and  in  this  latter 
case  they  are  quite  as  useful  as  in  the  former, 
and  convey  to  the  individual  consciousness 
even  greater  sensation  of  pleasure. 

This  illustration  only  brings  out  the  fact 
that  environment  may  have  much  to  do  with 
the  uses  to  which  we  put  things,  quite  re- 
gardless of  what  may  have  been  their  pri- 
mary purpose  and  function. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  understand  the  fact 

242 


SOUL  AND  SEX 

that,  whilst  the  original  and  primary  func- 
tion of  the  generative  organs  was  and  is  re- 
production, upon  the  physical  plane,  these 
same  organs,  in  another  and  different  environ- 
ment and  condition,  may  be  put  to  other  uses 
and  other  purposes  quite  as  important  to  the 
comfort,  well-being  and  happiness  of  the 
individual. 

Sex  is  not  a  thing  of  the  body  alone.  It  is 
fundamentally  a  thing  of  the  Soul. 

The  material  body  gives  but  an  objective 
manifestation  of  it.  But  this  outward  manifes- 
tation is  merely  a  manifestation  of  that  which 
is  back  of  the  material  body,  namely,  the  Soul. 
It  marks  a  cleavage  which  runs  throughout 
ail  Nature — the  masculine  and  the  feminine 
— and  these  are  immutable.  A  man  is  always, 
under  all  circumstances  and  conditions  of 
life,  a  Man;  and  in  like  manner,  a  woman 
is  always,  under  all  conditions  and  circum- 
stances of  life,  a  Woman.  The  sex  of  an  in- 
dividual never  changes,  any  more  than  does 
the  individuality  itself  change. 

In  the  spiritual  life — except  in  the  cases 
mentioned  where  men  and  women  assume  the 
responsibility  of  rearing  spiritual  infants  from 

243 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

infancy  to  spiritual  majority  —  the  home  is 
founded  upon  the  exclusive  love  relation  of 
one  man  and  one  woman.  There  is  no  obliga- 
tion to  children  which  binds  them  together  in 
the  marriage  relation.  It  has  now  become  an 
exclusive  and  personal  relation  which  consti- 
tutes the  unbreakable  bond  between  them. 

Marriage  ceremonies  no  longer  exist.  They 
have  been  discarded  along  with  the  respon- 
sibility which  provided  for  the  rearing  of 
children  upon  the  earth.  But  men  and  wo- 
men still  continue,  upon  the  spiritual  planes, 
to  find  their  exclusive  happiness  in  each 
other.  Because  of  this  provision  of  Nature, 
they  come  together  in  a  voluntary  association 
for  their  own  personal  happiness  and  for  the 
greater  accomplishment  which  such  a  rela- 
tion makes  possible.  They  are  drawn  to- 
gether by  the  natural  Law  of  Attraction  and 
they  remain  together  under  the  same  Law. 

But  if,  for  any  reason,  a  man  and  a  woman 
(who  have  lived  together  upon  the  spiritual 
side  of  life  in  that  exclusive  personal  rela- 
tion upon  which  spiritual  homes  are  founded) 
should  find  that  the  bond  of  attraction  be- 
tween them  is  not  sufficiently  strong  and  har- 

244 


SOUL  AND  SEX 

monious  to  bring  them  the  personal  happiness 
in  each  other  which  their  Souls  crave,  they 
at  once  know  that  they  are  not  perfectly 
mated.  When  this  fact  becomes  conclusive 
to  them  they  separate  as  naturally  as  they 
came  together  and  without  bitterness  or  un- 
happiness  in  any  sense. 

Spiritual  life  and  conditions  are  such  that 
men  and  women  are  able  to  obtain  a  much 
clearer  idea  as  to  this  natural  attraction  be- 
tween the  sexes.  While  they  still  make  occa- 
sional mistakes,  especially  upon  the  lower 
planes  of  spiritual  life,  these  are  exceedingly 
rare.  Consequently,  separations  are  very  few, 
even  upon  the  lower  planes. 

There  is  no  formal  or  legal  institution  of 
"divorce"  upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life.  As 
in  the  case  of  voluntary  union  between  men 
and  women,  there  is  no  formal  ceremony  of 
marriage,  but  a  mutual  recognition  of  the  sex 
attraction  which  draws  them  together;  so, 
when  the  attraction  ceases  to  bring  the  hap- 
piness which  the  two  Souls  desire  and  crave, 
they  simply  separate  as  voluntarily  and  as 
naturally  as  they  came  together,  and  the  per- 
sonal relationship  ceases  to  exist. 

245 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

There  is  neither  legal  marriage  nor  divorce 
upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life.  When  the  one 
man  and  the  one  woman  come  together  upon 
the  spiritual  planes  of  life,  by  the  natural  Law 
of  Sex  Attraction,  into  the  perfect  love  rela- 
tion, they  find  themselves  bound  together  by 
a  bond  which  neither  desires  to  break,  and 
which  neither  could  break.  Indeed,  when  the 
relation  of  perfect  sex  harmony  and  union  is 
once  established,  it  is  the  strongest  bond  that 
exists  in  human  nature,  and  it  abides  through- 
out all  the  planes  of  life,  even  to  eternity — 
so  far  as  we  know.  It  is  the  one  great,  beau- 
tiful, wonderful  and  mystical  tie  upon  which 
all  true,  personal  happiness  is  based. 

Until  that  relation  is  discovered  and  estab- 
lished between  a  man  and  a  woman,  they 
both  are  forever  seeking  and  searching  for  it. 
And  this  ever-active  search  for  perfect  com- 
panionship, and  for  the  happiness  which  it 
brings  with  it,  is  the  central  inspiration 
which  moves  them  in  all  their  Soul  activities. 

Truly,  "Love  is  the  Greatest  Thing  in  the 
World."  Indeed,  it  is  the  greatest  thing  in 
any  world,  so  far  as  Science  knows. 


24tf 


CHAPTER  XXIV 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 


In  cases  of  death  resulting  from  long-con- 
tinued sickness  which  depletes  the  physical 
organism  and  its  stock  of  vitality,  slowly  and 
steadily — until  death  comes  as  a  result  of  the 
worn-out  body  and  the  depletion  of  its  vi- 
tality—  the  separation  of  the  two  bodies 
almost  always  begins  before  the  heart  has 
entirely  ceased  to  function.  But  it  is  never 
complete  until  the  heart  has  entirely  ceased 
its  action.  In  truth,  there  are  comparatively 
few  instances  where  the  separation  of  the  two 
bodies  is  complete  until  at  least  a  little  time 
has  elapsed  after  the  last  heart-beat. 

In  cases  of  heart  disease — where  the  indi- 
vidual is  full  of  vital  energy  until  the  instant 
when  the  heart  action  stops — the  separation 
of  the  two  bodies  does  not  begin  until  after 
the  heart  entirely  ceases  to  function.  It  is  the 
actual  stopping  of  the  heart,  in  such  cases, 
that  stops  the  normal  flow  of  the  vital  cur- 

247 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

rents  and  thereby  dissipates  the  vital  elements 
upon  which  the  association  of  the  two  bodies 
depends.  In  such  cases  the  actual  separation 
of  the  two  bodies  seldom,  if  ever,  is  complete 
until  from  one  to  three  minutes  after  the  last 
heart-beat. 

The  same  is  equally  true  in  all  cases  of  in- 
stantaneous death  from  violent  causes,  such 
as  gunshot,  or  the  sudden  and  complete 
crushing  of  the  physical  body — as  from  the 
falling  of  a  stone  or  other  heavy  body  upon 
it — or  from  hanging.  In  the  latter  case,  al- 
though consciousness  ceases  almost  immedi- 
ately, the  heart  often  continues  to  beat  for 
five  to  ten  minutes,  and  in  exceptional  cases, 
even  longer.  Even  so,  the  separation  of  the 
two  bodies  is  not  complete  until  after  the 
heart  ceases  to  act. 

In  cases  of  sudden  explosions,  where  the 
physical  body  is  torn  into  bits,  the  separation 
of  the  two  bodies  is  as  instantaneous  as  the 
stopping  of  the  heart  action.  In  such  cases, 
no  appreciable  time  elapses  between  the  last 
heart-beat  and  the  complete  separation  of  the 
two  bodies.  This  is  because  the  physical  body 
is  virtually  disintegrated,  leaving  no  center 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

of  connection  with  the  spiritual  body.  In 
this  case  the  separation  of  the  two  bodies  and 
the  stopping  of  the  heart's  action  are  vir- 
tually synchronous  and  instantaneous. 

If  the  physical  body  is  surcharged  with 
vital  energy  and  health  at  the  instant  the 
heart  ceases  to  act,  the  bond  between  the  two 
bodies  is  correspondingly  strong,  and  will 
persist  until  the  entire  store  of  accumulated 
vital  energy  has  run  out.  This  is  why  it  is 
that,  when  sudden  death  comes,  in  the  midst 
of  health  and  vigor,  the  actual  separation  of 
the  two  bodies  is  not  completed  instantly,  but 
requires  from  one  to  three  minutes  and,  in 
some  instances,  longer. 

For  the  same  reason,  when  death  follows 
from  long  illness  which  slowly  depletes  the 
normal  store  of  vitality,  the  store  of  mag- 
netic and  vital  energy  is  extremely  low  when 
the  heart  ceases  to  beat.  The  separation  of 
the  two  bodies  is  virtually  complete  when 
the  heart  stops. 

In  cases  of  lingering  illness,  where  vitality 
gradually  runs  very  low  before  death  occurs, 
often  the  separation  of  the  two  bodies  ac- 
tually begins,  the  heart  almost  ceases  to  act 

249 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

and  physical  dissolution  really  sets  in;  but, 
before  the  separation  is  complete  the  attend- 
ing physician  administers  a  strong  heart 
stimulant.  Instantly  the  heart  responds  and 
the  life  current  is  set  in  motion  once  more. 
The  spiritual  body  —  already  partly  with- 
drawn from  the  physical  —  is  drawn  back 
again,  and  life  is  renewed  for  the  time.  Then 
the  heart  stimulant  loses  its  effect,  the  vital 
forces  and  energies  wane,  and  the  process  of 
physical  death  sets  in  again.  Once  more  the 
two  bodies  begin  to  separate.  This  time  the 
separation  is  almost  complete  when  the  at- 
tending physician  administers  another  strong 
heart  stimulant.  The  heart  responds  and  in- 
stantly the  spiritual  body  is  drawn  back 
again  into  union  with  the  physical.  This 
process  may  be  repeated  many  times,  and 
each  time  physical  death  actually  begins; 
but  there  comes  a  time  when  the  vital  forces 
and  energies  run  too  low  and  the  heart  no 
longer  can  be  made  to  respond  to  temporary 
stimulants.  Then  the  separation  becomes 
complete  and  physical  death  results. 

There  have  been  many  interesting  cases  of 
resuscitation   from   drowning,   in   which   the 

250 


k 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

separation  of  the  two  bodies  has  been  com- 
plete. The  individual  is  conscious  of  the  fact 
that  he  is  entirely  out  of  the  physical  body. 
He  even  floats  above  it  and  is  able  to  see  its 
etheric  counterpart  lying  there  upon  the  bed. 
He  sees  the  spiritual  forms  of  the  doctor  and 
his  attendants,  as  they  w^ork  over  the  physical 
body.  Suddenly  the  heart  begins  to  beat.  The 
vital  current  is  again  set  in  motion  and,  with- 
out knowing  how  it  is  done,  the  individual 
feels  himself  drawn  back  once  more  into  the 
physical  body,  as  it  were.  With  a  gasp,  he 
awakens  to  physical  consciousness,  and  finds 
himself  once  more  inhabiting  his  physical 
body,  as  physically  sound  and  well  as  ever. 
In  this  case  physical  death  actually  began 
and  was  virtually  complete  when  the  process 
of  dissolution  was  arrested  and  the  vital  ac- 
tivities restored.  Such  an  individual  may 
live  many  years  after  such  an  experience, 
during  which  time  he  may  enjoy  perfect 
physical  health. 

Such  experiences  as  these,  and  many  others, 
show  that  death  may  begin  long  before  the 
heart  actually  ceases  to  beat;  or,  it  may  not 
begin  until  after  the  heart  has  entirely  ceased 

251 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

to  function  —  depending  entirely  upon  the 
physical  condition  of  the  individual  at  the 
time. 

From  the  moment  dissolution  and  the  sep- 
aration of  the  two  bodies  begins,  there  is 
neither  pain  nor  suffering  of  any  kind,  except 
where  the  element  of  fear  enters.  Many  ap- 
proach the  transition  of  physical  death  with 
a  profound  sense  of  dread.  If  the  mind  and 
Soul  of  the  individual  have  been  deeply  im- 
pressed with  the  suggestion  that  death  is  an 
event  of  horror  to  be  dreaded  and  feared, 
the  last  conscious  impression  of  the  individ- 
ual is  that  of  fear  and  dread. 

So  long  as  the  individual  is  conscious  upon 
the  physical  plane  he  may,  and  often  does, 
suffer  the  most  intense  pain  and  agony,  as 
from  a  fatal  wound,  or  from  certain  forms 
of  disease — such  as  rheumatism,  blood  poi- 
son, gangrene,  and  especially  from  burns. 

But,  from  the  instant  the  transition  called 
death  really  begins,  and  the  spiritual  body 
proceeds  to  emerge  from  the  physical,  all 
pain  and  suffering  cease,  and  whatever  sen- 
sations there  are — of  which  the  individual  is 
conscious — are  those  of  peace,  quiet  and  en- 

252 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

joyment.  The  exception,  however,  occurs  in 
cases  where  fear  and  dread  have  been  irre- 
vocably implanted  in  the   Soul  in  advance. 

This  is  meant  to  convey  the  information 
that  the  transition  itself  from  the  physical  life 
to  the  spiritual  does  not  involve  pain  or  suf- 
fering of  any  kind  whatever.  All  pain  and 
suffering,  in  other  words,  occur  while  the  in- 
dividual is  intelligently  conscious  upon  the 
physical  plane  of  life.  This  is  because  the 
instant  the  two  bodies  begin  to  separate,  the 
channels  of  physical  sense  are  broken  and  it 
is  impossible  for  sensations  of  any  kind, 
either  painful  or  pleasant,  to  pass  from  the 
physical  body  to  the  Soul  which  inhabits  the 
spiritual  body. 

Sometimes  it  occurs  that  one  who  is  ap- 
proaching physical  dissolution  loses  physical 
consciousness  for  hours,  sometimes  for  days, 
and  in  extreme  cases,  for  weeks,  before  the 
actual  transition  begins.  Our  earthly  physi- 
cians call  this  a  state  of  ''coma!'  From  the 
instant  the  individual  loses  physical  con- 
sciousness and  enters  upon  the  state  and  con- 
dition of  coma,  his  pain  and  suffering  end. 
From  that  time  until  the  separation  of  the 

253 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

two  bodies  is  complete,  he  remains  in  a  state 
of  complete  unconsciousness.  This  means 
that  he  has  no  knowledge  of  what  is  occurring 
upon  either  plane  of  life. 

In  such  cases  this  period  of  coma  seems  to 
be  a  complete  blank  in  his  life,  for  he  has  no 
knowledge  of  it  at  the  time,  and  afterwards 
no  remembrance  of  it.  But  this  state  of 
complete  unconsciousness  does  not  always 
occur.  In  truth,  it  is  rather  the  exception 
than  the  rule;  for,  in  very  many  instances, 
the  individual  loses  consciousness  only  upon 
the  plane  of  the  purely  physical.  In  this 
case  he  has  no  knowledge  of  what  is  occur- 
ring upon  the  physical  plane — except  as  it 
may  be  reflected  to  him  through  the  spiritual 
sense  channels.  All  physical  sensation,  how- 
ever, has  ceased.  This  is  for  the  reason  al- 
ready explained. 

But  the  Soul  is  intensely  awake  and  entirely 
conscious  upon  the  spiritual  plane.  The  in- 
dividual sees  and  hears  and  otherwise  senses 
the  presence  about  him  of  those  upon  the 
spiritual  plane  who  are  only  waiting  to  re- 
ceive him  as  he,  in  his  spiritual  body, 
emerges    from   the   physical.     In  such  cases, 

254 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

the  individual  also  sees  and  otherwise  senses 
the  spiritual  forms  of  those  who  are  yet  in 
the  physical  body  and  near  him.  He  is  even 
able  to  hear  what  they  say — not  with  his 
physical  ears,  to  be  sure,  but  with  his  spir- 
itual sense  of  hearing. 

It  often  occurs  that  an  individual  who  is 
approaching  physical  death  falls  into  the 
state  of  coma.  He  may  remain  in  that  state 
for  hours  before  death  occurs.  Then  he  will 
return  to  physical  consciousness  for  ten,  fif- 
teen or  twenty  minutes,  just  before  death 
occurs.  During  this  interval  of  physical 
consciousness  he  will  betray  the  fact  that  he 
was  spiritually  awake  and  intensely  con- 
scious during  every  moment  of  his  physical 
comatose  condition.  Many  such  cases  have 
occurred  where  the  dying  individual  has  nar- 
rated, with  singular  vividness  and  accuracy, 
most  of  the  things  which  were  said  and  done 
by  those  about  him  on  the  physical  plane,  in- 
cluding the  physician,  the  nurse  and  the  mem- 
bers of  the  family  who  were  present  during 
that  time. 

This  is  possible  only  because  the  dying  in- 
dividual receives  the  Soul  impulse  upon  the 

255 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

spiritual  plane;  and,  since  those  upon  the 
earth  plane  have  both  a  spiritual  and  a  phys- 
ical body,  their  thoughts  express  themselves 
spiritually  as  well  as  physically.  Those  on 
the  spiritual  side  receive  the  spiritual  impulse 
and  thought. 

There  are  many  cases  where  the  individual 
who  has  awakened  from  his  comatose  con- 
dition will  narrate  many  interesting  experi- 
ences he  has  had — during  that  period — with 
relatives  and  friends  who  have  preceded  him 
in  the  spiritual  life.  By  many  who  are  not 
acquainted  with  the  scientific  facts,  but  who 
are  strongly  religious,  these  experiences  are 
taken  and  accepted  as  positive  assurance  of 
the  correctness  of  religious  faith.  There  are 
many,  however,  whose  religious  faith  satisfies 
them  as  to  the  existence  of  another  life,  but 
they  do  not  believe  that  it  is  possible  for  those 
who  have  passed  into  the  spiritual  life  to  re- 
turn and  make  their  presence  known  to  those 
upon  the  physical  plane.  Such  experiences  as 
those  above  referred  to  naturally  have  the 
effect  to  modify  ihcir  religious  convictions  in 
this  one  particular. 

The  foregoing  facts  will  suggest  something 

256 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

of  the  care  and  discretion  that  should  always 
be  exercised  by  those  upon  the  physical  plane 
in  the  presence  of  those  who  are  in  the  coma- 
tose condition.  Not  a  word  or  thought 
should  be  expressed,  in  the  presence  of  the 
dying,  nor  in  the  presence  of  those  in  the 
comatose  state,  which  might  not  rightly  and 
properly  be  expressed  to  the  individual  if  he 
were  consciously  awake  upon  the  physical 
plane  of  life. 

If  this  suggestion  were  always  followed 
and  enforced  by  physicians  and  nurses,  it 
would  save  many  a  dying  individual  the 
most  intense  agony  during  the  last  moments 
of  his  physical  life — which  ought  to  be  made 
as  perfectly  peaceful  and  harmonious  as  pos- 
sible. It  is  hoped  that  this  suggestion  may 
be  made  of  practical  value  by  our  future  edu- 
cators in  teaching  humanity  the  right  At- 
titude of  Soul  to  be  maintained  by  those  in 
the  physical  body  who  are  present  in  the 
environment  of  those  in  the  comatose  condi- 
tion. They  should  be  made  to  realize  that 
their  own  attitude  of  soul  may  become  a 
great   and   beneficent   factor   in   making   the 

257 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

transition  one  of  peace  and  joy,  and  even  of 
happiness. 

For  illustration:  Those  who  are  present 
upon  the  physical  plane  and  surround  the 
death-bed,  should  fix  their  thoughts  upon  the 
dying  individual,  with  the  earnest  desire  to 
convey  to  him  a  message  of  love  and  hope 
and  faith  and  confidence  and  assurance  that 
all  is  well.  They  should  hold  in  mind  the 
conscious  and  earnest  desire  to  help  make  the 
last  earthly  moments,  and  the  transition  itself 
into  spiritual  life,  as  peaceful  and  happy  as 
possible.  The  time  will  come  when  every  such 
individual  will  know  that  he  has  rendered  to 
his  fellow,  in  the  Hour  of  Need,  the  help 
most  needed. 

The  analogous  suggestion  holds  equally 
good  with  those  who  are  physically  present 
with  one  who  is  in  the  comatose  state  and  con- 
dition. Every  thought  and  every  impulse  of 
the  Soul  should  be  constructive  and  charged 
with  the  earnest  desire  and  purpose  to  Serve 
in  the  Hour  of  Need. 

This  is  "Practical  Psychology."  Do  not 
forget  it.    Study  this  subject  with  the  utmost 

25S 


WHEN  DEATH  BEGINS 

care  until  the  meaning  of  physical  death  is,  to 
you,  clear  and  definite.  Do  not  stop  until  you 
have  analyzed  correctly  the  meaning  and 
significance  of  the  comatose  state  and  condi- 
tion of  those  who  may  be  restored  to  physical 
life  and  health  again.  Then,  whenever  you 
have  the  opportunity,  put  into  active  prac- 
tice the  knowledge  you  have  gained.  Not 
now,  perhaps,  but  some  time,  you  will  come 
to  know  that  you  have  been  a  real  benefactor, 
and  that  you  have  rendered  to  another  the 
greatest  possible  service  in  the  hour  of  his 
Greatest  Need. 


259 


CHAPTER  XXV 


SUSPENDED  ANIMATION 


This  subject  is  one  concerning  which  our 
physical  scientists  know  but  little.  It  is 
one,  however,  which  means  much  to  the 
Masters  of  Natural  Science — especially  when 
they  are  physically  separated  by  distance  and 
conditions  which  prevent  them  from  meet- 
ing together  physically  when  such  meetings 
are  vitally  important  to  the  welfare  of 
humanity. 

Suspended  animation  is  a  condition  which 
any  Master  of  Natural  Science  has  the  power 
to  create  at  will.  The  vital  currents  and  ac- 
tivities are  simply  stopped,  or  suspended,  in 
their  onward  flow,  without  the  operation  of 
any  destructive,  disintegrating  process  or 
condition.  The  vital  machinery  of  the  phys- 
ical organism  merely  stops  at  the  point  where 
the  Master  Mind  wills  that  it  shall  stop. 

In  this  condition,  however,  the  individual 
who  controls  the  process  is  able  to  withdraw 

2«1 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  spiritual  body  from  the  physical,  and  vol 
untarily  ^'travel  in  foreign  countries"  without 
the  physical  body.  He  may  also  return  to  the 
physical  body,  re-enter  it,  resume  the  activ- 
ities of  the  physical  functions  at  will,  and 
voluntarily  restore  himself  to  a  normal,  phys- 
ical condition. 

But  while  he  is  out  of  the  physical  body 
entirely,  and  traveling  in  the  spiritual  body 
alone,  there  is  always  a  vital,  magnetic  cord, 
running  between  the  two  bodies.  It  is  the 
existence  of  this  vital  cord  which  makes  it 
possible  for  him  to  return  to,  and  re-enter 
the  physical  body  at  will.  If,  perchance, 
during  the  time  he  is  out  of  the  physical  body, 
anything  should  occur  to  break  that  vital 
magnetic  cord,  physical  death  would  occur 
instantly.  In  this  event,  he  would  not  be  able 
to  re-enter  the  physical  body,  nor  cause  it  to 
resume  its  normal  functions. 

The  Soul  may  travel  in  the  spiritual  body 
alone  to  any  distance  upon  the  plane  of  earth. 
It  may  also  travel  in  the  magnetic  field,  and 
most  usually  does  during  that  experience.  It 
may,  however,  reach  the  plane  of  the  first 
spiritual.     But  so  long  as  the  magnetic  cord 

262 


SUSPENDED  ANIMATION 

remains  intact  with  the  physical  body,  the 
Soul  cannot  travel  above  or  beyond  the  first 
spiritual  plane.  This  is  due  to  the  gravitative 
pull  of  the  physical  body. 

But  there  is  yet  another  condition  of  sus- 
pended animation.  This  is,  however,  the  re- 
sult of  the  condition  which  physicians  call 
"catalepsy." 

The  cataleptic  state  of  suspended  anima- 
tion has  been  known  to  continue  uninterrupt- 
edly for  more  than  one  year,  without  the 
slightest  perceptible  change  in  the  physical 
condition  of  the  individual.  It  seldom  oc- 
curs, however,  that  the  individual  passes 
through  actual  death  directly  from  the  cata- 
leptic state.  Whilst  this  does  occur,  at  very 
rare  intervals;  nevertheless,  in  most  instances, 
a  few  moments  before  death  actually  occurs 
the  physical  functions — including  the  action 
of  the  heart — are  resumed.  In  such  cases  the 
process  of  separation  of  the  two  bodies  is 
governed  by  the  general  conditions  already 
explained. 

In  those  few  cases,  however,  where  death 
results  without  restoration  or  resumption  of 
the  physical  functionings,  the  actual  separa- 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

tion  of  the  two  bodies  may  not  even  begin 
until  long  after  the  heart  has  ceased  to  act. 

As  to  the  length  of  time  one  may  be  out 
of  the  physical  body,  under  such  conditions, 
it  depends  very  much  upon  the  development 
and  condition  of  the  individual.  If  low  in 
spirituality,  he  may  not  remain  out  of  the 
physical  more  than  a  few  hours;  but  if  the 
spiritual  development  is  of  a  high  order  and 
degree,  he  may  remain  much  longer,  even 
two  or  three  days.  In  this  case,  however,  ref- 
erence is  made  only  to  the  normal  condition  of 
profound  sleep. 

It  is  important  to  know  that,  in  cases  of 
suspended  animation  resulting  from  cata- 
lepsy, the  two  bodies  are  thereby  inseparably 
bound  together  and  the  Soul  is  locked  within 
them  so  long  as  the  cataleptic  condition  con- 
tinues. In  such  cases  consciousness  also  is 
suspended. 

But  between  Catalepsy  and  the  voluntary 
Suspended  Animation,  there  are  two  impor- 
tant distinctions  which  should  be  noted: 

1.  Ordinary  catalepsy  is  not  a  voluntary 
process,  while  the  suspended  animation  of  a 
Master  is  entirely  voluntary. 

264 


SUSPENDED  ANIMATION 

2.  In  catalepsy  the  two  bodies  are  bound 
together,  and  the  Soul  is  locked  within  them; 
while  in  voluntary  Suspended  Animation,  the 
union  of  the  two  bodies  is  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  Master-Mind  that  caused  the  sus- 
pended animation.  By  the  power  of  his  Will 
he  may  cause  the  two  bodies  to  separate ;  and 
clothed  in  his  spiritual  body  alone,  his  Soul 
may  travel  at  will  in  the  spiritual  realms  of 
life.  In  this  state  and  condition  the  Master 
may  remain  out  of  the  physical  body  and  in 
the  spiritual  body  almost  indefinitely,  with- 
out harmful  results,  until  he  is  ready  to  return 
and  take  up  his  physical  body  again. 


265 


CHAPTER  XXVI 


WHEN   DEATH   ENDS 


It  has  been  said  that  there  are  exceptions  to 
all  rules.  Perhaps  this  is  true.  Judging 
from  the  results  as  seen  from  the  spiritual 
side  of  life,  it  would  seem  that,  in  the  very 
large  majority  of  cases,  the  individual  does 
not  at  once  realize  that  physical  death  has 
transpired.  It  often  occurs  that,  for  some  time 
he  labors  under  the  impression  and  convic- 
tion that  he  Is  dreaming  and  that,  in  due 
time,  he  will  awake  and  find  himself  back  in 
the  midst  of  the  conditions  which  existed  at 
the  beginning  of  his  "dream,"  namely,  the 
instant  when  death  overtook  him.  Usually 
he  sees  his  physical  body — or,  rather,  its  mag- 
netic or  etheric  counterpart;  for  the  physical 
body  itself  is  not  visible  to  the  eyes  of  the 
spiritual — and  recognizes  it  as  his  own.  He 
also  recognizes  and  feels  the  pull  of  the  mag- 
netic bond  that  still  attracts  him  to  it.  All 
this  serves  to  convince  him  that  he  is  simply 

267 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

dreaming  and  that  when  he  awakes  he  will 
find  himself  back  in  his  physical  body  in  the 
midst  of  the  conditions  he  left  when  the  shock 
came  and  carried  him  out  of  his  physical 
body. 

There  are  many  instances,  however,  where 
the  individual  is  dazed  and  confused  and  be- 
wildered for  hours,  sometimes  days,  or  even 
weeks.  In  either  of  these  cases  it  often  re- 
quires time  and  personal  eflfort  to  bring  the 
individual  to  a  fuller  realization  of  the  fact 
that  he  is  really  and  truly  "dead." 

Slowly  and  surely,  however,  he  comes  to 
realize  that  he  is  no  longer  in  the  old  physical 
body,  in  the  midst  of  the  old  familiar  phys- 
ical conditions  and  environment.  Then  he 
turns  to  his  spiritual  companions  and  helpers 
in  the  hope  that  they  will  be  able  to  show 
him  how  to  make  his  presence  known  to 
those  of  his  loved  ones  he  has  left  behind  him 
upon  the  earth  plane.  From  this  point  it  is 
never  difficult  to  convince  the  individual  that 
he  is,  indeed,  "dead"  to  all  those  he  has  left 
upon  the  physical  plane  of  life. 

But  these  conditions  obtain  chiefly  with 
those  who  have  never  contemplated  the  sub- 

268 


WHEN  DEATH  ENDS 

ject  of  physical  death  nor  in  any  manner  pre- 
pared themselves  for  the  transition  which  it 
involves. 

The  same  conditions,  though  by  no  means 
to  the  same  extent,  exist  even  with  those  who 
have  thought  much  upon  the  problem  of 
death — especially  where  the  individual  has 
entertained  strong  convictions  concerning  the 
spiritual  life  which  are  radically  different 
from  those  he  finds  when  he  awakens  upon 
the  spiritual  plane — or  the  magnetic  field 
— as  the  case  may  be.  Indeed,  it  often  occurs 
that  such  as  these  find  the  conditions  of  the 
spiritual  life  quite  as  different  from  their  pre- 
conceived notions  as  do  those  who  have  taken 
the  entire  subject  for  granted.  This  is  espe- 
cially true  of  the  most  ardent  and  devout 
religionists  whose  ministers,  priests  and  teach- 
ers have  mapped,  charted,  designated  and 
located  all  the  streets,  crossings,  temples  and 
points  of  interest  in  "The  New  Jerusalem." 

These  also  find  the  new  life  and  country  so 
utterly  at  variance  with  the  landmarks  of  the 
map  and  chart  they  have  been  taught  to  fol- 
low as  their  guide,  that  they  cannot  bring 
themselves  to  accept  the  fact  that  they  are 

269 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

really  "dead"  in  the  conventional  sense.  They 
therefore  assume,  as  in  the  other  case  de- 
scribed, that  they  are  dreaming  and  that,  in 
due  time,  they  will  awake  and  find  themselves 
back  in  the  midst  of  the  old  familiar  scenes 
and  conditions  of  their  former  physical  life, 
once  more  inhabiting  the  familiar  physical 
body. 

With  such  as  these,  also,  it  often  requires 
much  time,  thought  and  effort,  on  the  part  of 
those  whose  mission  it  is,  upon  the  spiritual 
plane,  to  help  those  who  go  over  from  the 
plane  of  earth  unprepared  to  assume  at  once 
the  duties  and  responsibilities  of  the  new  life, 
to  educate  them  into  a  full  and  complete  un- 
derstanding and  acceptance  of  the  spiritual 
life  just  as  they  find  it.  With  these,  also,  it  is 
a  matter  of  education. 

But  there  are  those  who  approach  the  new 
life  fully  prepared  to  enter  upon  its  duties, 
activities  and  responsibilities.  These  are  they 
who  have  arrived  at  a  point  in  their  evolu- 
tionary unfoldment  where  they  have  over- 
come the  superstitions,  the  religious  errors, 
the  doctrinal  fallacies  and  the  philosophical 
prejudices  of  earth  life,  and  are  prepared  to 

270 


WHEN  DEATH  ENDS 

accept  whatever  conditions  they  find,  whether 
consistent  with  their  own  philosophical  de- 
ductions, or  not.  These,  while  yet  upon  the 
earth  plane,  may  not  be  able  to  open  their 
spiritual  eyes  and  look  ahead  of  them  into  the 
spiritual  life  and  see  the  conditions  of  that 
life  as  they  are,  but  they  have  grown  to  that 
splendid  stature  of  intelligence  of  Soul  de- 
velopment from  which  they  can  view  the 
world  as  they  find  it,  freed  from  either  scien- 
tific, philosophic  or  religious  preconceptions 
and  prejudices.  Often  these  are  classed  upon 
earth  as  "Agnostics" — which  simply  means 
those  who  are  willing  to  admit  that  they  'Vo 
not  know"  what  lies  beyond  this  life  of  earth, 
but  whatever  it  may  prove  to  be,  they  hold 
themselves  in  readiness  to  accept  it  as  they 
find  it,  and  proceed  at  once  to  adjust  them- 
selves to  the  new  conditions  and  make  the 
most  of  the  situation. 

Then  there  are  those  who,  by  virtue  of  their 
psychic  development  upon  earth,  are  permit- 
ted to  look  beyond  the  limitations  of  physical 
nature  and  physical  life,  and  see  for  them- 
selves the  true  conditions  of  the  life  beyond. 
These  do  not  find  it  necessary  to  depend  upon 

271 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  teachings  of  any  church,  sect,  cult  or 
school.  They  have  personally  solved  the  great 
problem  of  "another  life"  for  themselves,  in 
a  manner  that  answers  every  demand  of  the 
most  exact  and  exacting  science.  They  un- 
derstand both  the  meaning  and  the  purpose 
of  the  change  called  "death";  and  they  know, 
through  a  definite  and  personal  experience, 
the  conditions  of  the  new  life,  as  well  as  the 
duties  and  responsibilities  it  involves. 

And,  with  such  as  these,  whether  the  transi- 
tion comes  with  the  swiftness  of  the  assassin's 
bullet,  or  through  long  and  painful  illness,  or 
through  the  peaceful  process  of  sleep,  the  re- 
sult is  the  same  insofar  as  their  entry  into  the 
spiritual  life  is  concerned,  as  well  as  its  effects 
upon  them. 

Such  as  these  may  well  exclaim: 
"O  gravel  Where  is  thy  victory? 
O  death  1  Where  is  thy  sting?" 


272 


CHAPTER  XXVII 


PSYCHIC  EFFECT  OF  SUICIDE 


The  specific  manner  in  which  the  individ- 
ual comes  to  his  death  often  has  a  direct  and 
potent  effect  upon  his  psychic  conditions 
afterwards. 

This  leads  naturally  to  a  study  of  suicide 
and  its  psychic  effects  upon  the  individual 
after  he  has  passed  into  the  spiritual  life. 
This  study  develops  some  rather  startling 
phases  of  the  subject  which,  it  would  seem, 
should  be  of  vital  interest  and  importance  to 
all  who  are  earnestly  striving  for  happiness 
and  progress. 

This  is  a  subject  that  ought  to  be  better  un- 
derstood by  people  upon  the  physical  plane  of 
life.  It  involves  certain  scientific  problems 
which  have  a  powerful  influence  upon  the 
evolutionary  condition  of  the  Soul  after 
death. 

There  is  something  in  the  very  Soul  im- 
pulse of  self-destruction  which,  when  once 

273 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

set  in  motion  by  the  physical  act  of  suicide, 
continues  psychically  as  a  destructive  force 
in  the  life  of  the  individual,  until  it  is  over- 
come or  counteracted,  cither  by  the  voluntary 
or  intelligent  Will  of  the  individual  himself, 
or  until  it  is  reversed  through  the  aid  of  those 
who  are  wise  enough  to  understand  the  sci- 
entific process  involved. 

In  some  respects  it  is  analogous,  in  its  ac- 
tion upon  the  Soul,  to  the  action  of  certain 
destructive  acids  upon  the  physical  body. 
Once  it  is  applied — and  the  process  thus  set  in 
motion — it  goes  on  and  on  until  the  cause  is 
removed.  No  permanent  restoration  of  con- 
structive conditions  within  the  Soul  can  be 
established  until  the  Intelligence,  the  Will 
and  the  Determination  of  the  individual  him- 
self can  be  set  in  motion  to  counteract  the  de- 
structive processes  invoked  by  the  original 
psychic  impulse  of  self-destruction  which  led 
to  the  death  of  the  physical  body. 

Doubtless  a  very  large  percentage  of  sui- 
cides are  committed  under  the  impulse  and 
desire  to  get  away  from  painful  or  unhappy 
conditions  upon  the  earth  plane.  The  act  is 
committed  under  the  impression  that  physical 

274 


PSYCHIC  EFFECT  OF  SUICIDE 

death  will  accomplish  the  desired  result.  In 
this  the  individual  is  profoundly  and  vitally 
mistaken:  for  it  is  not  true. 

If  humanity  could  be  educated  to  a  definite 
and  scientific  knov^ledge  of  the  important  fact 
that  suicide  never  evades  nor  avoids  either 
painful  or  unhappy  earthly  conditions,  but 
serves  only  to  plunge  the  individual  into  the 
midst  of  conditions  upon  the  spiritual  side  of 
life  even  more  painful,  unhappy  and  de- 
structive than  he  seeks  to  evade  or  avoid,  sui- 
cide w^ould  soon  become  a  thing  of  the  past. 

In  the  case  of  murder  there  is  no  impulse 
of  self-destruction  set  in  motion  in  the  mind 
and  Soul  of  the  victim.  The  psychic  impulse 
and  desire  to  live  are  at  no  time,  nor  in  the 
slightest  degree,  interfered  w^ith  nor  dimin- 
ished. The  destructive  impulse  is  wholly  and 
entirely  in  the  mind  and  soul  of  the  murderer, 
and  not  in  those  of  the  victim.  The  latter 
takes  up  his  life  on  the  spiritual  side  with  all 
the  constructive  forces  of  self-preservation 
fully  alive  and  active.  He  begins  the  new 
life  exactly  at  the  point  where  he  leaves  off 
the  old.  In  no  degree  nor  manner  is  he  han- 
dicapped  by   destructive    Soul   impulses   or 

275 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

desires.  He  is  still  as  full  of  the  impulse  and 
desire  to  live  as  he  was  before  his  transition. 
All  this  is  different  with  the  suicide,  who 
must  reverse  all  the  currents  of  his  being  be- 
fore he  can  overcome  the  destructive  impulse 
of  his  own  Soul,  which  led  to  suicide. 

Suppose  an  individual  is  under  hypnotic 
control,  and  commits  the  act  of  self-destruc- 
tion as  the  direct  result  of  the  Will  of  the 
hypnotist  who  controlled  him  at  the  time.  It 
will  not  be  difficult  for  one  to  realize  the 
fact  that  the  impulse  of  suicide  was  not 
present  at  all.  It  was  solely  and  entirely  the 
impulse  of  the  hypnotist  in  obedience  to 
whose  hypnotic  command  he  performed  the 
act.  In  this  case,  whom  would  you  hold  per- 
sonally responsible  for  the  death?  Naturally 
you  will  say  the  hypnotist,  and  you  are  right. 
In  essence  the  act  was  that  of  the  hypnotist, 
although  it  may  have  been  the  hand  of  the 
subject  that  executed  the  deed.  Under  those 
conditions  the  hand  that  performed  the  act 
was  simply  an  instrument  which  acted  in 
response  to  the  free  and  independent  Will  of 
the  hypnotist.  The  intent  and  purpose  which 
resulted  in  the  death  were  those  of  the  hyp- 

27< 


PSYCHIC  EFFECT  OF  SUICIDE 

notist  alone.  For  these  reasons  he  alone  is  re- 
sponsible. There  has  been  no  conscious  pur- 
pose nor  intent  on  the  part  of  the  subject  to 
destroy  himself.  In  truth,  he  is  not  aware  of 
what  he  has  done,  nor  of  what  has  been  done 
to  him,  until  he  awakes  from  the  hypnotic 
trance  upon  the  spiritual  plane. 

So  far  as  the  psychic  effects  are  concerned, 
they  are  precisely  what  they  would  have  been 
if  some  stronger  person  physically  had  placed 
a  dagger  in  the  hand  of  his  victim,  then  closed 
his  hand  over  it  and,  by  the  greater  power  of 
his  own  hand,  had  caused  the  hand  of  the 
victim  to  plunge  the  dagger  into  his  own 
heart.  In  this  case,  as  in  the  other,  the  intent 
and  purpose  to  kill  were  in  the  mind  of  the 
stronger  man  physically.  In  truth,  you  will 
agree  that  there  was  no  suicidal  impulse  or 
purpose  at  all.  It  was  the  impulse  of  murder 
in  the  mind  of  the  stronger  man.  You  can 
see  at  once  that  the  psychic  results  would  be 
those  of  murder,  and  not  those  of  suicide; 
and  they  would  be  the  same  as  those  upon 
one  who  has  been  murdered. 

This  explains  exactly  what  would  be  the 
psychic  results  of  death  under  such  condi- 

277 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

tions.  The  individual  would  pass  into  the 
spiritual  life  as  free  from  suicidal  impulses 
as  he  was  at  the  moment  of  his  physical  death. 

It  is  merely  a  question  of  determining 
whether  death  occurred  as  a  result  of  the  con- 
^ious,  intelligent,  independent  purpose  and 
intent  of  self-destruction  in  the  mind  of  the 
individual  who  thus  died. 

There  can  be  no  responsibility  where  there 
is  no  intelligence,  deliberate  purpose  and  in- 
tent, independence  of  Will,  and  the  concur- 
rent impulse  of  the  Soul.  Hence,  in  the  case 
of  self-destruction  by  one  who  is  insane,  the 
elements  of  responsibility  are  entirely  lack- 
ing, and  the  psychic  and  spiritual  results  are 
exactly  the  same  as  if  the  individual  had  died 
a  natural  death. 

One  phase  of  the  question,  however,  must 
not  be  overlooked.  The  very  condition  of  in- 
sanity itself  is  one  which,  under  certain  con- 
ditions, leaves  the  individual  weakened  both 
spiritually  and  psychically,  for  a  time.  This, 
however,  is  entirely  due  to  the  insane  condi- 
tion, and  immediately  upon  passing  into  the 
spiritual  life,  such  an  individual  turns  to  his 

278 


PSYCHIC  EFFECT  OF  SUICIDE 

task  of  self-development,  and  soon  overcomes 
his  weakened  condition. 

In  the  case  of  one  who  dies  insane  solely 
because  of  physical  conditions — as,  for  in- 
stance, because  of  a  fractured  skull — physical 
death  results  in  almost  instant  recovery.  In 
some  instances  there  may  possibly  result  a 
short  period  of  confusion,  but  this  is  due  to 
other  conditions,  and  not  to  the  physical 
causes  of  the  insanity. 

In  the  separation  of  the  two  bodies,  the 
spiritual  body  sometimes  experiences  a 
greater  attraction  away  from  earth  conditions, 
requiring  a  strong  effort  of  the  Will,  or  even 
outside  help,  to  bring  it  back  into  its  earthly 
environment  again.  This  is  something  which 
depends  upon  the  degree  of  evolutionary  de- 
velopment the  individual  has  attained,  or  the 
Attitude  of  Soul  that  inspires  him  while  out 
of  the  physical  body. 

There  are  many  instances  where  even  tem- 
porary liberation  from  the  physical  body 
would  mean  death,  because  the  individual 
would  refuse  to  return  and  take  up  the  phys- 
ical burden  again.  In  such  cases  it  is  fortu- 
nate for  the  race  that  Nature  has  protected  it 

279 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

against  voluntary  extinction  in  that  way.  It 
is  fortunate  that  the  power  of  voluntary  with- 
drawal from  the  physical  body  is  withheld 
from  the  individual  until  he  has  arrived  at 
an  evolutionary  development  where  his  sense 
of  Personal  Responsibility  protects  him  from 
that  sort  of  suicide. 


280 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 


CREMATION 


The  subject  of  how  best  to  dispose  of  the 
physical  bodies  of  our  dead  is  one  which  has 
commanded  the  thoughtful  consideration  of 
our  advanced  thinkers  throughout  the  past 
ages.  It  is  still  a  subject  of  profound  interest 
to  humanity.  It  has  never  been  determined 
with  sufficient  authority  to  develop  a  method 
that  is  acceptable  to  all  classes  of  society. 
The  methods  employed  are: 

(a)  Interment,  or  burial  of  the  body  in  the 
earth,  where,  in  due  course  of  time,  through 
the  slow  processes  of  Nature,  it  is  gradually 
disintegrated,  dissolved  and  returned  back 
into  the  elements  from  which  it  was  originally 
integrated. 

(b)  A  method  of  burial  in  vacuum  vaults, 
so  cemented  in  stone  caskets  as  to  exclude  all 
possibility  of  air,  or  moisture  in  any  form, 
from  entering  the  casket.  The  idea  seems  to 
be  that  this  method  will  prevent  disintegra- 

281 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

tion  and  keep  the  body  in  a  state  of  preserva- 
tion indefinitely. 

(c)  Cremation,  which  means  any  method 
of  reducing  the  body  to  ashes  through  the 
action  of  heat. 

(d)  The  method  of  embalming  which  re- 
sults in  preserving  the  physical  body,  in  some 
degree  of  perfection,  during  many  thousands 
of  years.  This  method  is  based  upon  certain 
religious  concepts,  which  need  not  be  ex- 
plained at  this  time. 

(e)  Chemical  dissolution,  which  employs 
the  action  of  chemicals  that  cause  very  rapid 
disintegration.  This  method  has  not  become 
general,  as  yet,  upon  the  physical  plane.  The 
process  of  disintegration  by  a  spiritual  chem- 
ical known  to  the  Wise  Men  of  Science  upon 
the  first  spiritual  plane.  Is  far  more  rapid  and 
perfect  than  that  of  cremation  upon  the  phys- 
ical plane;  but  the  purpose  is  the  same, 
namely,  to  resolve  a  discarded  and  useless 
body  back  into  the  elements  from  which  it 
came,  and  thus  give  it  back  to  Nature  for  her 
use  in  other  ways  and  for  other  purposes. 

But  it  is  not  always  that  the  spiritual  body 
is  thus  disintegrated.     Like  the  problem  of 

282 


CREMATION 

disposing  of  the  physical  body  after  death,  it 
is  held  to  be,  more  or  less,  under  the  control 
or  direction  or  disposition  of  its  former 
owner.  However,  it  would  be  for  the  best 
good  if  immediate  dissolution  and  disintegra- 
tion were  required  in  all  cases. 

There  are  those  on  the  first  spiritual  plane 
who  are  inclined  to  take  possession  of  these 
undissolved  bodies,  and  they  often  use  them  in 
ways  which  do  not  appear  to  be  altogether 
honest  or  good.  For  instance,  a  number  of 
those  who  are  engaged  in  controlling  a  me- 
dium on  the  physical  plane,  can  make  use  of 
one  of  these  discarded  spiritual  bodies  in  such 
manner  as  to  make  it  luminous,  and  bring  it 
within  the  spiritual  vision  of  the  medium. 
Sometimes  they  can  even  clothe  it  with  suffi- 
cient magnetism  from  the  magnetic  field 
to  bring  it  within  the  vision  of  those  upon  the 
earth  plane  who  are  attending  the  seance. 
Those  upon  the  physical  plane,  however,  can- 
not tell  whether  it  is  alive  or  not.  Naturally, 
they  take  it  for  granted  that  it  is  a  living  indi- 
vidual upon  the  spiritual  plane.  For  this 
reason,  it  may  be  used  by  unscrupulous  spir- 
itual people  to  deceive  those  who  constitute 

283 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  more  credulous  physical  sitters  in  any 
seance  of  that  nature.  Thus,  they  may  be 
made  to  believe  they  have  actually  seen  the 
ex-carnate  individual  who  formerly  inhabited 
the  body,  when  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the  indi- 
vidual may  be  upon  a  higher  plane  of  life  far 
away  at  the  time.  From  this  you  will  ob- 
serve that  there  are  those  on  the  spiritual 
plane  who  do  not  hesitate  to  practice  legerde- 
main and  deceptions  upon  those  on  the  lower 
planes  of  life. 

Taking  all  things  into  account,  Cremation 
is  the  method  approved  by  the  Great  Masters 
and  Spiritual  Wise  Men.  The  chemical 
method,  however,  is  even  more  rapid  in  its 
disintegrating  results  than  is  the  action  of 
fire;  but  this  method  is  not  understood  by  our 
physical  scientists,  as  yet,  and  it  involves  the 
action  of  elements  which  would  put  into  the 
hands  of  the  unscrupulous  both  the  power 
and  temptation  to  do  great  harm.  Hence, 
this  particular  chemical  formulary  has  been 
withheld  from  scientists  of  the  earth  plane, 
and  will  not  be  divulged  to  them  until  all 
doubt  as  to  the  wisdom  of  so  doing  has  been 
overcome. 

314 


CREMATION 

At  present,  therefore,  Cremation  is  the 
quickest  and  safest  method  of  disintegrating 
the  physical  bodies  of  the  dead,  and  resolving 
them  back  into  the  natural  elements  from 
which  they  come. 

One  of  the  express  purposes  accomplished 
by  cremation  is  to  destroy  entirely  all  mag- 
netic conditions  which  might,  under  any  cir- 
cumstances, constitute  sufficient  attraction  for 
the  spiritual  body  to  hold  the  Soul  in  an 
earth-bound  condition.  The  action  of  fire  dis- 
solves and  dissipates  all  magnetism  of  the 
physical  body. 

One  point  may  not  be  entirely  clear  con- 
cerning the  magnetic  efifect  of  the  physical 
body,  after  death,  upon  the  spiritual.  So  long 
as  the  physical  body  remains  intact  it  holds 
within  itself  sufficient  magnetism  to  constitute 
some  degree  of  attraction  for  the  spiritual. 
The  degree  and  power  of  this  attraction  de- 
pend upon  a  number  of  conditions,  but  more 
especially  upon  the  degree  of  evolutionary 
unfoldment  to  which  the  individual  had  at- 
tained at  the  time  of  his  death.  If  the  indi- 
vidual is  of  the  "earth  earthy,"  low  in  point 
of  intelligence,  on  the  lower  rounds  of  evolu- 

285 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

tionary  development,  devoid  of  spirituality 
and  morality,  the  attraction  of  the  physical 
body  will  be  correspondingly  strong.  The 
converse  of  this  is  equally  true.  If  the  indi- 
vidual has  attained  to  a  high  degree  of  spirit- 
uality, intelligence,  morality  and  evolutionary 
refinement,  the  attraction  of  the  physical 
body  will  be  correspondingly  weak. 

The  particular  point  it  is  desired  to  make 
clear  in  this  connection  is  this:  No  matter 
what  may  be  the  evolutionary  status  of  the 
individual  at  death,  whether  low  or  high,  the 
magnetic  attraction  of  the  physical  body  does 
not,  in  any  manner,  make  the  liberated  indi- 
vidual sensitive  to  anything  that  may  occur 
to  the  physical  body.  In  other  words,  the 
sense  channels  are  closed  between  the  phys- 
ical body  and  the  intelligent  Soul  of  the  indi- 
vidual at  the  instant  the  separation  called 
"death"  is  complete.  Beyond  that  point  the 
physical  body  may  be  subjected  to  any  treat- 
ment whatsoever  without  pain  or  suffering  to 
the  liberated  Soul,  even  though  the  magnetic 
bond  of  attraction  may  exist  until  the  dissolu- 
tion of  the  physical  body  is  complete  and  its 
particles  resolved  back  into  their  original  ele- 

286 


CREMATION 

ments.  This  may  serve  to  make  more  clear 
why  it  is  that  Cremation,  however  soon  after 
physical  death,  does  not  involve  pain  or  suf- 
fering of  any  kind  whatsoever  to  the  liberated 
Soul  of  the  deceased. 

Conforming  strictly  to  the  science  of  the 
subject,  the  moment  death  occurs  and  the  sep- 
aration of  the  two  bodies  is  complete,  the 
liberated  individual  is  not  in  any  manner  or 
degree  sensitive  to  any  processes  which  afifect 
the  physical  body.  The  instant  the  physical 
channels  of  sense  are  closed — which  is  true 
almost  the  instant  physical  death  occurs,  and 
oftentimes  equally  true  before  actual  separa- 
tion is  complete  —  the  liberated  soul  in  its 
spiritual  body  is  completely  out  of  touch,  as 
it  were,  with  the  physical  body,  and  com- 
pletely liberated  from  all  sensations  through 
its  sense  channels. 

Cremation  may  take  place  at  any  time  after 
complete  separation  of  the  physical  and  the 
spiritual  bodies  of  the  individual  has  oc- 
curred; and  this  separation  occurs  within  one 
minute,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  after 
the  last  physical  breath  and  physical  heart- 

287 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

beat — except  where  cataleptic  coma  exists,  as 
previously  explained. 

Through  the  teachings  of  certain  occult 
societies  of  earth,  there  has  come  to  be  a  well- 
defined  notion  that  where  Cremation  is  em- 
ployed it  should  never  be  used  until  at  least 
three  days  {72  hours)  have  elapsed  after  ac- 
tual death  has  occurred.  By  the  representa- 
tives of  such  societies,  it  is  asserted  that  Cre- 
mation before  that  time  has  elapsed  results  in 
the  most  intense  pain  and  suffering  to  the 
"dead."  The  writer  is  aware  of  the  fact  that 
such  ideas  exist  on  the  part  of  certain  occult 
teachers  upon  the  physical  plane.  He  is  glad, 
however,  to  be  in  position  to  state,  with  abso- 
lute certainty,  that  there  is  no  foundation  in 
fact  whatsoever  to  sustain  such  teachings.  It 
has  been  the  privilege  of  the  writer,  through 
the  channels  of  his  spiritual  senses,  to  witness 
a  number  of  cremations.  He  has  been  with 
the  liberated  "dead"  during  the  process  of 
cremation.  Therefore,  the  earlier  Cremation 
occurs  after  physical  death,  the  better  it  is  for 
all  interests  involved  on  both  planes  of  life. 

Naturally  this  is  a  subject  concerning  which 
human  sentiment  exerts  a  very  strong  influ- 

288 


CREMATION 

ence.  The  mere  thought  of  placing  the  body 
of  a  loved  one  into  the  fire  and  reducing  it  to 
ashes  seems  to  be  exceedingly  repulsive  to 
many  intelligent  and  good  people.  They 
know  the  destructive  nature  of  fire,  and  al- 
most inevitably  they  associate  it  with  the  most 
intense  pain  and  suffering.  For  this  reason  it 
is  impossible,  as  yet,  to  obtain  the  sanction  of 
many  who  would  approve  without  an  instant's 
hesitation,  but  for  the  sentiment  which  rebels 
at  the  use  of  fire  in  disposing  of  the  physical 
body  of  one  they  have  loved.  The  human 
mind  refuses  to  grasp  the  fact  that  the  intelli- 
gent Soul  which  occupied  the  body  before 
physical  death  is  no  longer  associated  with  it 
in  any  sense.  And  with  these  sentiments  we 
must  be  charitable,  for  they  have  their  root 
and  foundation  in  the  love-nature  of  man- 
kind. 

On  the  other  hand,  can  there  be  anything 
more  repulsive  than  the  thought  that  the  body 
of  a  loved  one  is  lying  in  the  ground,  slowly 
disintegrating,  and  is  being  eaten  by  the 
worms  of  the  earth?  It  would  seem  that  the 
sentiment  which  would  reject  Cremation 
would  even  more  strongly  and  emphatically 

289 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

reject  this  method  of  burial.  But  there  is  no 
accounting  for  the  vagaries  of  the  human 
Soul.  It  does  not  seem  to  be  bound  by  any 
law  of  consistency. 

Disinterments  of  physical  bodies  of  the 
dead  have  proven,  beyond  all  question,  that 
a  startling  percentage  of  the  supposedly  dead 
have  only  been  buried  alive.  This  is  due  to 
the  fact  that  there  are  certain  psychic  condi- 
tions, such  as  catalepsy,  and  certain  forms  of 
trance  (through  the  process  of  hypnosis  and 
mediumistic  control)  which  so  closely  re- 
semble physical  death  that  none  but  the  most 
expert  scientist  would  be  able  to  differentiate 
between  them  and  actual  physical  death. 

This  condition  not  infrequently  occurs  in 
cases  of  slow,  lingering  illness,  whereby  the 
vitality  of  the  individual  is  gradually  de- 
pleted. The  individual  falls  into  a  state  of 
profound  coma  and  is  believed  to  be  dead. 

It  is  not  a  pleasant  thing  to  contemplate 
the  experiences  of  such  of  these  as  may  regain 
consciousness  after  burial,  only  to  die  of  suf- 
focation. 

The  problem,  as  a  whole,  is  both  complex 
and  subtle.    It  reaches  in  so  many  directions 

290 


CREMATION 

and  touches  so  many  conflicting  interests  that 
its  complete  solution  should  be  entrusted  to 
those  only  whose  intelligence,  judgment  and 
moral  concepts  are  of  the  most  exalted 
character. 

Cremation  prevents  burial  alive. 

It  is  by  far  the  most  sanitary  method. 

It  involves  least  risk  of  spreading  disease 
among  the  living. 

It  is  clean  and  wholesome  in  every  respect. 

Wherever  magnetic  conditions  might  have 
any  tendency  to  bind  the  liberated  Soul  to 
earthly  conditions  more  closely  —  which  is 
true  in  a  very  large  percentage  of  those  who 
die — Cremation  destroys  that  magnetic  bond 
from  the  physical  side  and  liberates  the  Soul 
at  once  from  all  physical  attraction  of  earth. 
This  enables  the  Soul  to  proceed  at  once  out 
of  the  magnetic  field,  into  the  first  spiritual 
plane,  and  there  to  enter  immediately  upon 
its  evolutionary  pathway  and  take  up  the  lines 
of  its  constructive  work  among  those  who  are 
ready  to  be  of  service  in  every  way  possible. 

As  to  the  best  method  of  disposing  of  the 
ashes  of  a  cremated  body,  this  is  wholly  a 
matter  of  individual  choice.    If  the  deceased 

291 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

has  expressed  any  wish  in  the  matter  before 
his  death,  it  would  seem  that  such  request 
would  be  held  binding — unless  there  are  con- 
ditions which  make  it  either  impossible  or 
gravely  inexpedient.  But  if  no  such  request 
has  been  made  by  the  deceased,  and  sentimen- 
tal reasons  do  not  intervene,  the  ashes  may  be 
scattered  either  upon  the  earth  or  on  the 
water.  There  can  be  no  objection  to  either 
disposition,  insofar  as  science  and  the  welfare 
of  humanity  are  concerned. 

The  embalming  process  does  not  dissipate 
the  animal  magnetism  of  the  physical  body. 
In  truth,  it  arrests,  to  some  extent,  the  disinte- 
gration and  dissipation  of  the  magnetic  forces 
and  conditions  of  the  physical  body  and  thus 
preserves,  in  some  measure,  the  chain  of  at- 
traction between  the  two  bodies  so  long  as  this 
condition  continues.  But  it  does  not  bind  the 
spiritual  and  the  physical  bodies  together  in 
that  bond  of  association  which  obtains  during 
the  continuance  of  physical  life. 

In  the  very  largest  number  of  instances  it 
serves  to  establish,  or  preserve,  the  magnetic 
attraction  between  the  two  bodies,  to  such  an 
extent  as  to  constitute — while  the  attraction 

292 


CREMATION 

lasts — a  real  and  definite  hindrance  to  the  per- 
fect freedom  of  the  spiritual  body  in  its  action 
upon  the  spiritual  planes.  Wherever  the  in- 
dividual may  go — after  physical  death,  in 
such  cases — he  is  always  conscious — while  the 
magnetic  condition  lasts — that  there  is  a  defi- 
nite bond  of  attraction  which,  to  some  extent, 
hampers  his  spiritual  freedom  of  action. 

In  many  cases — especially  where  th-e  indi- 
vidual is  of  the  undeveloped  type,  or  one 
whose  life  upon  the  physical  plane  has  been 
destructive,  or  has  intensified  the  bond  of  his 
physical  gravity — this  magnetic  bond  be- 
tween the  embalmed  physical  body  and  the 
liberated  spiritual  body  is  sufficiently  strong 
to  bind  him  very  definitely  within  a  certain 
radius  of  action  from  his  physical  body.  Such 
individuals,  while  thus  bound,  are  known  as 
"Earth-bound  Souls."  This  means  that  they 
are  definitely  bound  to  the  earth  plane  by  the 
magnetic  bond  of  attraction  between  the  two 
bodies,  until  the  magnetic  tie  has  been  worn 
out,  dissipated,  or  broken  and  overcome  by 
the  individual  himself. 


293 


CHAPTER  XXIX 


MOURNING 


Out  of  the  experience  back  of  the  scientific 
knowledge  covered  by  this  volume,  supple- 
mented by  many  added  experiences  that  have 
followed  them,  one  vital  lesson  stands  out 
upon  the  trestle-board  of  individual  con- 
sciousness in  letters  of  living  fire.  This  refers 
to  that  which,  from  habit,  has  become  a  sort 
of  "social  custom"  in  so-called  civilized 
countries  and  communities,  namely,  the  cus- 
tom of  publicly  mourning  for  our  dead. 

Unless  the  signs  of  the  times,  as  well  as  the 
motives  of  mankind,  have  been  entirely  mis- 
interpreted, it  would  seem  there  is  no  single 
phase  of  this  earthly  life  wherein  we  and  our 
fellows,  generally  speaking,  display  such 
glaring  and  puerile  inconsistencies,  as  in  the 
attitude  we  have  been  accustomed  to  assume 
concerning  our  dead.  This  is  more  especially 
true  in  the  lives  of  those  of  us  who  have  either 
definite  personal  knowledge  of,  or  an  abiding 

295 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

faith  in,  the  continuity  of  individual  life  be- 
yond the  incidental  event  we  call  physical 
death.  And,  though  it  is  said  with  reluctance 
and  humility,  all  this  seems  to  be  more  espe- 
cially true  with  reference  to  those  of  us  who 
presume  to  call  ourselves  "Christians,"  and 
who  thereby  accept  the  benefits  of  the  sacri- 
ficial oflfering,  made  for  our  especial  benefit 
upon  the  Cross  of  Calvary,  in  the  ancient  days 
of  Herod,  the  King. 

The  Master  Jesus,  it  was,  who  taught  us 
the  great  scientific  fact  of  life  beyond  the 
grave.  He  it  was  who  held  up  to  our  mental 
vision  the  beauties,  the  glories  and  the  splen- 
dors of  that  life — to  those  who  follow  His 
teachings  and  example.  He  it  was  who  volun- 
tarily promised  that  He  would  go  to  prepare 
a  place  for  us  in  the  house  of  the  Father — 
that  "House  Not  Made  with  Hands,  Eternal 
in  the  Heavens."  It  was  He,  therefore,  who 
taught  us  that  death  is  but  an  incident  in  Life 
— that  it  means  but  a  liberation  from  physical 
suffering  and  bondage,  and  a  share  with  Him 
in  the  greater  glory  of  a  more  perfect  life. 

To  one  who  has  a  personal  and  definite 
knowledge  of  the  great  fact  of  Nature,  that 

296 


MOURNING 

physical  death  is  but  a  beneficent  evolution- 
ary transition — a  mere  passing  event  in  the 
continuity  of  individual  life — there  can  be 
nothing  whatsoever  in  the  incident  for  which 
to  mourn — any  more  than  there  should  be  in 
the  departure  of  our  loved  ones  to  enjoy  them- 
selves in  the  more  delectable  climate  and 
social  conditions  of  some  foreign  country 
whence  we  know  they  may  never  return  to  us 
in  this  life.  We  all  will  agree  that  in  such 
cases  there  is  not  the  least  occasion  for  putting 
on  the  black  vestments  of  unconsolable  grief, 
or  the  sombre  habiliments  of  hopeless  mourn- 
ing and  sorrow.  Neither  is  there  the  slightest 
occasion  for  real  grief  or  mourning  in  the 
simple  and  altogether  natural  fact  that  some 
of  our  loved  ones  have  gone  forward  a  little 
ahead  of  us  to  the  "Celestial  City  of  Sarras" 
— the  City  of  the  Soul — there  to  enjoy  its 
beauties  and  its  glories  and  to  await  our 
coming. 

In  truth,  when  the  real  meaning  and  pur- 
pose of  physical  death  are  known  and  under- 
stood, and  its  beneficent  mission  is  accepted  as 
a  part  of  Nature's  unalterable  plan,  consist- 
ency demands  that  there  should  be  nothing 

297 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

but  sincere  and  unselfish  joy  in  our  hearts 
when  we  say  "Godspeed"  to  one  who  is  leav- 
ing us,  only  for  a  time,  to  enter  upon  the  pro- 
gressive journey  through  a  more  exalted  and 
perfect  state  of  being  upon  the  spiritual  planes 
of  life.  This,  in  truth,  is  the  view  of  every 
individual  who  knows  from  personal  experi- 
ence that  our  passage  through  the  "Valley  of 
the  Shadow"  is  but  the  beginning  of  a  more 
glorious  journey  which  leads  onward  and  up- 
ward into  the  Light  of  a  more  exalted  spirit- 
ual Life  Beyond.  And  it  is  but  the  logic  of 
''Consistency/' 

It  would  also  appear,  in  all  humility,  that 
this  same  logic  should  apply,  with  equal 
force,  to  the  consistent  followers  of  the  Naza- 
rene,  whatever  doctrinal  creed  they  may  ac- 
cept, or  to  whatever  denominational  church 
they  may  belong — provided  they,  in  truth  and 
sincerity,  accept  His  teaching  and  conform 
their  lives  thereto.  For,  there  is  nothing  in 
true  Christianity — when  intelligently  under- 
stood— to  justify  its  disciples  and  devotees  in 
making  any  public  display  of  their  sorrow 
over  the  death  of  even  their  most  loved  and 
trusted  companions  of  earth,  nor  to  warrant 


MOURNING 

them  in  publicly,  or  even  privately,  indulging 
themselves  in  grief  or  sorrow  at  all  over  such 
an  event.  While  it  is  true  that,  to  those  whose 
spiritual  senses  and  powers  are  dormant,  there 
is  at  least  an  apparent  separation,  for  the  time, 
and  the  natural  loneliness  which  such  a  sepa- 
ration necessarily  involves;  nevertheless,  any 
definite  and  satisfying  Faith  or  belief  in  a  life 
after  physical  death,  should  sustain  those  who 
possess  it,  against  all  purely  selfish  grief  or 
sorrow  which  would  advertise  such  a  tempo- 
rary separation  to  the  world  at  large  as  a 
tragic  ''loss/' 

To  be  able  personally  to  witness  just  one 
transition  of  a  loved  one  who  is  ready  to  go, 
it  would  seem,  should  inspire  only  the  most 
profound  joy  and  gratitude  in  the  hearts  of 
those  who  remain  behind.  At  any  rate,  this  is 
just  what  it  has  meant  to  the  author;  and  not 
for  one  single  moment  has  he  ever  wished 
any  loved  one  of  earth  back  in  this  physical 
life  again  to  take  his  or  her  place  with  him 
once  more,  as  of  old.  Indeed,  it  would  grieve 
him  far  more  to  see  them  back  among  us  on 
this  physical  side  of  life,  knowing  they  must 
endure  the  suflFering  incident  thereto,  than  it 

299 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

did  to  see  them  pass  through  the  gateway  of 
death  and  enter  triumphantly  into  the  life  of 
the  spiritual  World  Beyond. 

Then,  again,  virtually  every  genuine  mes- 
sage that  has  ever  come  back  to  earth  from 
beyond  the  dark  valley,  concerning  this  sub- 
ject, has  emphasized  the  fact  that  all  selfish 
grief  and  sorrow  of  the  inhabitants  of  earth, 
over  the  death  of  their  loved  ones,  only  dis- 
tresses those  who  have  passed  on  into  the  spir- 
itual life,  and  constitutes  a  real  burden  which 
holds  them  upon  the  lower  planes  of  spiritual 
life — so  long  as  it  exists. 

The  grief  of  an  earthly  husband  for  a  spir- 
itual wife,  or  that  of  an  earthly  mother  for 
her  spiritual  child,  binds  the  one  in  spiritual 
life  to  the  plane  of  earth  by  a  magnetic  bond 
which  few  in  that  life  are  able  to  overcome. 
The  bond  of  sympathy  for  sorrow  is  one  of 
the  strongest  ties  of  the  Soul.  The  efforts  of 
those  upon  the  plane  of  earth  to  communicate 
with  those  upon  the  planes  of  spiritual  life 
fixes  and  holds  the  attention  of  those  in  the 
spiritual  life  upon  the  plane  and  conditions  of 
physical  life  and  physical  things.  This  has 
the  inevitable  eflPect  of  retarding  the  growth 

300 


MOURNING 

of  the  Soul  and  interfering  with  the  other- 
wise normal  progress  in  spiritual  life  and  in 
the  spiritual  realms.  Therefore,  from  the 
viewpoint  of  spiritual  life,  evolution  and 
progress,  this  problem  raises  and  involves  a 
vital  question  of  Morality  and  Personal  Re- 
sponsibility— especially  with  all  who  under- 
stand the  Law. 

To  be  sure,  if  we  have  neglected  or  abused 
those  whom  the  Infinite  Father  has  given  into 
our  keeping  and  care  in  this  life  of  earth — or 
if  we  have  failed  in  our  responsibility  to  them, 
and  they  have  passed  on — then  the  agony  of 
remorse  and  repentance  should  gnaw  at  our 
vitals  until  we  are  permitted  to  follow  them 
and  make  due  recompense.  In  that  case  it 
seems  not  only  proper,  but  eminently  just, 
that  we  should  grieve  and  mourn — in  sack- 
cloth and  ashes,  if  necessary — so  long  as  we 
continue  to  live  upon  earth;  but  not  other- 
wise. Even  so,  our  grief  should  be  a  thing 
too  sacred  to  parade  before  the  gaping  and 
curious  public. 

If  the  historic  narrative  of  the  personal  life 
and  experiences  of  the  author  would  serve  to 
inspire  his  readers  with  a  better  understand- 

301 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ing  and  a  more  wholesome  appreciation  of 
the  real  meaning  and  purpose  of  physical 
death,  and  lift  from  their  souls  the  burden  of 
selfish  sorrow  and  agony  over  the  supposed 
"loss"  of  their  loved  ones,  he  would  deem  it 
a  duty  and  a  privilege  to  take  the  public  into 
the  Sanctum  Sanctorum  of  his  own  Soul  and 
there  uncover  the  most  intimate  and  "tragic" 
experiences  of  his  earthly  life. 

He  is  thoroughly  convinced  that  the  time 
will  come  when  the  great  fact  of  the  contin- 
uity of  individual  life,  and  the  knowledge 
that  death  is  but  an  incident  in  the  evolution- 
ary life  of  the  Soul,  will  be  so  universal  upon 
the  earth  plane  that  sorrowing  for  the  "dead" 
will  become  a  thing  of  the  past  and  that  phys- 
ical death,  for  the  most  part,  will  be  accepted 
only  as  a  consistent  liberation  from  the  bond- 
age of  earth  life — to  all  who  make  an  honest 
and  earnest  effort  to  know  the  Law  of  Life 
and  to  Live  it. 

Just  what  this  can  mean  to  those  who  pass 
into  the  other  life  from  normally  wholesome 
conditions  may  well  be  suggested  by  the  ex- 
perience of  a  dear  friend  who  passed  on  into 
the  spiritual  life  only  a  few  years  ago.    She 

302 


MOURNING 

was  a  natural  psychic,  of  splendid  intellectual 
attainments,  a  fine  education  and  a  heart  of 
gold.  The  spiritual  life  was  almost  as  fa- 
miliar to  her — even  before  her  death — as  this 
physical  life.  The  association  between  her 
and  the  author  in  this  physical  life  has  contin- 
ued without  interruption  since  she  passed  on 
into  the  spiritual  life. 

From  the  day  she  entered  through  the  Val- 
ley of  the  Shadow  of  Death,  into  the  spiritual 
life,  her  experience  was  one  of  unalloyed 
peace,  contentment  and  happiness.  And  this 
was  chiefly  because  she  knew  that  those  who 
remained  behind  understood  that  she  was  not 
"lost"  to  them  in  any  sense,  but  simply  wait- 
ing until  she  should  be  able  to  receive  them 
into  that  life  after  their  liberation  from  this. 

She  was  not  grieved  because  of  her  inability 
to  reach  her  friends  and  make  them  know  she 
was  as  truly  with  them  and  of  them  as  she 
was  when  she  was  still  in  the  physical  body. 
She  knew  that  they  understood.  She  also 
knew  that  she  was  at  perfect  liberty  to  de- 
vote herself  to  whatever  might  contribute  to 
her  own  spiritual  development,  or  increase 
her  power  to  serve  those  who  might  be  in 

303 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

need  of  the  help  that  she  could  give.    And 
that  is  exactly  what  she  did. 

Almost  immediately  upon  her  entrance  into 
the  higher  life  she  was  admitted  into  the  fel- 
lowship of  the  Border-Land  Workers  who 
devote  themselves  to  helping  those  who  pass 
out  of  this  life  under  conditions  which  render 
them  comparatively  helpless,  for  a  time,  in 
that  life.  She  was  very  happy  in  her  work, 
and  often  she  came  to  her  friend  to  tell  him 
of  her  interesting  experiences,  of  the  wonder- 
ful work  her  companions  and  fellows  were 
doing,  and  of  the  joy  they  all  derived  from 
the  mutual  results  of  their  labors. 

She  was  continually  reminded,  by  the  ex- 
perience of  those  in  the  spiritual  life,  that  the 
deepest  sorrow  and  distress  which  can  come 
to  the  vast  majority  of  those  in  that  life  arise 
out  of  the  fact  that  they  cannot  make  their 
presence  known  to  those  upon  the  earth  plane 
who  love  them  and  grieve  over  their  death. 

A  part  of  her  time  and  effort,  therefore, 
was  devoted  to  those  about  her  who  needed 
comforting  and  helping  until  they  could  ad- 
just themselves  to  the  new  conditions  of  life 
in    which   they   found    themselves.    Among 

S04 


MOURNING 

these  she  became  a  powerful  educator,  teach- 
ing them  the  meaning  and  the  purpose  of 
physical  death,  and  helping  them  to  under- 
stand the  responsibilities  resting  upon  them 
to  take  up  the  new  life  in  a  right  attitude  of 
soul  and  fit  themselves  for  some  beneficent 
service. 

Through  this  experience,  as  one  of  the  Spir- 
itual Teachers  and  Helpers,  she  came  to  real- 
ize what  a  blessing  had  been  bestowed  upon 
her  in  the  fact  that  her  relatives  and  friends 
upon  the  earth  plane  had  never  grieved  nor 
mourned  over  her  death.  Thus  they  had  lib- 
erated her  from  every  unhappy  tie  which 
bound  her  to  earth's  conditions.  But  for  this 
fact,  she  also  might  have  been  one  of  the 
'^earth-bound,"  until  time  and  properly 
directed  effort  alone  had  lifted  the  burden 
from  her  and  had  liberated  her  from  a  cruel 
bondage  of  grief  into  which  so  many  pass 
from  earth  life. 

One  who  has  lived  the  life  of  an  independ- 
ent psychic  on  earth  for  many  years  is  often 
oppressed  by  the  realization  of  his  inability 
to  impress  the  vital  nature  of  this  problem 
upon    those    who    are    unable    to  penetrate 

305 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

through  the  veil  of  earth  and  see  for  them- 
selves how  real  and  how  intense  is  the  suffer- 
ing of  those  upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life 
who  cannot  console  those  upon  the  earth  who 
grieve  for  them  in  ignorance  of  their  presence 
and  of  the  conditions  of  their  life  upon  the 
spiritual  plane.  It  is  one  of  those  things 
which  cannot  be  understood  nor  appreciated, 
except  through  the  personal  experience.  Alas, 
how  few  there  are  who  have  that! 

It  may  be,  however,  that  what  has  been  said 
will  be  sufficient  to  set  in  motion  a  wholesome 
impulse  to  reason  the  problem  out.  If  so, 
this  effort  will  not  have  been  in  vain;  for  no 
man  can  use  his  intelligence  upon  the  subject 
without  arriving  at  an  approximate  knowl- 
edge of  the  truth.  Once  the  matter  becomes 
clear  to  the  intelligent  thinker,  the  problem 
of  "death"  assumes  an  entirely  different  as- 
pect, and  becomes  one  of  Nature's  beneficent 
provisions  by  and  through  which  the  Soul  of 
man  moves  forward  to  its  individual  evolu- 
tionary destiny. 

This  does  not  mean  that  we  should  court 
death,  nor  seek  to  shorten  the  span  of  this 
earthly  life.    On  the  contrary,  there  can  be 

S06 


\ 


MOURNING 

no  doubt  that  Nature  charges  each  of  us  with 
the  duty  and  the  responsibility  of  rounding 
out  this  physical  life  as  fully  and  as  com- 
pletely as  possible,  so  that  we  may  enter  upon 
the  spiritual  life  as  free  as  may  be  from  the 
drag  of  unfulfilled  duties  and  undischarged 
responsibilities.  The  great  Law  of  Continuity 
throws  the  arms  of  its  protecting  care  over 
us  all — both  here  and  hereafter.  Let  us  ac- 
cept cheerfully  its  responsibilities  and  cheer- 
fully discharge  our  duties  thereunder;  for 
then  only  may  we  enjoy,  in  fullest  measure, 
its  inevitable  and  beneficent  reward.  Let  us 
put  away  forever  the  somber  habiliments  of 
mourning — which  only  serve  to  advertise  our 
ignorance,  our  selfishness  and  our  incon- 
sistency. 


307 


CHAPTER  XXX 


REINCARNATION 


Reincarnation  is  one  of  the  mooted  ques- 
tions, even  upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life. 
It  is  doubtful  if  this  is  a  question  that  can 
be  answered  definitely,  and  with  scientific 
certainty,  by  any  individual  who  has  not  yet 
attained  to  the  Celestial  Planes  of  life,  in  the 
course  of  his  Evolutionary  Unfoldment  and 
Growth.  The  writer  has  asked  the  same  ques- 
tion of  his  own  Great  Teacher,  and  even  of 
some  of  the  Great  Masters  upon  the  Celestial 
Planes  of  life.  Those  in  the  terrestrial  planes 
universally  respond  that  they  do  not  know, 
of  their  own  definite  and  personal  experience, 
whether  Reincarnation  is  a  fact  of  Nature  or 
not.  Some  of  them  say  very  frankly  they  be- 
lieve it  is  true,  in  that  it  is  only  one  method 
of  accounting  for  the  many  apparent  inequal- 
ities of  Individual  Life  and  Development. 

Those  who  have  passed  into  the  Celestial 
Realms,    however,    respond    with    assurance 

309 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

upon  the  subject.  They  declare,  without 
reservation,  that  Reincarnation  is  one  of  the 
great  facts  of  Nature,  and  that  in  due  course 
of  his  development,  each  and  every  individ- 
ual will  arrive  at  a  point  in  his  spiritual  un- 
foldment  when  and  where  he  will  come  into 
a  definite  and  personal  knowledge  of  the 
facts. 

While  the  writer  does  not  absolutely  know, 
from  conscious  personal  experience,  that  Re- 
incarnation is  a  fact  of  Nature,  he  has  the 
definite  and  unqualified  assurance  of  the 
Great  Spiritual  Teachers  who  are  vastly 
wiser  than  he,  that  it  is  not  only  true,  but 
that  it  is  one  of  the  greatest  of  the  Great 
Truths  of  Nature,  and  that  the  time  will 
come  when  all  shall  be  able  to  speak  from 
personal  experience. 

In  the  meantime,  permit  the  writer  to  say, 
with  all  seriousness,  that  he  believes  in  the 
truth  of  Reincarnation;  because  it  seems  te 
him  to  be  in  perfect  harmony  with  all  we 
know  of  individual  human  evolution  upon 
this  physical  plane  of  earth.  In  addition  to 
this,  it  seems  to  him  to  explain  much  that 
otherwise  would  appear  to  suggest  that  Na- 

310 


REINCARNATION 

ture  is  unjust  in  her  dealings  with  her  chil- 
dren. This  latter,  to  him,  is  the  grossest 
libel  or  slander  that  any  human  being  could 
utter  against  the  Mother  of  his  own  being — 
Mother  Nature. 

Insofar  as  he  has  progressed  in  his  evolu- 
tionary journey,  he  has  found  that  Nature  is 
not  only  consistent,  but  just  in  all  her  deal- 
ings with  mankind,  as  well  as  with  individual 
life  in  every  form. 

When  we  come  face  to  face  with  the  in- 
finite shades  and  degrees  of  "inequality" 
which  exist  in  the  individuals  of  each  and  all 
of  the  several  races  of  mankind  upon  the 
earth,  we  realize  that  the  only  means  by 
which  Nature  herself  could  possibly  avoid 
the  charge  of  ''injustice/'  is  in  the  fact  that 
these  infinite  variations  and  apparent  inequal- 
ities but  express  the  different  evolutionary 
rounds  to  which  the  individuals  have  attained 
through  the  process  of  Reincarnation. 

Indeed,  there  is  no  other  solution  of  this 
apparently  infinite  inequality  of  Nature  that 
will  satisfy  the  demands  of  eternal  Justice. 
And  Reincarnation  does   account  for  every 

311 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

degree  and  shade  of  seeming  inequality,  not 
only  among  the  several  races  of  the  human 
family,  but  also  among  the  individuals  con- 
stituting the  several  races. 

The  Great  Friends  never  cease  to  remind 
us  of  the  profound  fundamental  fact  that 
Nature  is  always,  and  under  all  conditions 
and  circumstances,  JUST. 

While  this  is  a  fundamental  key,  they  tell 
us  that  whenever  and  wherever  we  discover 
in  Nature  that  which  appears  to  express  in- 
equity, inequality  or  injustice,  the  very  fact 
that  it  so  appears  to  us  must  be  taken  as  evi- 
dence positive  and  conclusive,  that  we  have 
seen  but  a  superficial  view  of  the  Great  Eter- 
nal Plan.  It  is  our  business,  then,  to  go  back 
over  the  course  we  have  traveled  until  we 
find  the  point  at  which  we  diverged  from  the 
main  road  and  took  to  the  by-path  of  fallacy. 
When  we  have  searched  long  enough  and 
with  sufficient  diligence  and  perseverance, 
we  will  surely  find  the  door  of  knowledge 
into  which  our  key  will  fit  perfectly.  And 
when  we  have  inserted  the  key,  turned  the 
knob  and  opened  the  door,  we  inevitably  will 
find  the  reward  of  all  our  labors  in  the  scien- 

S12 


REINCARNATION 

tific  proofs  we  demand  to  establish  the  con- 
sistency and  the  justice  of  Nature  in  all  her 
works. 

They  tell  us  that,  except  for  this  grand, 
equalizing  process  of  Nature,  the  statement 
that  ''all  men  are  created  equal"  would  have 
no  possible  basis  in  fact.  They  point  to  the 
further  fact  that  there  is  an  inequality,  patent 
to  all  mankind,  in  the  several  races  of  the 
human  family,  as  they  appear  upon  the  earth 
plane  of  life.  The  very  fact  that  we  have  a 
black  race,  a  brown  race,  a  red  race,  a  yellow 
race  and  a  white  race  proves,  by  the  Law  of 
Color  alone,  that  we  have  at  least  four  dis- 
tinct races  of  humanity  as  unequal  as  are  the 
several  colors  by  which  Nature  has  seen  fit 
to  distinguish  their  status.  By  the  broadest 
concept  of  which  the  mind  is  capable  it  is 
utterly  impossible  to  make  the  infant  of  the 
black  race  equal  to  the  infant  of  the  brown 
race;  more  impossible  is  it  to  make  him  equal 
to  the  infant  of  the  red  race  at  the  time  of  his 
birth  into  the  physical  life;  still  more  im- 
possible is  it  to  conceive  an  equality  between 
the  infant  of  the  black  race  and  the  infant  of 
the  yellow  race  at  the  time  of   their  birth 

313 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

upon  the  earth's  plane;  and  this  inequality 
reaches  its  maximum  when  we  compare  the 
infant  of  the  black  race  with  the  infant  of 
the  white  race  at  the  time  they  make  their 
appearance  upon  the  earth.  This  is  absolutely 
proven  by  the  Law  of  Spiritual  Evolution, 
by  which  the  various  shades  of  color,  run- 
ning all  the  way  from  black  (the  lowest)  to 
white  (the  highest),  mark  the  degree  of  evo- 
lutionary unfoldment  to  which  the  individual 
has  attained  at  any  given  time. 

But,  when  they  also  assure  us,  with  all  the 
emphasis  of  absolute  personal  knowledge, 
that  each  and  every  human  individual  first 
enters  the  earth  plane  as  an  infant  of  the 
black  race;  that  this  is  the  lowest  point  of 
his  individual  human  evolution;  that  from 
this  point  forward  he  enters  upon  the  process 
of  human  Reincarnation;  that  with  each  Re- 
incarnation in  higher  human  form  his  color 
grows  lighter,  until  he  has  reached  the  white 
race;  whereupon  he  proceeds  to  work  out  his 
evolution  in  that  race  until  he  has  received 
all  the  knowledge,  through  personal  experi- 
ence, which  this  earthly  plane  of  life  can 
give  him — then  we  realize  that  the  seeming 

314 


REINCARNATION 

inequality  at  physical  birth  is  accounted  for. 
In  fact,  it  no  longer  represents  to  our  minds 
inequality  at  all,  but  merely  different  steps  in 
a  great  Evolutionary  Plan  by  which  all  man- 
kind must  travel  literally  the  same  evolution- 
ary road,  in  order  to  arrive  at  the  goal  v/hich 
Nature  has  fixed  as  the  limit  of  his  evolution- 
ary possibilities  upon  this  planet  of  earth. 

During  all  the  lower  rounds  of  individual 
life  upon  all  the  planes  of  life,  up  to  the  sixth 
spiritual  plane,  the  incarnating  and  the  re- 
incarnating process  is  a  purely  involuntary 
process  on  the  part  of  the  individual  Soul. 
This  means  that  during  all  these  lower 
rounds  of  evolution  the  process  of  incarna- 
tion and  reincarnation  is  entirely  under  the 
control  of  Nature,  and  proceeds  apparently 
without  regard  to  the  likes  or  dislikes,  the 
desires  or  preferences,  or  other  considerations 
on  the  part  of  the  individual  Soul.  But 
when  the  evolving  Soul  reaches  the  sixth  spir- 
itual plane  (the  seventh  plane,  including  the 
physical),  it  is  emancipated  from  this  domi- 
nance of  Nature,  and  becomes  a  free  agent. 
That  is  to  say,  from  that  time  forward  he  has 
the  power  to  reincarnate,  or  not,  as  he  chooses. 

815 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Therefore,  if  he  should  reincarnate  thereaf- 
ter, it  would  be  solely  because  he,  of  his  own 
free  will  and  accord,  elected  to  do  so,  and 
not  because  it  was  absolutely  necessary. 

In  other  words,  he  has  arrived  at  a  point 
where  Nature  chooses  to  entrust  him  entirely 
to  work  out  his  own  individual  destiny.  This 
is  what  is  meant  by  his  "Spiritual  Majority" 
— or,  his  "Spiritual  Emancipation."  This  is 
where  he  becomes  "his  own  man,"  as  we  say 
upon  the  physical  plane  when  a  boy  reaches 
the  age  of  twenty-one  years. 

Whenever  any  individual  reincarnates  af- 
ter he  has  reached  his  Spiritual  Majority,  it 
is  because  he  is  convinced  that  by  so  doing 
he  will  be  able  to  render  some  great  benefit 
to  humanity  upon  the  earth  plane.  It  may  be 
he  realizes  that  a  time  has  arrived  upon  the 
earth  plane  when  its  inhabitants  greatly  need 
to  know  some  fundamental  Truth  that  will 
enable  them  to  take  an  important  evolution- 
ary step  at  once.  He  believes,  that  by  rein- 
carnating under  right  conditions,  he  would 
be  able  to  give  to  the  world  a  message  that 
would  carry  them  over  and  beyond  some  im- 
pending crisis  they  are  facing. 

S16 


REINCARNATION 

He  decides  to  accept  another  reincarna- 
tion as  a  part  of  his  Personal  Responsibility, 
and  proceeds  at  once  to  prepare  for  that 
event. 

It  is  now  within  his  own  power  to  deter- 
mine the  conditions  and  choose  the  environ- 
ment in  which  to  reincarnate.  In  determin- 
ing these  important  points,  he  seeks  out  a 
family  upon  the  physical  plane  which  repre- 
sents the  highest  type  of  physical,  mental, 
moral  and  spiritual  development;  and  he  de- 
cides to  reincarnate  as  a  member  of  that  fam- 
ily. Then  he  proceeds  to  equip  himself  with 
the  added  knowledge  that  will  best  serve  him 
in  getting  over  the  message  he  has  to  give 
humanity. 

When  the  time  comes,  he  is  fully  prepared. 
He  reincarnates  in  the  new-born  infant  of 
that  family.  He  knows  whether  it  will  be  a 
boy  or  a  girl,  and  before  the  hour  of  its  birth 
arrives  he  knows  whether  its  physical  body 
is  perfectly  developed.  He  has  done  all  he 
could  rightfully  do  to  impel  the  mother,  dur- 
ing the  prenatal  period,  to  preserve  the  right 
attitude  of  Soul  and  obey  the  laws  of  health, 
physical,  spiritual,  mental,  moral  and  psych- 

317 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ical.  He  even  invokes  the  aid  of  other  Great 
Friends  in  this  work  of  preparation,  so  that 
when  the  hour  comes  for  his  reincarnation 
everything  has  been  done  that  could  be  done 
rightfully  from  the  spiritual  side  of  life  to 
make  the  conditions  that  would  best  enable 
him  to  develop  a  physical  body,  a  spiritual 
body,  a  moral  character  and  a  condition  and 
attitude  of  Soul  that  are  necessary  to  enable 
him  successfully  to  deliver  the  message  to 
humanity  for  which  he  "came  to  earth." 

In  a  general  way,  he  knows  in  advance  the 
conditions  he  is  to  meet;  and,  in  the  same 
general  way,  he  is  able  to  anticipate  and  fore- 
cast much  of  the  experience  ahead  of  him. 
But  I  am  not  led  to  believe  that  he  is  able  to 
know  in  advance  each  and  every  personal  ex- 
perience through  which  he  must  pass  in  his 
development  from  infancy,  through  child- 
hood, youth  and  maturity;  nor  does  it  seem 
possible  for  him  to  know  with  certainty  what 
will  be  the  ultimate  results  of  his  ministry 
during  his  reincarnation. 

If  this  be  true  of  one  who  has  attained  a 
degree  of  evolutionary  development  where 
his  reincarnation   becomes  a   matter  of  his 

318 


REINCARNATION 

own  voluntary  and  individual  choice,  it 
would  appear  that  one  who  reincarnates  long 
before  he  has  reached  that  degree  of  evolu- 
tionary development,  and  comes  back  to  earth 
without  either  his  own  knowledge  or  con- 
sent, would  have  virtually  no  knowledge  as 
to  the  conditions,  the  family,  or  the  environ- 
ment into  which  he  is  coming. 

In  this  case  the  individual  himself  has  no 
voluntary  part  whatever  in  determining  any 
of  the  conditions.  Nature  fixes  the  environ- 
ment in  which  his  Reincarnation  is  to  occur, 
in  exact  accord  with  the  evolutionary  devel- 
opment he  has  attained  at  the  time.  Nature 
determines  also  the  locality,  the  nationality 
and  the  parentage  of  the  infant  body  in  which 
he  is  to  reincarnate. 

But  in  both  instances  there  is  a  great  un- 
derlying purpose  of  Nature,  which  is  being 
worked  out  and  accomplished  —  on  the  one 
hand  with  the  intelligent  and  voluntary  co- 
operation of  the  individual,  and  on  the  other 
without  that  conscious  and  voluntary  co- 
operation of  the  individual. 

In  this  we  also  have  an  explanation  of  an- 
other interesting  phenomenon  which  has  been 

319 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  subject  of  much  serious  and  scientific 
study  and  inquiry  upon  the  lower  spiritual 
planes. 

There  are  many  who  are  constantly  disap- 
pearing from  the  various  lower  spiritual 
planes  of  life,  who  do  not  reappear  upon  the 
next  higher  plane.  They  simply  disappear 
from  the  spiritual  side  of  life  and  we  do  not 
know  where  they  go.  The  Great  Teachers 
of  the  Celestial  Planes  of  life  tell  us  that  these 
disappearing  individuals  have  only  reincar- 
nated upon  the  earth  plane,  that  they  may 
acquire  added  knowledge,  through  experi- 
ence; and  that  this  process  of  reappearing 
upon  earth  will  continue  until  each  individ- 
ual has  attained  to  that  degree  of  evolution- 
ary development  where  he  is  invested  by 
Nature  with  the  power  to  control  his  own 
destiny  beyond  that  point,  insofar  as  his  fur- 
ther Reincarnations  may  occur. 

There  are  many  other  facts  of  Nature 
which  seem  to  be  in  harmony  with  this  ex- 
position of  the  Law  of  Individual  Evolution. 

Her  great  Plan  seems  to  contemplate  that 
a  time  will  come  in  the  evolution  of  each 
human  Soul  when  it  will  have  attained  the 

320 


REINCARNATION 

highest  degree  of  evolutionary  unfoldment 
possible  to  it  upon  this  planet  of  earth.  The 
information  comes  down  to  us  from  those 
far  beyond,  that  there  are  myriads  of  other 
planets,  some  below  the  earth  in  evolutionary 
conditions,  and  many  above  it  —  and  that 
when  an  individual  has  reached  the  highest 
point  of  evolution  possible  to  him  upon  this 
planet,  he  passes  from  earth  and  all  its  spir- 
itual realms  and  finds  his  way  to  some  other 
planet  which  contains  evolutionary  condi- 
tions adapted  to  his  further  experiences  and 
development. 

How  far  this  continues,  the  wisest  of  the 
Great  Spiritual  Intelligences  say  to  us,  ''We 
Do  Not  Know" 

According  to  the  information  received  from 
the  Great  Friends,  a  Soul  incarnating  upon 
the  physical  plane,  or  reincarnating  from  the 
spiritual  planes,  always  enters  the  physical 
body  of  an  infant. 

In  truth,  the  only  conditions  upon  the  earth 
plane  which  make  incarnation,  or  Reincar- 
nation, possible,  are  those  which  exist  at  the 
instant  when  a  new-born  infant  body  invol- 
untarily takes  its  first  physical  breath.     It  is 

321 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  presence  of  the  incarnating,  or  reincarnat- 
ing Soul,  which  makes  that  first  "Breath  of 
Life"  possible.  And  the  Soul  of  the  infant 
enters  the  body  with  it.  If  the  Soul  were  not 
present,  the  first  breath  would  never  be 
taken. 

The  number  of  Reincarnations  for  an 
evolving  Soul  to  attain  a  sufficiently  high  or- 
der of  intelligence  to  align  itself  with  Na- 
ture's Constructive  Principle  depends  very 
largely  upon  the  individual  himself.  You 
will  grasp  the  significance  of  this  more  fully 
if  you  will  follow  carefully  this  illustration: 

Two  boys  of  the  same  age  enter  the  same 
school  at  the  same  time.  They  are  in  the 
same  classes  and  have  the  same  facilities  and 
advantages  to  progress  in  their  work.  But 
one  of  them  graduates  at  the  end  of  four 
years,  while  the  other  requires  six  years  to 
accomplish  the  same  result.  Why  is  this? 
Merely  because  one  makes  better  use  of  his 
time  and  energy  than  the  other.  Two  men 
enter  a  musical  college  at  the  same  time. 
One  becomes  a  finished  artist  in  four  years, 
while  the  other  works  a  lifetime  without 
reaping  the  same  degree  of  efficiency.  Why? 

322 


REINCARNATION 

Because  of  the  difference  in  their  individ- 
uality» 

Does  not  this  suggest  to  you  why  it  is  that 
one  individual  may  accomplish  in  a  single 
incarnation  what  it  may  require  another 
many  incarnations  to  accomplish? 

The  fundamental  principle  of  "Individ- 
uality" is  the  thing  that  accounts  for  this 
variation  of  time  and  personal  effort  in  the 
accomplishment  of  individual  results.  If  the 
individuality  were  the  same,  the  results  would 
be  the  same. 

There  is  no  definitely  fixed  time  that  can 
be  defined  or  determined,  when  one  may  con- 
sciously recall  former  incarnations  and  their 
lessons.  This  is  a  purely  individual  achieve- 
ment. It  must  be  worked  out  by  the  individ- 
ual himself  in  every  instance.  It  represents 
a  certain  degree  of  spiritual  unfoldment. 
The  power  to  recall  past  lives  and  their  re- 
sults and  purposes  comes  to  each  individual 
whenever  he  reaches  that  certain  degree  of 
spiritual  evolution  and  unfoldment  which 
evolves  the  degree  and  quality  of  memory 
necessary  to  that  end.   Hence,  it  cannot  be  dc- 

323 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

termined  in  any  given  number  of  days,  weeks, 
months,  years  or  lives. 

If  you  were  to  ask — When  will  a  child 
learn  to  walk  and  talk? — the  answer  could 
not  be  given  in  days,  weeks,  months,  or  even 
years.  This  is  because  it  depends  upon  the 
individuality  of  the  child.  Whenever  the 
child  has  evolved  to  a  point  where  its  powers 
of  locomotion  and  speech  fall  under  its  power 
of  individual  Will,  or  Volition,  it  will  walk 
and  talk,  but  not  until  then.  The  answer 
depends  upon  the  working  out  of  the  Law  of 
Evolution  in  the  individual. 

But  we  have  the  assurance  of  those  who 
claim  to  know,  that  such  a  time  does  come  in 
each  individual  life;  and,  since  that  time 
comes  to  each  individual  only  when  he  has 
earned  it  under  the  Great  Law  of  Compensa- 
tion, it  follows  that  each  individual  must  an- 
swer the  question  himself.  He  must  earn 
that  reward  before  it  will  come  to  him;  and 
whenever  he  has  earned  the  reward,  Nature 
will  not  withhold  it  from  him  one  single  in- 
stant of  time.'  //  ij  his  the  instant  he  has 
earned  it. 


CHAPTER  XXXI 


HELL 


There  is  "Hell"  enough  —  for  all  who 
need  it. 

But  you  need  not  be  shocked ;  this  has  ref- 
erence only  to  those  who  devote  themselves 
to  frightening  innocent,  ignorant,  supersti- 
tious men,  women  and  children  into  a  verit- 
able "Hell"  of  mental  and  psychical  tor- 
ment, in  their  efforts  to  avoid  the  inevitable 
penalties  of  the  great  Law  of  Compensation. 
For  such  as  these,  there  is  "Hell"  enough  to 
satisfy  all  their  most  ambitious  designs  and 
requirements.  But,  it  is  a  "Hell"  of  their 
own  design  and  manufacture.  It  is  therefore 
especially  adapted  to  their  own  needs;  and  it 
is  especially  devoted  to  the  process  of  cleans- 
ing their  own  souls  from  the  natural  conse- 
quences of  so  great  a  libel  and  slander  upon 
the  Great  Father  of  all  Good,  as  well  as  upon 
the  wisdom  and  justice  of  His  great  Natural 
Law  of  Compensation. 

325 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

Do  not  forget  that  in  neither  world  is 
there  such  a  thing  as  an  arbitrary  penalty  or 
reward  of  Nature.  The  "Hell"  that  is 
preached  by  our  evangelistic  and  ministerial 
friends,  represents  but  an  arbitrary  exhibition 
of  anger  on  the  part  of  the  GREAT  CREATOR 
OF  THE  Universe.  It  is  therefore  not  true.  It 
is  neither  just  nor  natural. 

The  term  "arbitrary"  is  here  used  in  its 
usually  accepted  significance.  Any  arbi- 
trary reward  or  penalty  is  one  which  is  not 
fixed  and  governed  by  Law.  It  is  subject  to 
the  individual  Will,  caprice,  impulse  or 
fancy,  and  may  be  modified  or  entirely 
changed  at  any  time,  and  in  response  to  any 
whim. 

Neither  rewards  nor  penalties,  under  the 
organic  Law  of  Compensation,  are  subject  to 
the  Will,  caprice  or  whim  of  any  intelligence 
or  individual.  Being  the  result  of  Natural 
Law,  they  are  as  fixed  and  immutable,  as  in- 
evitable and  inexorable,  as  the  Law  itself. 

Our  evangelistic  friends  would  tell  us  that 
such  are  the  rewards  and  penalties  to  be 
doled  out  to  us  by  a  God  whose  Will  is  sub- 
ject to  change  at  any  time. 

S26 


i 


HELL 

They  tell  us,  with  all  the  authority  of  the 
most  rigid  dogmatism  and  fanaticism,  that 
we  will  pass  from  physical  life  directly  into 
a  place  and  condition  called  "Purgatory" — a 
sort  of  half-way  place  between  "Heaven"  and 
"Hell."  It  is  supposed  to  be  a  place  and  con- 
dition from  which  the  individual  can  rise 
into  "Heaven"  only  through  being  "purged" 
of  his  sins.  And  if  he  fails  to  obtain  "purga- 
tion" he  not  only  fails  to  rise  into  "Heaven," 
but  he  inevitably  sinks  under  the  weight  of 
his  sins,  into  "Hell"  —  the  antithesis  of 
"Heaven." 

Almost  all  of  these  dogmatic  religionists 
pass,  at  physical  death,  into  the  magnetic 
field,  for  a  time,  and  (solely  because  it  so 
nearly  corresponds  to  what  they  have  been 
taught  concerning  "Purgatory")  they  accept 
it  as  such  and  adopt  it  as  their  "home"  until 
they  can  have  time  to  obtain  the  "purgatory" 
aid  of  their  priesthood,  and  ascend  into 
"Heaven." 

The  very  fact  that  they  find  themselves,  on 
arriving  in  the  spiritual  life,  in  a  place  and 
condition  so  nearly  answering  their  own  con- 
ception of  what  a  "Purgatory"  ought  to  be, 

337 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

they  assume  that  they  are  really  and  truly  in 
the  Purgatory  of  which  they  have  been  told 
by  their  religious,  earthly  teachers  and 
priests.  Immediately  they  set  about  adjusting 
themselves  to  the  conditions  of  this  new  life 
and  environment,  with  that  conviction  defi- 
nitely fixed  in  their  minds  and  souls.  And, 
not  understanding  the  meaning  or  the  appli- 
cation of  the  Law  of  Individual  Evolution, 
the  meaning  or  value  of  Individual  Effort, 
they  accept  the  situation  as  they  find  it  and 
make  no  effort  to  rise  above  the  conditions, 
until  the  Border-Land  Workers,  through  the 
educational  help  they  can  give,  are  able  to 
lead  them  into  the  Light  of  Truth,  and  point 
them  to  the  way  which  leads  upwards  and 
out  of  their  miserable  condition  of  darkness, 
into  Spiritual  Light.  Some  of  the  most  fanat- 
ical religionists  resume  the  lines  of  their  for- 
mer religious  work  upon  earth,  and  join  the 
organized  bands  of  religious  fanatics  on  the 
spiritual  side  of  life  who  spend  their  time 
and  efforts  in  trying  to  influence  those  of 
earth  whom  they  have  left  behind. 

So   forcibly   and   emphatically   have   they 
been  impressed,  during  physical  life,  with  the 

S2t 


HELL 

necessity  for  this  place  of  "Purgation;"  and 
so  vividly  is  it  fixed  in  their  consciousness, 
that  often  it  requires  long  and  patient  effort 
on  the  part  of  the  Border-Land  Workers  to 
free  them  from  their  superstition,  obtain 
their  intelligent  cooperation  in  the  work  of 
their  own  liberation,  and  help  them  out  of 
the  magnetic  field  into  the  first  spiritual 
plane. 

From  this  explanation  you  will  be  able  to 
appreciate  something  of  the  evil  conse- 
quences of  such  a  religious  doctrine  and 
dogma.  It  handicaps  the  individual  from  the 
moment  he  emerges  from  the  physical  body 
until,  through  the  patient  process  of  educa- 
tion, his  religious  superstition  is  finally  over- 
come and  removed. 

Again  bear  in  mind  the  fact  that  there  is  a 
great  and  fundamental  LAW  OF  Life  which 
governs  this  entire  problem.  It  is  the  en- 
nobling and  inspiring  Law  of  Individual 
Evolution;  and  when  the  Law  is  understood 
by  humanity  upon  earth,  that  fact  will  go  a 
long  way  toward  depopulating  both  "Pur- 
gatory" and  "Hell,"  as  well  as  disposing  of 

339 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

the  superstitions  of  all  dogmatic  religions  of 
earth. 

The  people  of  earth  carry  all  their  religious 
beliefs,  convictions  and  superstitions  over 
with  them.  Not  only  this,  they  are  just  as 
eager  to  find  justification  of  their  religious 
beliefs  as  they  were  in  the  physical  life.  A 
Methodist  on  the  physical  plane  remains  a 
Methodist  on  the  spiritual  side  of  life — until, 
through  education  and  personal  effort,  he  has 
outgrown  the  narrow  limits  of  his  church 
creed.  A  Presbyterian,  in  like  manner  re- 
mains a  Presbyterian,  and  a  Catholic  remains 
a  Catholic — until,  by  the  same  process  of  edu- 
cation and  growth,  he  rises  above  his  super- 
stitions and  his  destructive  fear  of  punish- 
ment. 

In  due  course  of  time,  all  come  to  real- 
ize that  they  have  been  imposed  upon  by 
those  of  earth  who  have  filled  their  minds 
and  Souls  with  all  manner  of  unnatural  and 
superstitious  fears  and  fallacies.  It  is  only 
when  they  have  learned  their  mistakes  and 
have  put  away  their  superstitions  and  un- 
worthy fears  that  they  begin  the  upward  and 

sso 


HELL 

onward  evolutionary  climb  from  darkness  to 
Light. 

Nature's  rewards  to  her  children,  for 
obedience  to  her  Laws,  are  far  greater  than 
it  is  possible  for  those  of  this  physical  life  to 
understand  or  appreciate.  Indeed,  they  reach 
the  acme  of  all  our  hopes  and  desires;  but 
they  are  bounded  not  by  the  "New  Jerusa- 
lem" with  its  streets  of  gold,  nor  by  the  little, 
inadequate  man-made  "Heaven"  wherein  the 
Souls  of  men  and  women  find  nothing  better 
to  do  than  sit  around  the  "Throne  of  Grace" 
and  sing  God's  praises,  and  plunk  a  harp, 
through  endless  eternity — while  their  former 
comrades  and  fellow  sinners  languish  in  a 
Hell  of  everlasting  fire. 

The  individual  comes  to  know  that  the  only 
"Heaven,"  or  the  only  "Hell"  there  is  for 
him,  or  for  his  fellows — of  both  that  life  and 
this — is  the  Heaven  or  the  Hell  he  makes  for 
himself  by  his  own  individual  obedience  to, 
or  violation  of,  the  Law  of  Individual  Life 
and  Evolution. 


331 


CHAPTER  XXXII 


DIVINITY 


It  is  but  natural  that  the  devotees  of  Chris- 
tianity should  be  interested  in  the  problem  of 
"Divinity."  For  almost  2000  years  the  ques- 
tion of  the  "Divinity"  of  Christ  has  been  a 
subject  of  consideration,  discussion,  disputa- 
tion and  debate  among  the  best  intelligences 
of  every  age  and  every  people.  It  is  still  a 
mooted  question,  and  we  find  that  in  this,  the 
modern  age  of  "Science  and  Religion,"  of 
Physical  Materialism  and  the  most  exalted 
Spiritualism,  of  coldest  Rationalism  and  the 
hottest  Emotionalism,  the  best  intelligences 
of  earth  are  arrayed  against  each  other.  The 
question  is  still  "before  the  house,"  as  it  v^^ere, 
and  the  discussion  is  quite  as  torrid  as  at  any 
time  since  the  Master  v^as  born  in  Bethlehem 
of  Judea,  and  the  Wise  Men  came  from  the 
East  "to  v^orship  Him." 

May  v^e  not,  therefore,  w^ithout  offense  to 
the  tender  sensibilities  of  anyone — but  "with 

333 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

malice  toward  none  and  charity  for  all" — add 
our  humble  contribution  in  behalf  of  the 
Great  School  of  Natural  Science,  whose  ex- 
alted researches  and  scientific  findings  are 
impelled  alone  by  this  search  for  Truth? 

More  especially,  may  we  not  do  our  hum- 
ble best  to  answer  that  age-old,  but  ever-new, 
question:    "Was  Christ  Divine?" 

If  the  answer  should  prove  to  be  at  vari- 
ance from  the  views  and  convictions  of  any- 
one who  holds  himself  to  be  a  "Christian," 
let  him  not  forget  that  it  is  given  in  the  spirit 
of  honest  conviction,  but  with  profound  re- 
spect for  the  views  and  convictions  of  any 
and  all  who  differ  from  the  views  herein 
expressed. 

The  answer  depends  somewhat  upon  the 
exact  meaning  attached  to  the  word  "Divine" 
or  "Divinity." 

Assuming,  however,  that  the  term  means 
"Possessing  the  attributes  of  God,  the  Father 
of  Mankind" — Christ  Jesus  was  Divine.  For, 
unless  all  our  concepts  are  at  fault,  nothing 
seems  clearer  than  that  the  great  Martyred 
Master  Jesus,  possessed,  and  still  possesses, 
every   individual  attribute   possessed   by  the 

334 


DIVINITY 

Divine  Creator — without  raising  the  question 
of  degree. 

This  does  not  mean  that  the  Master  Jesus 
was,  in  any  essential,  different  from  his  fel- 
low-men in  point  of  essential  attributes.  The 
most  exalted  concept  of  the  human  mind 
which  has  ever  been  expressed  as  to  the  Di- 
vinity of  Christ  is  contained  in  the  assertion 
that  he  was  the  ''Son  of  God."  This  would 
surely  establish  his  "Divinity" — granting  that 
the  Sonship  is  established. 

But  again,  this  does  not  necessarily  lift  him 
above  the  status  of  his  fellows  of  earth;  for 
it  was  none  other  than  He  himself  who  de- 
clared and  taught  the  doctrine  that  all  men 
are  "Sons  of  the  same  Father." 

In  other  words,  Jesus  maintained  his 
Brotherhood  with  all  mankind,  as  well  as  his 
Sonship  with  God.  This  means  that  all  men 
are  Sons  of  God.  Hence,  if  Jesus  is  "Divine," 
then  all  men  are  equally  Divine;  for  they 
are  all  "Sons  of  the  same  Father,"  and  they 
are  all  His  Brothers.  If  Jesus  possesses  the 
attributes  of  Deity,  then  also  do  all  his 
Brothers.   Is  there  any  flaw  in  this  logic? 

In   truth,   the   Master   Jesus  was   a   man 

335 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

like  other  men,  born  of  woman,  as  other  men. 
He  traveled  the  pathway  of  evolution,  as 
other  men  have  traveled  it  and  are  still  travel- 
ing that  way.  It  is  true  that  he  traveled 
much  farther  along  the  road  "toward  God" 
than  the  large  majority  of  his  fellow-men. 
But  this  does  not  mean  that  He  has  traveled 
beyond  the  relationship  of  "Brother  to  all 
men."  He  is  our  Brother  today  just  as  truly 
as  He  was  on  the  day  of  his  Crucifixion.  He 
made  no  claim  to  an  "Immaculate  Concep- 
tion," nor  to  any  "Divinity"  in  which  all 
mankind  do  not  share  with  Him. 

When  He  spoke  of  ''The  Father,"  He  was 
not  speaking  of  the  Great  Creative  Intelli- 
gence who  rules  the  UNIVERSE  and  whose 
creative  Intelligence  is  back  of  all  the  mani- 
festations of  Nature.  He  was  speaking  of  the 
Exalted  Ruler  of  this  planet,  the  One  Indi- 
vidual whose  spiritual  authority  extends  to  all 
the  planes  of  life  upon  the  earth,  both  phys- 
ical and  spiritual.  For  the  great  wisdom, 
sympathy,  love  and  power  of  this  Exalted 
Ruler  are  such  that  He  is  looked  up  to,  re- 
vered and  loved  as  a  real  "Father"  to  all  the 
children  of  earth.    Again  and  again  He  has. 

3S( 


DIVINITY 

been  referred  to  by  the  Wise  Men  of  all  times 
as  "God  the  Father,"  as  "The  Father  of  Hu- 
manity," as  "The  Great  Father";  and  by 
various  designations,  each  and  all  of  which 
betray  the  fact  that  there  is  truly  a  Spiritual 
Father  to  whom  all  mankind,  upon  all  the 
planes  of  life,  look  as  the  highest  concept  of  a 
personal  Ruler  and  Loving  Father  combined. 
One  of  the  greatest  comforts  and  inspira- 
tions those  of  the  spiritual  life  enjoy  is  in  the 
fact  that  the  Exalted  Spiritual  Teachers  and 
Masters  who  are,  as  yet,  above  and  beyond 
them  in  point  of  individual  development  and 
spiritual  unfoldment,  are  constantly  assuring 
them  that  they  have  passed  over  the  same 
road  all  men  are  traveling,  experiencing  all 
the  joys  and  sorrows,  all  the  failures  and  tri- 
umphs, which  have  come  to  them  in  their 
,own  struggles  toward  spiritual  illumination; 
and  that  they  are  thus  able  to  understand  and 
appreciate  every  phase  of  human  experience. 
It  is  because  of  this  assurance  that  we  of 
earth  may  gather  inspiration,  from  day  to 
day,  to  go  on  traveling  the  upward  path 
which  they  have  traveled  before  us.  In  this 
realization  that  our  own  feet  are  pressing  the 

337 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

soil  in  which  theirs  have  left  their  sacred 
imprint,  we  find  the  inspiration  and  the  assur- 
ance that  we  also  shall  be  able,  one  glorious 
day,  to  stand  where  they  stand  today;  and 
that  we,  too,  shall  be  able  to  give  to  those  be- 
low us  the  uplifting  inspiration  that  shall 
carry  them  up  through  every  trial  and  make 
them  triumphant  over  every  obstacle  in  the 
pathway  of  their  development  and  final 
illumination. 

If  we  could,  deep  within  our  inmost  Souls, 
believe  that  one  whose  essential  nature  made 
Him  perfect  in  the  sight  of  God,  the  Father, 
was  sent  as  an  example  to  men  whose  essen- 
tial natures  are  most  imperfect — and  that  sal- 
vation depended  upon  the  ability  of  the  im- 
perfect individual  to  emulate  that  supreme 
example  and  thus  exemplify  perfection — 
there  is  not  one  among  mankind  who  would 
have  the  courage,  or  the  rashness,  to  make 
the  effort. 

But  when  you  know  that  one  who,  like 
yourself,  has  been  human  in  every  sense,  has 
lived  his  life  amidst  the  same  hard  condi- 
tions with  you,  and  has  triumphed  over  every 
obstacle  you  sec  ahead  of  you,  as  well  as  be- 
ast 


DIVINITY 

hind,  you  have  an  abiding  conviction  that  the 
task  is  not  too  big  for  you,  difficult  as  it  may 
appear.  By  this  assurance  that  another  of 
your  kind  has  traveled  the  road,  you  are  in- 
spired to  put  forth  every  effort  which  lies 
within  you  to  follow  in  his  footsteps. 

It  is  in  this  general  misconception  as  to  the 
true  and  essential  nature  of  the  Nazarene, 
that  the  religions  of  earth  today  erect  the 
most  stupendous  barriers  to  the  progress  of 
humanity  toward  the  true  goal  of  life. 

But  the  time  is  coming,  and  it  would  seem 
to  be  approaching  with  unusual  swiftness, 
when  the  doctrines  of  "The  Fatherhood  of 
God"  and  "The  Brotherhood  of  Man"— in- 
cluding the  glorious  and  glorified  Master, 
Jesus  Christ — will  be  acknowledged  as  the 
fundamentals  of  all  true  religions. 

The  "Divinity  of  Christ"  and  the  "Divin- 
ity of  Humanity"  are  synonymous  in  the 
Wisdom  Religion  of  the  spiritual  realms. 

Experience  assures  us  that  there  is  a  "Right 
Way"  and  a  "Wrong  Way"  to  travel  the 
path  of  Life,  on  this  side  of  life  as  well  as  on 
the  other.  We  know,  by  the  same  token,  that 
for  every  Truth  there  is  a  corresponding  Un- 

339 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

truth.  We  know  that  for  every  obverse  thing 
in  Nature  there  is  its  corresponding  reverse 
side.  We  know  that  for  everything  in  Nature 
we  call  "good,"  there  is  a  corresponding 
"evil."  We  know  that  for  everything  in  Na- 
ture, or  Life,  that  we  recognize  as  "construc- 
tive" there  is  its  reverse  side,  which  we  rec- 
ognize as  "destructive." 

The  greatest  of  the  Great  Friends  tell  us 
they  do  not  know  enough,  as  yet,  to  declare 
with  the  certainty  of  Truth  that  there  is  a 
"personal"  God.  By  the  same  token,  we  do 
not  know,  as  yet,  that  there  is  a  "personal" 
Devil.  But,  by  the  logic  of  analogy,  it  would 
seem  safe  to  assume  that  if  there  is  a  personal 
God  which  exemplifies  the  Principle  of  Good 
in  Nature,  then  there  must  be  a  personal 
Devil  which  exemplifies  the  Principle  of 
Evil  in  Nature  —  unless  the  personal  God 
created  a  "Devil"  without  personality. 

The  Great  Friends  tell  us  that  they  know 
nothing  about  "devils" — in  a  personal  sense. 
Much  less  do  we.  We  personally  know  noth- 
ing of  either  a  personal  God — the  Creator  of 
the  Universe — or  a  personal  Devil.  But,  IF 
these  do  exist,  it  would  seem  that  they  must 

S40 


i 


DIVINITY 

stand  for  absolutely  fixed  and  immutable 
Principles  of  Nature;  and,  being  fixed  and 
immutable,  they  are  not  subject  to  The  Law 
of  Individual  Evolution. 

Hence,  it  would  seem  that  IF  there  is  such 
a  being  in  Nature  as  a  personal  Devil,  his 
character  is  fixed  and  immutable,  and  thus 
not  within  the  scope  and  purpose  of  the  Law 
of  Evolution. 

There  can  be  not  the  least  doubt  that  Man 
— who  is  distinctly  a  personality,  and  who  is 
subject  to  the  Evolutionary  Principle  of  Life 
— can  "go  to  the  Devil"  over  there,  with  just 
as  much  facility  as  he  can  go  there  on  our 
side  of  life.  This  seems  to  be  one  of  the  pri- 
mary elections  which  Nature  has  given  to 
mankind  as  an  individual.  He  may  either 
obey  the  Law  of  Life,  in  which  event  he  goes 
forward  and  upward  along  the  Evolutionary 
Pathway  of  Life  until  he  has  reached  its  goal 
of  individual  harmony  and  adjustment  to  Na- 
ture's Law  of  Evolution;  or,  he  may  elect  to 
defy  the  Law  of  Life,  in  which  case  he  en- 
ters upon  the  devolutionary  pathway  of 
Death,  the  ultimate  goal  of  which  seems  to 
be  individual  disintegration  and  final  death. 

34-1 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

And,  no  matter  to  what  height  of  individ- 
ual evolution  he  may  have  attained,  it  is 
within  his  power  to  turn  about  and  retrace 
his  steps  at  any  time.  It  is  this  divine  right 
of  individual  election  that  makes  him  "Cap- 
tain of  his  own  Soul"  and  "Master  of  his 
own  Destiny." 

Any  religion  or  philosophy  of  life  which 
takes  from  individual  man  this  fundamental 
right  and  power  of  election,  makes  of  him 
but  an  automatic  instrument  under  the  domi- 
nation and  control  of  a  Destiny  that  has  been 
fixed  "from  the  foundation  of  the  world." 
And  such  a  religion  and  philosophy  of  life 
would  establish  the  doctrines  of  Predestina- 
tion and  Fate  in  all  their  seeming  injustice 
and  tyranny;  and,  at  the  same  time,  would 
destroy  the  power  of  individual  human  Will 
as  a  determining  factor  in  Evolution  and  in 
the  destiny  of  the  Individual  Soul  of  Man. 

The  Wise  Ones  have  indicated,  in  many 
ways,  their  unqualified  acceptance  of  the  Evo- 
lutionary Law  and  Principle  of  Life  for  all 
mankind.  They  acknowledge  the  freedom  of 
individual  Choice,  as  well  as  the  power  of 
individual  Will  of  Man.    For,   upon   these 

342 


I 


DIVINITY 

principles  alone  is  it  possible  to  predicate  that 
Man  is  either  personally  responsible  or  mor- 
ally accountable,  in  any  sense  whatever. 

Take  from  him  his  Personal  Responsibility 
and  Moral  Accountability,  and  you  have,  by 
one  and  the  same  act,  divested  him  of  every 
uplifting  Hope,  Aspiration  and  Inspiration 
which  give  to  Individual  Life  either  meaning 
or  value. 

Banish  the  thought!  It  is  enough  for  us 
to  know  that  the  Master  Jesus  is  Divine,  and 
that  we  are  his  Brothers  in  the  Universal 
Human  Family. 

And  we  honor  and  glorify  the  Great  Cre- 
ator of  All — even  though  we  are  too  "young," 
as  yet,  to  be  able  to  identify  Him  as  a  Per- 
sonality. There  are  many  of  the  truly  Great 
Things  we  do  not  know — as  yet — but  we  are 
traveling  the  Road  to  Knowledge  and  we  are 
glad  its  end  is  yet  beyond  our  view — if  it  has 
an  end. 


343 


J 


CHAPTER  XXXIII 


GOD  OR  NATURE 


With  reference  to  an  explanation  of  the 
terms  God  or  Nature,  I  will  confine  myself 
as  closely  as  may  be  possible  to  the  things 
which  are  within  the  range  of  my  own  per- 
sonal experience  (knowledge),  the  demon- 
strated facts  of  Science,  and  the  established 
truths  of  Nature. 

Now,  under  this  pledge,  if  I  claimed,  or 
professed,  to  know  anything  definitely  about 
God  (in  the  sense  of  the  Great  Universal  In- 
telligence back  of  all  manifestations  of  Na- 
ture), I  would  be  false  to  my  promise  and 
unworthy  of  confidence ;  for  it  is  a  fact  that  I 
do  not  definitely  know  anything,  whatsoever, 
about  the  great  First  Cause  of  Things,  nor  do 
I  know  anyone  who  does  know. 

Even  the  greatest  and  the  wisest  of  the 
Great  Friends,  with  whom  I  have  come  into 
personal  acquaintance  and  fellowship  on  the 
spiritual  planes  of  life,  when  asked  for  defi- 

345 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

nite  knowledge  on  the  subject,  say  with  the 
utmost  frankness,  simplicity  and  humility, 
"We  do  not  know," 

In  order  that  I  may  not  justly  be  accused 
of  assuming  knowledge  which  I  do  not  pos- 
sess, I  have  used  again  and  again,  the  terms 
"God  or  Nature,"  to  indicate  to  the  reader 
that  I  do  not  assume  to  know  which  is  scien- 
tifically the  correct  term. 

A  careful  search  of  the  Bible  will  disclose 
the  fact  that  the  term  "God"  is  not  always 
used  to  designate  the  Great  Creative  Intelli- 
gence, or  First  Cause.  But  in  some  instances, 
it  seems  to  have  been  employed  to  designate  a 
Great  Spiritual  Intelligence  whom  the  Jews 
seem  to  regard  as  their  particular  "God,"  or 
"Ruler" — thus,  by  inference,  rather  suggest- 
ing the  idea  that  there  may  be  other  "Gods" 
than  the  "God  of  the  Jews." 

In  my  writings  I  am  brought  face  to  face 
with  the  fact  that  among  religionists  gener- 
ally, and  more  especially  among  the  ministry, 
the  term  "God"  is  used  quite  generally  to 
designate  the  Great  Universal  Intelligence, 
the  Great  Creative  Intelligence,  responsible 
for   all   things   whatsoever,    in    Heaven   and 

346 


GOD  OR  NATURE 

upon  earth,  or  elsewhere  in  the  universe; 
while  the  physical  scientist  employs  the  term 
"Nature"  to  express  his  concept  of  all  that 
he  knows  of  a  "Cosmic  Intelligence." 

In  order  that  both  classes  may  read  my 
statements  understandingly,  and  without  prej- 
udice, and  free  from  the  feeling  that  I  am 
dogmatizing  upon  the  subject,  I  employ  both 
terms  interchangeably,  or  in  such  manner 
that  the  contending  disputants  as  to  the  great 
First  Cause,  may  not  be  able  to  accuse  me  of 
assuming  a  knowledge  I  do  not  possess. 

I  do  not  hesitate  to  say  that  I  do  not  know 
whether  there  is  a  great  Intelligent  Person- 
ality back  of  Nature,  or  not.  I  see  every- 
where evidences  in  Nature  of  intelligent  de- 
sign, and  I  know  that  Nature  represents  In- 
telligence. But  what,  or  who  or  where  that 
Intelligence  is,  I  do  not  know.  Neither  do  I 
know  anyone  who  seriously  claims  to  know, 
when  called  upon  to  answer  the  question  from 
the  basis  of  his  own  personal  knowledge. 

I  do  not  know  whether  the  Great  Intelli- 
gence that  is  responsible  for  Nature  is  back 
of  or  in,  or  throughout,  or  above  Nature; 
or  whether  the  Great  Creative  Intelligence 

347 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

and  Nature  (taken  together)  constitute  God. 
I  have  some  ideas  and  convictions  on  the  sub- 
ject; but  since  I  do  not  know,  these  ideas  and 
convictions  would  be  of  little  or  no  value  to 
anybody  who  demands  definite  knowledge  on 
the  subject. 

As  to  whether  God  is  a  conscious,  or  a 
self-conscious  Spirit,  Creator  of  All,  and  Na- 
ture as  the  manifestation  or  expression  of 
himself,  /  do  not  know, 

I  have  studiously  avoided  giving  any  ex- 
pression of  my  own  "beliefs"  on  this  subject, 
because  I  recognize  the  fact  that  concerning 
ultimates,  and  other  things  we  do  not  know, 
my  own  beliefs  are  of  no  greater  value  than 
those  of  my  most  obscure  and  humble  reader. 

If  I  should  tell  the  reader  what  I  believe, 
he  would  be  not  a  whit  wiser  as  to  the  realities 
than  he  is  today;  for  my  beliefs  are  not  neces- 
sarily true.  His  may  be  more  nearly  the  truth 
than  mine.  Therefore,  it  seems  to  me  that  I 
would  be  assuming  a  heavy  responsibility  in 
putting  forth  my  mere  "opinions  and  beliefs" 
on  so  profound  a  subject,  lest  he  or  someone 
else  might  not  always  differentiate  carefully 

348 


GOD  OR  NATURE 

and  accurately  between  my  beliefs  and  what 
Science  actually  knows. 

I  have  endeavored  to  confine  myself  as 
closely  as  possible  to  the  findings  of  Natural 
Science,  quite  independently  of  either  my 
own  beliefs  or  those  of  others. 

The  facts  of  Nature  on  all  the  planes  of 
life,  so  far  as  the  Wise  Men  have  been  able 
to  observe  them,  everywhere  suggest  to  the 
student  of  Natural  Science  the  operation  of 
what  appears  to  be  a  Universal  Intelligence. 
The  forces,  activities  and  processes  of  Nature, 
as  far  as  they  are  able  to  follow  their  work- 
ings, appear  to  indicate  a  conformity  to  uni- 
versal principles.  Back  of  these  seemingly 
universal  principles  the  human  intelligence 
searches  in  vain  for  the  motive  power  or 
intelligence  which  formulates  and  operates 
them. 

Notwithstanding  their  confessed  inability  to 
locate,  circumscribe,  define  or  identify  the 
great  Universal  Intelligence  which  inspires 
and  guides  the  forces,  activities  and  processes 
of  Nature,  their  individual  intelligence  intu- 
itively recognizes  its  existence  as  a  funda- 
mental fact. 

349 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

In  so  far  as  they  have  been  able  to  trace  the 
history  of  man  there  never  has  been  a  time 
wrhen  human  intelligence  has  failed  to  sense 
that  which  to  man  has  meant  a  Universal  In- 
telligence. Even  the  professed  disbeliever 
betrays  his  intuitive  recognition  of  this  Uni- 
versal Intelligence  in  the  very  profanity  he 
employs  to  emphasize  his  disbelief. 

Although  we  are  unable  to  locate,  circum- 
scribe, define  or  identify  it,  we  all,  neverthe- 
less, have  a  name  for  it.  Some  call  it  "God." 
Others  designate  it  as  the  "Father."  Some 
name  it  "Law."  Others  term  it  "Nature." 
Some  there  are  who  give  it  other  names. 
Others  of  us  express  our  conception  of  it  more 
fully  in  the  term  "Universal  Intelligence." 

It  does  not  seem  to  be  a  vital  matter 
whether  "God  and  Nature  are  one"  or 
whether  "God  is  Creative  Intelligence  and 
Nature  his  manifestation/'  Neither  does  it 
seem  vital  to  the  problem  of  "Life  Here  and 
Hereafter/'  whether  "God  is  an  Individual 
Intelligence/'  or  is  simply  "Universal  Intel- 
ligence without  Personality/' 

And  why  do  I  say  this? 

Because  these  are  problems  which,  as  yet, 

sso 


i 


GOD  OR  NATURE 

are  beyond  the  range  of  human  intelligence, 
so  far  as  we  know;  and  the  problem  with 
which  The  Great  School  and  its  Work  are 
concerned  most  vitally,  is  that  of  "Individual 
Life  Here  and  Hereafter,"  and  the  evolu- 
tionary possibilities  of  man,  insofar  as  we  are 
able  to  ascertain  them  through  the  means  and 
methods  of  Natural  Science. 

I  do  not  think  at  this  stage  of  our  evolution 
we  can  comprehend  "God."  Furthermore,  I 
am  convinced  that  we  have  several  "rounds" 
of  evolution  ahead  of  us  before  we  will  be 
able  to  comprehend  Him,  Her,  It,  or  Them. 
And  because  of  this  fact,  it  seems  to  me  that 
there  are  many  vitally  important  things  a 
long  way  'Uhis  side  of  God,"  or  our  knowl- 
edge of  "God,"  with  which  we  might  occupy 
our  time,  thought  and  personal  effort,  to 
much  more  practical  value. 

Recognizing  Man  as  an  individual  intelli- 
gence, possessing  Consciousness  and  Will,  and 
assuming  that  he  is  a  result  of  creation,  it  is 
but  logical  to  assume  that  his  Creator  also 
possesses  the  same  or  equivalent  attributes. 
But,  you  see,  it  seems  to  be  impossible  for  us 
to  approach  "God,"  or  the  great  Creative  In- 

351 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

telligence,  from  any  angle,  without  having  to 
assume  so  many  things  that  our  conclusions 
are  of  little  or  no  scientific  value. 

So  far  as  I  know,  God,  the  Great  Univer- 
sal Intelligence  that  is  responsible  for  the  ex- 
istence of  this  little  earth  and  its  inhabitants 
both  physical  and  spiritual,  is  beyond  the 
knowledge  of  the  wisest  of  the  Wise  Men. 

We  are  told  by  those  who  are  our  Great 
Instructors  —  far  above  and  beyond  us  in 
point  of  knowledge  and  unfoldment — that 
there  are  other  planets  than  earth  which  are 
inhabited ;  that  the  earth  is  but  one  very  small 
planet  among  myriads;  that  the  great  plan  of 
Nature  fits  each  and  every  planet  into  its  own 
distinct  and  individual  place  in  the  great  evo- 
lutionary scheme  of  Nature;  that  when  indi- 
viduals have  evolved  to  the  highest  point  pos- 
sible upon  this  planet  of  earth  they  have  but 
finished  their  earthly  pilgrimage  in  the  path- 
way of  their  individual  evolution  and  are 
then  able  to  pass  on,  either  into  interplan- 
etary realms,  or  to  some  other  planet  whose 
state  and  condition  are  such  that  the  individ- 
ual can  there  take  up  the  line  of  his  own 

352 


GOD  OR  NATURE 

evolutionary  unfoldment  and  go  on  and  on — 
how  much  farther  we  have  no  concept. 

It  is  not  believed  possible  for  the  Finite — • 
as  yet — to  understand  the  Infinite.  Hence,  it 
would  seem  presumptuous  for  us  to  follow 
the  subject  further.  The  wisest  of  the  Wise 
Masters  do  not  claim  to  know  anything  of 
scientific  value  concerning  the  Great,  Su- 
preme, Exalted,  Universal  Intelligence  who 
created  the  Universe,  the  earth,  the  moon,  the 
sun,  the  stars,  the  myriads  of  planets  that  con- 
stitute the  Infinite  Universe  of  Space,  and 
people  the  planets  with  individual  beings,  all 
moving,  automatically  or  consciously  and 
voluntarily,  onward  and  upward  along  the 
great  evolutionary  pathway  toward  INFINITY. 

They  make  no  claims  to  definite  acquaint- 
ance with,  nor  knowledge  of,  the  Great  Uni- 
versal Creator  of  all  things,  save  and  except 
as  they  recognize  His  presence  in  each  and 
every  manifestation  of  Nature,  in  the  moun- 
tains, the  valleys,  the  rivers,  the  lakes,  the 
oceans,  the  planets,  in  the  springing  of  vege- 
tation into  life,  in  the  unfolding  of  the  rose, 
in  the  love  song  of  the  bird,  the  smile  of  the 
infant,  the  sweep  of  the  comet,  the  roar  of  the 

353 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

elements,  the  sublime  Symphony  of  Nature. 
In  all  these  manifestations  of  life,  intelli- 
gence and  power,  they  read  the  Story  of 
Creation.  To  them,  each  of  these  is  but  a 
manifestation  of  the  Exalted,  Universal  Cre- 
ative Intelligence  and  Power  above,  beyond, 
back  of,  in  and  through  all  that  means  Life 
to  us.  They  can  go  no  further.  With  greater 
awe  than  we — because  of  their  greater  intel- 
ligence and  knowledge — they  stand,  with  un- 
covered heads,  in  the  presence  of  the  Sublime 
Unknown — and  marvel. 


SSf 


THEORIES 

OF 

"THE  WISE  MEN" 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 


If  our  modern  scientific  thinkers,  investi- 
gators and  writers  could  be  prevailed  upon 
carefully  to  tabulate  under  separate  heads 
their  "facts"  and  their  "theories"  and  specu- 
lations concerning  those  facts,  it  would  mate- 
rially simplify  the  work  of  their  students  and 
readers  and  avoid  the  most  prolific  source  of 
confusion  which  prevails  in  almost  every  de- 
partment of  scientific  investigation  and 
thought. 

It  is  not  in  the  spirit  of  hostility  nor  un- 
friendly criticism  that  this  suggestion  is  of- 
fered, but  rather  as  a  friendly  observation 
from  one  who  has  often  encountered  the  per- 
plexing difficulty  referred  to. 

We  all  love  to  theorize  and  speculate  upon 
the  things  that  are  out  beyond  the  range  of 
our  definite  personal  knowledge.  It  is  a  part 
of  our  natures  to  do  so.  To  many  of  us  it 
takes  the  place  of  intellectual  recreation  and 
entertainment.  This  is  more  especially  true 
among  scientists  and  philosophers. 


357 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

The  scientist  discovers  what  he  recognizes 
as  a  "fact."  His  mind  at  once  demands  to 
know  its  meaning  and  value.  If,  perchance, 
it  should  lie  outside  the  sequential  line  of 
those  facts  with  which  he  is  already  familiar, 
he  studies  it,  reasons  upon  it,  speculates  about 
it  and  theorizes  over  it  until  he  reaches  a  con- 
clusion. No  matter  how  remote  that  conclu- 
sion may  chance  to  be  from  the  truth,  if  he 
is  for  the  time  being  satisfied  with  it,  he  is 
strongly  impelled  to  give  it  to  the  wcrM  along 
with  the  fact. 

We  all  possess,  to  some  extent,  either  con- 
sciously or  otherwise,  a  feeling  of  admiration 
for  the  man  who  discovers  a  fact  in  Nature 
and  gives  it  to  the  world.  For  this  reason  we 
are  much  inclined  to  entertain  favorably 
whatever  theories  he  may  be  impelled  to  pre- 
sent along  with  it. 

Therefore,  unless  he  is  exceedingly  explicit 
and  thoughtful  of  the  manner  in  which  he 
distinguishes  his  fact  from  his  theories  and 
speculations  concerning  it,  we  who  follow 
him  fail  to  differentiate  between  them. 

As  a  natural  result  of  these  conditions,  the 
vast  body  of  what  we  have  been  pleased  to 

358 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

designate  as  "Science"  is  made  up  of  a  com- 
paratively few  demonstrated  facts,  mixed 
with  an  enormous  quantity  of  theories,  both 
wise  and  otherwise. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  work,  as  far  as 
may  be  possible,  carefully  to  differentiate  be- 
tween the  facts  of  science  and  the  theories  of 
men  concerning  those  facts.  The  definite 
statements  and  declarations  therein  contained 
may,  therefore,  be  accepted  and  classified 
under  the  head  of  "Facts  Demonstrated." 

The  specific  intent  is  to  outline  as  accu- 
rately and  as  carefully  as  possible  a  few  of 
the  most  important  theories  which  the  Wise 
Men  of  the  ages  on  both  planes  of  life  have 
formulated  relative  to  some  of  the  facts 
statwd  in  the  preceding  volumes. 

The  only  reason  or  excuse  for  presenting 
these  theories  at  all  in  connection  with  this 
work  is  that  they  will  doubtless  give  to  the 
intelligent  student  a  valuable  suggestion  as 
to  the  specific  lines  of  inquiry  along  which 
the  most  enlightened  scientific  intelligence 
throughout  the  ages  has  been  and  still  is 
moving. 

It  is  stated  as  an  unqualified  fact  of  science 

359 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

that  animals,  in  the  course  of  the  years,  dis- 
appear from  the  spiritual  plane  of  the  ani- 
mal kingdom,  and  that  they  do  not  reappear 
(at  least  in  identical  or  distinguishable  form) 
upon  any  of  the  planes  of  spiritual  life  which 
are  distinctively  related  to  this  particular 
planet. 

The  natural  inquiry  of  every  intelligent 
mind  is,  "What  becomes  of  them?''  The  in- 
quiry thus  far  remains  unanswered  so  far  as 
science  is  concerned.  The  Wise  Men  of  both 
the  physical  and  spiritual  planes  of  life  have 
brought  to  bear  upon  the  problem  all  the 
knowledge  and  intelligence  they  possess.  Thus 
far,  however,  the  scientific  demonstration  lies 
beyond  the  limits  of  their  understanding. 

With  a  view  to  its  possible  solution,  how- 
ever, the  following  widely  different  hypoth- 
eses have  been  made  the  bases  of  their  study 
and  investigation: 

FIRST  HYPOTHESIS 

It  is  assumed  that  the  disappearance  is  but 
a  transition  in  the  upward  movement  of  the 
individual  ego,  or  entity,  in  its  evolutionary 
progress  toward  a  higher  state  of  individual- 
ized intelligence  and  being. 

360 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

This  theory  involves  the  process  of  me- 
tempsychosis or  transmigration,  through  the 
operation  of  which  the  animal  ego  is  sup- 
posed to  be  transferred  from  the  spiritual 
plane  to  the  physical  organism  of  a  higher  or- 
der of  life  and  intelligence  upon  the  physical 
plane.  Here  again  it  undergoes  the  progres- 
sive processes  of  physical  grov^th,  develop- 
ment, maturity,  decline,  old  age  and  death, 
at  v^hich  last  named  point  it  returns  again  to 
the  spiritual  plane  one  round  higher  in  the 
evolutionary  process. 

Again,  it  is  supposed  to  disappear  from  the 
spiritual  plane  and  reappear  in  a  higher  order 
of  physical  life,  only  to  go  through  the  same 
process  of  physical  grovv^th,  development, 
maturity,  decline,  old  age,  decay  and  death 
and  reappearance  upon  the  spiritual  plane  of 
animal  life,  each  time  representing  a  higher 
order  of  individualized  intelligence  and 
being. 

This  evolutionary  process  is  supposed  to 
continue  until  the  highest  form  of  individ- 
ualized animal  intelligence  disappears  from 
the  spiritual  plane  of  animal  life,  only  to 
make  its  appearance  upon  the  physical  plane 

361 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

in  the  lowest  form  of  human  life  and  in- 
telligence. 

To  the  foregoing  general  theory,  or  work- 
ing hypothesis,  the  reader  will  be  able  to 
trace  a  number  of  the  most  conspicuous  and 
interesting  tenets  of  both  theology  and  science 
as  well  as  of  ancient  philosophies. 

For  illustration: 

1.  We  have  the  doctrine  of  the  transmi- 
gration of  souls.  This  doctrine,  as  it  has  ap- 
peared from  time  to  time  upon  the  physical 
plane,  is  evidently  referable  to  the  foregoing 
theory,  or  working  hypothesis  of  the  Wise 
Men,  concerning  the  disappearance  of  the 
animal  from  the  spiritual  plane  of  animal 
life.  But  it  has  also  undoubtedly  become  con- 
fused with,  or  modified  by,  that  other  general 
theory  of  the  Wise  Men  concerning  the  dis- 
appearance of  man  from  the  lowest  plane  of 
his  spiritual  life,  to  which  theory  reference 
will  be  made  further  on. 

This  is  suggested  as  a  most  natural  conclu- 
sion for  the  reason  that  the  doctrine  of  trans- 
migration, as  it  is  generally  expounded  upon 
the  earth  plane,  does  not  stop  with  the  ani- 
mal, but  also  includes  man.     That  is  to  say, 

362 


I 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

under  this  particular  form  of  that  doctrine 
it  is  generally  held  that  the  soul  of  man  also 
may,  at  physical  death,  enter  the  physical  or- 
ganism of  an  animal,  and  that  such  an  act  is 
not  necessarily  a  retrograde  movement  on 
the  part  of  the  intelligent  entity. 

A  still  further  corruption  of  the  original 
theory  is  found  in  the  doctrine,  or  assump- 
tion, that  transmigration  always  occurs  at  the 
instant  of  physical  dissolution,  and  at  no 
other  time. 

2.  The  doctrine  of  Transubstantiation  is 
doubtless  also  referable  to  the  same  general 
source.  Under  this  doctrine  the  Catholic 
Church  has  formulated  the  dogma  that,  in 
their  celebration  of  the  sacrament  of  the 
Lord's  Supper,  the  literal  substance  of  the 
body  and  the  blood  of  Christ  enters  into  the 
bread  and  wine  used  in  the  sacramental 
service. 

3.  On  the  purely  physical  plane  the  doc- 
trine of  the  physical  evolution  of  man  from 
the  plane  of  animal  nature  would  seem  to 
be  but  another  expression  of  the  same  gen- 
eral hypothesis.  The  search  for  the  "Missing 
Link"  in  the  upward  movement  of  organic, 

363 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

physical  evolution  has  been  a  search  made 
upon  the  theory  that  man  is  but  an  ape 
evolved. 

Upon  the  structural  side  of  organic,  phys- 
ical life,  more  especially,  this  theory  is 
strongly  supported  by  an  array  of  scientific 
data  which  no  student  of  Nature  can  afford 
to  ignore.  But  up  to  this  time  even  the  evolu- 
tion of  man's  physical  structure  from  that  of 
the  animal  is  held,  by  able  exponents  of  phys- 
ical science,  to  be  nothing  more  than  a  *Vork- 
ing  hypothesis." 

SECOND  HYPOTHESIS 

The  second  general  hypothesis  of  the  Wise 
Men  and  of  Natural  Science  holds  that  the 
disappearance  of  the  animal  from  the  spir- 
itual plane  is,  indeed,  all  that  it  appears  to 
be,  namely,  total  disintegration,  dissolution 
and  a  resolution  of  the  animal  entity  back  into 
Nature's  elements,  from  which  it  came.  This, 
of  course,  means  total  extinction  of  the  animal 
as  a  separate,  distinct  and  individualized 
entity. 

At  first  view  this  hypothesis  would  appear 
to  be  in  direct  conflict  with  the  very  essence 
of  the  evolutionary  principle.    But  a  further 

364 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

study  and  analysis  of  the  subject  show  that 
such  is  not  the  case. 

Under  this  second  general  hypothesis,  in  all 
this  upward  movement  of  Nature  wc  name 
"evolution,"  Universal  Intelligence  is  en- 
gaged in  the  process  of  individualizing  intel- 
ligence. The  one  object  or  purpose  of  this  in- 
dividualizing process,  as  it  appears,  is  ulti- 
mately to  evolve  an  order  of  intelligence 
which  shall  possess  the  knowledge  and  the 
power  of  indefinite  self-perpetuation  which 
is  known  to  science  as  Individual  Immor- 
tality. 

In  the  animal  organism  Nature  has  not 
yet  reached  a  point  in  the  evolutionary  pro- 
cess where  the  entity  possesses  that  power. 
As  a  natural  result  the  animal  disappears 
from  the  spiritual  plane  of  animal  life  in  re- 
sponse to  the  law  of  its  being,  and,  if  the 
hypothesis  be  true,  is  resolved  back  into  Na- 
ture's elements  from  which  it  came. 

If  this  be  true,  the  student  is  ready  to  ask, 
What,  then,  is  the  purpose  of  all  the  grada- 
tions of  animal  life,  running  from  the  amoeba 
to  the  anthropoid  ape? 

The  answer   in  brief   is,  that  in   all  this 

365 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

multiplicity  of  animal  life,  running  through 
all  its  varied  gradations,  from  the  lowest  to 
the  highest,  we  see  only  the  mechanics  of  a 
stupendous  plan  by  and  through  which  Uni- 
versal Intelligence  refines  and  raises  the  vi- 
bratory activity  of  matter  on  both  planes  of 
life,  until  it  is  capable  of  co-ordination  with 
the  Soul  Element  of  Nature,  which  is  indi- 
vidualized in  man  alone. 

THIRD  HYPOTHESIS 

In  "Facts  Demonstrated,"  it  is  stated  that 
man  disappears  from  the  lowest  plane  of  his 
spiritual  life  by  either  one  of  two  diflferent 
processes,  and  in  response  to  the  operation  of 
two  different  and  opposite  principles: 

1.  Under  the  constructive  principle  and 
process  of  evolution,  growth,  development 
and  progress,  he  disappears  only  to  appear 
upon  a  higher  plane,  etc. 

2.  Under  the  opposite  principle  and  pro- 
cess of  destruction  or  devolution  he  also  dis- 
appears in  a  manner  which  corresponds,  in 
every  essential  particular,  with  the  disappear- 
ance of  the  animal. 

It  is  also  stated  that  in  this  second  case  he 
does  not  reappear    (at  least  in  identical  or 

366 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

distinguishable  form) ,  upon  any  of  the  higher 
planes  of  spiritual  life  which  are  distinctively 
related  to  this  particular  planet. 

The  question  of  his  destiny  as  an  individual 
intelligence  in  this  case  is  a  matter  of  even 
more  absorbing  and  vital  interest  to  those 
who  have  undertaken  its  solution,  than  is  the 
destiny  of  the  animal. 

But  here  again  Nature  seems  to  hold  a 
secret. 

Nevertheless,  two  working  hypotheses  or 
theories  have  been  formulated. 

The  first  of  these  holds  that  man  may,  of 
his  own  volition,  pursue  a  deliberate  course 
of  retrogression  in  conformity  with  the  De- 
structive Principle  of  Nature  in  Individual 
Life,  until  he  reaches  the  point  in  the  down- 
ward path  toward  spiritual  darkness,  where 
he  disappears  as  does  the  animal.  But,  ac- 
cording to  the  theory  here  under  considera- 
tion, this  fact  does  not  necessarily  involve  his 
individual  extinction  or  dissolution  as  an  indi- 
vidual intelligence  or  entity.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  is  held  that  he  simply  falls  below  the 
point  of  co-ordination  with  the  Soul  Element 
of  Nature,  thereby  loses  his  independent,  self- 

367 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

conscious  and  rational  volition,  and  reverts  to 
the  plane  of  animal  life. 

Here  he  begins  the  evolutionary  struggle 
under  the  guiding  wisdom  and  power  of 
Universal  Intelligence,  until  once  again  he 
reaches  the  plane  of  human  life.  Here  he 
co-ordinates  with  the  Soul  Element  of  Na- 
ture, is  reinvested  with  an  independent,  self- 
conscious  and  rational  volition  and  given  an- 
other opportunity  to  choose  between  the  two 
alternatives  of  evolutionary  progress  on  the 
one  hand  or  devolutionary  retrogression  on 
the  other.  It  is  still  within  his  power  to 
choose  the  downward  path.  If  so,  and  he 
persists  in  that  choice,  he  must  again  descend 
to  the  plane  of  animal  life  and  begin  anew 
the  evolutionary  struggle  under  the  guiding 
direction  of  Universal  Intelligence. 

This  process  is  supposed  to  be  repeated  as 
often  as  may  be  necessary  to  develop  in  him 
the  natural  desire  for  the  higher  life,  after 
which  he  proceeds  of  his  own  voluntary 
choice  on  the  upward  course  of  individual 
self-development  to  that  celestial  destiny  of 
individual  attainment  and  power  which  lie 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

beyond  the  limits  of  our  present  understand- 
ing. 

The  opposite  hypothesis  holds  that  no  mat- 
ter from  what  heights  man  may  descend,  if 
he  persist  in  his  downward  flight  until  he 
loses  his  independent,  self-conscious  and  ra- 
tional volition,  under  the  law  of  his  being  he 
thereby  forever  forfeits  the  power  of  self- 
perpetuation  and  Individual  Immortality. 

In  this  case  his  disappearance  from  the 
spiritual  plane  means  to  him  precisely  what 
it  means  to  the  animal  under  the  Second  Hy- 
pothesis, namely,  disintegration,  dissolution, 
individual  extinction  and  a  resolution  back 
into  Nature's  elements  from  which  he  came. 

FOURTH  HYPOTHESIS 
,  It  is  well  known  that  theologians  widely 
differ  in  their  views  concerning  the  ultimate 
destiny  of  the  persistent  sinner.  Their  dif- 
ferences hinge,  in  a  general  way,  upon  their 
various  understandings  and  conceptions  of 
man's  immortality. 

Without  taking  into  account  the  intermedi- 
ate shadings,  there  are  two  general,  theologi- 
cal dogmas  concerning  the  immortality  of 
the  Soul,  which,  briefly  stated,  are  as  follows: 

369 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

1.  That  man  is  inherently,  intrinsically  and 
essentially  immortal.  That  he  is  so  created. 
That  immortality  is  a  primary  and  essential 
property  or  characteristic  of  his  individual 
being.  That  whether  saved  or  lost,  in  a  re- 
ligious sense,  he  is  in  either  event  immortal 
and  therefore  can  never  die  nor  lose  his  indi- 
viduality. 

From  this  particular  conception  of  the 
soul's  immortality  naturally  follows  the  doc- 
trine of  eternal  happiness  for  the  saved,  and 
never-ending  torture  for  the  damned. 

2.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  held  that  the 
soul  is  not  inherently  and  essentially  im- 
mortal, but  that  it  may  become  so  by  con- 
forming to  the  law  of  God — or  Nature — upon 
which  individual  immortality  depends. 

In  other  words,  under  this  theological  con- 
ception man's  immortality  comes  to  him  as 
the  gift  of  God.  It  is  the  reward  of  his  obedi- 
ence to  God's  commands.  Or,  from  the  philo- 
sophic standpoint,  it  comes  to  him  as  the  nat- 
ural result  of  his  own  personal  effort.  It  is 
the  logical  and  necessary  result  of  his  obedi- 
ence to  the  constructive  principle  of  Nature 
which  is  the  law  of  individual  life. 

370 


THE  GENESIS  OF  DOGMA 

From  this  conception  of  the  soul's  immor- 
tality it  follows  that  the  man  who  does  not 
earn  it,  or  who  does  not  receive  it  as  a  gift 
from  God,  is  necessarily  a  mere  mortal  and 
nothing  more.  In  this  case  when  death  over- 
takes him  he  goes  down  to  the  grave,  is  eaten 
by  the  worms  of  the  earth,  his  spiritual  as 
well  as  his  physical  body  is  resolved  back  into 
Nature's  elements,  and  he  perishes  forever. 

In  this  view  of  the  subject,  "The  Wages  of 
Sin  is  Death,"  and  death  in  this  case  means 
total,  individual  extinction. 

The  reader  is  reminded  that  this  is  a  state- 
ment of  ''theories"  only.  In  it  general  hypoth- 
eses have  been  briefly  but  carefully  stated. 
They  are  presented  without  comment  for 
what  they  may  be  worth.  No  attempt  has 
been  made  to  prejudice  the  mind  in  favor  of 
or  against  any  of  them.  On  the  contrary,  it  is 
suggested  that  even  those  who  have  at  com- 
mand all  the  facts  and  all  the  data  thus  far 
accumulated  bearing  upon  the  subject  are 
still  withholding  judgment. 

These  four  theories  are  here  presented 
merely  as  a  suggestion  concerning  the  partic- 
ular lines  of  thought  and  inquiry  which  have 

371 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

engaged  the  attention  of  those  students  of 
Natural  Science  who  have  endeavored  to 
solve  the  great  and  absorbing  problem  of  the 
ultimate  destiny  of  animal  and  degenerate 
human  life  and  intelligence. 

About  these  four  theories  cluster  an  al- 
most endless  number  of  religious  and  philo- 
sophic speculations,  opinions  and  beliefs 
which  have  occupied  the  minds  of  theologians 
and  laymen,  physical  scientists  and  their  stu- 
dents, philosophers  and  thinkers  all  down  the 
ages,  so  far  as  we  are  able  to  follow  the  au- 
thentic history  of  civilization. 

A  few  of  the  more  conspicuous  of  these  in- 
numerable opinions  and  beliefs  have  been 
stated,  and  their  relation  to  the  fundamental 
hypotheses  of  Natural  Science  suggested. 
These,  it  is  hoped,  will  be  of  value,  in  that 
they  may,  in  some  measure,  lead  to  a  clearer 
understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  man- 
ner in  which  a  perfectly  legitimate  scientific 
hypothesis  may  be  made  the  basis  of  innum- 
erable religious  dogmas  and  philosophic 
speculations  which  only  serve  to  confuse  the 
minds  and  warp  the  lives  of  the  unscientific 
and  the  ignorant. 

S72 


UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS 


The  following  problems  reach  out  into  a 
realm  of  inquiry  beyond  the  limits  of  definite 
human  knowledge.  For  this  reason  they  do 
not  fall  within  the  limitations  of  "What  Sci- 
ence Knows  of  the  Spiritual  World." 

Although  the  following  statements  may 
not  entirely  satisfy  the  demands  of  the  critical, 
scientific  inquirer,  nevertheless,  they  betray  a 
degree  and  quality  of  intelligence  which  can- 
not fail  to  awaken  profound  respect  in  the 
mind  of  any  honest  searcher  for  Truth. 
Hence,  they  are  given  only  for  what  they  may 
be  worth  to  the  individual  reader,  and  are  not 
to  be  taken  as  anything  more  than  an  eflfort 
to  enlighten  the  inquirer  as  to  the  process  of 
reason  employed  by  the  Great  Friends  on 
some  of  the  most  abstruse  problems  of  Nature, 
too  deep  for  scientific  solution — as  yet. 
FIRST  PROBLEM 

Does  the  human  Soul  always  inhabit  a 
material  body  through  which  to  manifest 
itself?    In  other  words,  is  it  possible  for  the 

373 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

human  Soul  to  manifest  itself,  its  presence, 
its  activities,  or  its  powers,  in  any  other  way 
than  through  the  agency  of  a  material  body? 

So  far  as  we  know,  it  cannot.  What  we  do 
know  is  that  the  only  authentic  knowledge  we 
have  concerning  the  individual  Soul  of  man 
is  that  which  we  obtain  through  its  manifesta- 
tions. And,  the  only  manifestations  of  which 
we  are  definitely  and  positively  conscious  are 
those  which  express  themselves  through  the 
material  body,  or  bodies,  it  occupies  at  the 
time. 

Upon  the  physical  plane  of  life,  the  only 
positive  knowledge  we  have  of  our  fellow 
human  beings  is  that  which  we  obtain 
through  the  fact  that  they  inhabit  physical 
bodies  by  means  of  which  they  manifest  their 
existence  and  activities  to  us.  Through  these 
physical  bodies  alone,  and  the  organs  they 
furnish  the  Soul  for  its  use  in  expressing  it- 
self, we  have  learned  all  that  we  now  know 
concerning  the  individual  Soul  within,  or 
connected  with,  each  of  such  physical  bodies. 

The  same  is  just  as  true  upon  the  spiritual 
planes  of  life.  All  we  know  of  the  individual 
Souls  of  men  and  women  on  the  spiritual  side 

S74 


UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS 

of  life  is  what  we  learn  of  them  through  their 
material  manifestations;  and  they  manifest 
themselves  to  us  on  the  spiritual  side  only 
through  their  spiritual  bodies. 

And,  so  far  as  we  know  upon  the  spiritual 
planes  of  life,  it  is  impossible  for  the  Soul  to 
manifest  itself  in  any  other  way  than  through 
the  agency  of  a  material  body  fitted  for  ex- 
pression on  the  plane  upon  which  it  mani- 
fests itself.  A  Soul  without  a  material  body 
is  a  phenomenon  of  which  we  have  no 
knowledge.  And  yet,  we  do  not  assert,  with 
dogmatic  certainty,  that  such  a  phenomenon 
is  impossible.  The  most  we  can  say  is  that 
we  have  no  knowledge  which  would  sustain 
such  an  assertion,  or  suggestion,  and  no  evi- 
dence that  would  sustain  or  justify  such  a 
conclusion. 

Moreover,  the  wisest  of  our  Great  Teach- 
ers upon  the  spiritual  planes  of  life,  have  no 
knowledge  or  information  that  would  even 
seem  to  justify  any  other  conclusion  than  that 
which  I  have  indicated. 

SECOND  PROBLEM 
In  the  King  James  version  of  the  Bible 
there  are  found  a  number  of  references  to  the 

375 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

"second  death."  This  would  seem  to  indicate 
that  the  Ancient  Wise  Men  looked  upon  what 
we  now  term  "physical  death"  as  a  first  death. 
This  of  itself  would  seem  to  infer  that  they 
knew  something  of  another  death  than  that 
of  the  physical  body.  Indeed,  the  matter  is 
not  left  in  doubt  or  uncertainty,  for  they  had 
in  mind  some  very  grave  and  important  event 
which  they  named  "The  Second  Death."  This 
so-called  "Second  Death"  has  been  inter- 
preted by  some  of  our  modern  religionists  to 
mean  "Spiritual  Death." 

There  are  instances  in  which  the  individ- 
ual does  not  seem  to  be  ready  to  proceed 
at  once  to  climb  the  ladder  of  spiritual  evolu- 
tion. Where  this  is  true,  when  physical  death 
occurs  the  individual  stops  in  the  magnetic 
field.  If  he  continues  in  that  attitude  of 
Soul  he  remains  there,  gradually  but  surely 
growing  weaker,  until  the  Soul  finally  with- 
draws and  disappears  from  view  entirely. 

In  these  cases  the  spiritual  body  speedily 
disintegrates  and  is  resolved  back  into  its  orig- 
inal elements,  analogous  to  the  dissolution  of 
the  physical  body.     We  do  not  know  what 

S7( 


UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS 

becomes  of  the  Soul  in  these  instances.  This 
is  one  of  the  many  unsolved  problems. 

I  have  a  very  definite  conviction,  however, 
that  somewhere  locked  within  the  innermost 
recesses  of  this  great  problem,  is  contained 
one  of  those  profound  secrets  of  Nature  which 
it  is  not  in  the  interests  of  the  race  to  disclose 
to  any  of  us — until  we  shall  have  attained  to 
an  exalted  degree  of  wisdom,  such  that  it  will 
enable  us  to  make  use  of  that  knowledge  only 
for  the  best  good  of  humanity. 

While  this  last  described  process — or  seem- 
ing spiritual  death — would  appear,  upon  its 
face,  to  represent  a  distinctly  retrograde 
movement  of  the  individual  Soul,  I  do  not 
hesitate  to  say  that  I  cannot  bring  myself  to 
believe  it  means  the  ''death"  or  ''extinction" 
of  the  Soul  itself.  I  say  this  only  because, 
according  to  my  own  way  of  interpreting  the 
Law  and  the  Processes  of  Nature,  there  is, 
and  there  can  be,  no  such  thing  in  Nature  as 
the  total  extinction  of  any  intelligent  Individ- 
uality.   Let  me  explain  myself  more  fully: 

Our  physical  scientists  have  found  that,  in 
the  sublime  economy  of  physical  Nature,  no 
provision  has  been  made  whereby  it  is  possi- 

377 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

ble  for  even  the  smallest  individual  particle 
of  matter  to  be  totally  annihilated  and  de- 
stroyed. They  base  their  conclusion  upon 
their  know^ledge  of  the  fundamental  Law  of 
the  Conservation  of  Energy. 

If  their  conclusion  is  correct  as  to  physical 
matter,  how  much  more  vital  it  is,  in  the 
economy  of  higher  Nature,  that  the  same  Law 
should  apply  to  the  spiritual  universe. 

While  I  do  not  even  claim  to  know,  yet  I 
am  firmly  convinced  that  the  disappearance 
of  the  Individuality,  or  Soul,  in  the  case  re- 
ferred to,  means  only  that  we  are  unable  to 
follow  it  in  its  evolutionary  migration;  but 
that  it  still  persists  as  an  individualized  In- 
telligence, and  will  continue  to  exist,  as  such, 
throughout  eternity. 

Accept  this,  however,  as  my  personal  con- 
clusion— drawn  from  such  facts  of  Nature,  as 
I  have  been  able  to  verify — and  not  as  the 
authorized  instruction  of  Natural  Science. 
THIRD  PROBLEM 

Can  a  spiritual  being  commit  suicide? 

There  is  a  process  by  which  a  spiritually 
embodied  individual  on  the  spiritual  side  of 
life  may   accomplish   the  dissolution  of  his 

378 


UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS 

Spiritual  body  on  any  given  spiritual  plane  to 
which  he  has  attained.  In  a  sense,  this  might 
be  called  "suicide,"  on  that  particular  plane, 
but  it  does  not  mean  the  death  of  the  Soul.  The 
result  here  suggested  can  be  accomplished 
simply  by  reversing  the  course  of  his  life  from 
that  of  spiritual  evolution  to  the  destructive 
process  of  spiritual  devolution.  If  he  should 
adopt  a  destructive  and  devolutionary  course 
of  life  and  persist  in  it  long  enough  he  would, 
in  course  of  time,  reach  a  point  when  and 
where  he  no  longer  could  maintain  himself 
upon  that  particular  plane  of  spiritual  life. 
In  that  event,  his  spiritual  body  for  that  par- 
ticular plane  dies  and  the  individual  himself 
disappears  from  the  view  of  his  fellows. 

Moreover,  he  does  not  reappear  upon  any 
higher  spiritual  plane,  because  he  has  not 
built  himself  a  spiritual  body  finer  than  the 
one  which  he  has  dissolved  and  disinte- 
grated. Neither  can  he  fall  back  upon  the 
next  lower  spiritual  plane,  for  the  reason  that 
he  has  cast  off  the  spiritual  body  which  be- 
longs to  that  plane  and  to  all  planes  below 
him. 

What  becomes  of  him?    We  do  not  know 

379 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

positively,  for  it  is  not  possible  to  follow  the 
individual  Soul  of  man,  except  as  it  mani- 
fests itself  through  a  material  body  on  some 
definite  plane  of  life.  But  we  have  a  theory 
concerning  the  matter.  We  believe  that  in 
such  cases  the  individual  drops  entirely  out 
of  the  spiritual  planes  of  life  and,  by  the  in- 
voluntary process  of  Nature,  is  reincarnated 
in  human  form  upon  the  physical  plane  of 
earth.  Indeed,  this  is  one  of  the  incidents  of 
life  which  seems  to  us  to  have  no  other  ade- 
quate explanation  than  that  of  Reincarnation. 

Hence,  we  assume  that,  while  it  is  pos- 
sible for  an  individual  upon  the  spiritual 
side  of  life  to  cause  the  dissolution  of  its 
spiritual  body  through  the  destructive  process 
of  devolution,  at  the  same  time,  we  are  wont 
to  account  for  the  disappearance  of  the  in- 
dividual Soul  through  the  process  of  Rein- 
carnation upon  a  lower  plane  of  life — par- 
ticularly the  earth  plane. 

There  are  those  upon  the  physical  plane 
of  life  who  die  under  conditions  which  cause 
the  entire  disappearance  of  the  individual 
from  all  our  knowledge.  He  does  not  appear 
upon  the  first  spiritual  plane,  nor  even  in  the 

380 


UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS 

magnetic  field.  He  simply  disappears  and 
we  are  unable  to  follow  either  his  course  or 
his  condition.  While  we  do  not  know  posi- 
tively what  becomes  of  the  individual  Soul, 
or  the  essential  Spark  of  Individuality,  we 
feel  justified  in  assuming  that  it  follows  the 
same  general  course  suggested  by  the  disap- 
pearance from  the  spiritual  planes  through 
the  devolutionary  process.  If  our  conclusion 
is  correct,  then  there  is  but  one  answer  as  to 
where  the  individual  has  gone.  He  must 
have  reincarnated  in  some  lower  level  of  life 
upon  the  human  plane  of  earth.  He  may  have 
fallen  even  below  the  plane  of  human  life 
entirely,  and  found  his  natural  level  in  the 
plane  of  animal  life  below  that  of  the  human. 
At  least,  this  is  the  theory  of  many  scien- 
tists upon  the  spiritual  side  of  life,  as  well  as 
upon  the  physical  plane.  Doubtless  a  time 
will  come  when  this  mystery  will  be  solved 
through  definite  scientific  knowledge,  as 
have  so  many  others  concerning  the  evolu- 
tionary march  of  the  human  Soul  toward  its 
ultimate  goal  of  Self-Completion,  Individual 
Completion  and  Perfect  Happiness. 

381 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 

FOURTH  PROBLEM 

Can  a  spiritual  individual  on  this  planet 
travel  in  interplanetary  space? 

Now  and  then  we  come  in  contact  with  in- 
dividuals upon  the  various  spiritual  planes 
who  tell  us  they  were  never  born  upon  the 
physical  plane  of  this  planet.  We  are  told 
that  they  had  their  physical  birth  upon  some 
other  planet  than  this.  And  there  is  that  in 
their  appearance  which  would  seem  to  indi- 
cate that  they  do  not  naturally  belong  to  this 
earth,  as  do  those  of  us  who  pass  into  the  spir- 
itual life  through  the  plane  of  earth  by  the 
process  of  physical  death.  They  seem  to  rep- 
resent a  distinct  type  which  does  not  conform 
to  any  of  the  well-defined  types  of  earth. 

These  are  called  "Interplanetary-Spiritual 
Beings,"  which  would  seem  to  indicate  that 
they  may  have  had  their  physical  birth  upon 
some  other  less  developed  planet  than  the 
earth,  and,  after  having  made  the  spiritual 
rounds  of  their  own  native  planet,  have 
evolved  to  a  point  where  they  have  been  able 
to  overcome  the  gravitative  influence  of  their 
own  planet,  and  have  come  to  this  earth  as  the 


UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS 

next  regular  step  in  the  pathway  of  their  evo- 
lutionary development. 

But  this  is  a  subject  concerning  which  the 
Wise  Spiritual  Intelligences  seldom  speak,  be- 
cause they  do  not  feel  that  they  are,  as  yet, 
sufficiently  learned  to  speak  with  certainty. 

When  an  individual  has  evolved  until  he 
normally  belongs  on  the  sixth  spiritual  plane, 
he  has  overcome  the  gravitative  influence  of 
the  earth,  and  is  no  longer  absolutely  bound 
by  the  Law  of  Gravity  to  the  earth's  center. 
Having  thus  overcome  the  pull  of  gravity  to- 
ward the  center  of  the  earth,  it  is  possible  for 
him  to  get  away  from  the  planet  and  travel 
in  interplanetary  spaces. 

Such  as  these  are  said  to  gather  much 
knowledge  of  Nature  out  in  the  infinite 
spaces  beyond  the  limits  of  this  one  little 
planet  we  call  "earth." 

If  this  be  true,  then  it  is  quite  possible  that 
individuals  from  either  the  seventh,  eighth. 
ninth,  tenth,  eleventh,  twelfth,  or  thirteenth 
planes,  could  travel  in  interplanetary  space. 

This,  however,  is  not  given  as  any  definite 
part  of  "What  Science  Knows  of  the  Spir- 
itual World."    It  is  only  passed  along,  for 

383 


THE  GREAT  KNOWN 


what  it  may  be  worth  to  the  individual 
reader,  as  a  part  of  the  reports  that  are 
handed  from  the  higher  planes  of  spiritual 
life  beyond  our  present  limitations. 


384 


TKe    following    pages    contain    a 

t  statement  of  the  publications  of  j 
The  Great  School  of  Natural  Science.   I 


Harmonics  of  Evolution 

By  FLORENCE  HUNTLEY 
Edited  by  TK. 


Vol.  I 
HARMONIC  SERIES 


The  Chicago  Tribune  says  of  this  book:  "A  woman 
has  entered  the  lists  against  the  most  profound  thinkers 
of  the  age.  She  has  written  a  book  which  tjeats  of 
things  which  have  puzzled  the  greatest  minds  since  the 
days  of  Pythagoras  to  Herbert  Spencer.  That  it  should 
be  done  by  a  woman  is  remarkable;  that  it  should  be 
done  so  well  is  extraordinary." 

This  book  is  a  statement  of  the  philosophy  of  Indi- 
vidual Life,  as  taught  by  the  modern  Masters  of  the 
Law. 

Natural  Science,  which  is  the  basis  of  this  philosophy, 
is  an  exact  science  and  not  a  theory. 

It  explains  Nature's  selective  principle. 

It  covers  that  universal  principle  in  Nature  of  individ- 
ual Evolution  which  operates  throughout  the  mineral, 
vegetable,  animal  and  human  kingdoms. 

It  is  a  complete  exposition  of  Nature's  Evolution, 
throiigh  the  Principle  of  Polarity,  and  Man's  Struggle 
for  Happiness. 

"There  is  no  death." 

"Life  after  physical  death  is  a  fact  scientifically  demon- 
strable" 

"Life  here  and  hereafter  has  a  common  development 
and  a  common  purpose." 

Cloth,  $3.00  Leather,  $5.00 


The  Great  Psychological 
Crime 

By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK. 

Vol.   II 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


The  book  is  a  masterpiece  of  consistent  statement  and 
logical  development. 

The  subject  of  Insanity  is  daily  assuming  greater  im- 
portance. At  least  58  per  cent  of  the  so-called  Insane 
can  be  absolutely  cured.  This  book  tells  how  and  why 
this  is  true.  It  makes  clear  many  of  the  greatest  puz- 
zles of  medical  science. 

This  is  the  book  which  shows  how  and  why  those  who 
seek,  by  means  of  experiments  with  Hypnotism,  Spirit- 
ualism and  Mediumship,  to  prove  that  there  is  another 
life  after  death,  fail  to  accomplish  it  scientifically,  fail 
to  get  the  satisfaction  they  seek,  and  end  in  insane 
asylums. 

The  author's  analysis  of  Hypnotism  and  Mediumship 
is  masterly  and  complete.  For  fifteen  chapters  by  the 
most  relentless  logic  and  unanswerable  facts,  which  no 
one  has  challenged,  he  proves  that  Subjective  Spiritual 
"Mediumship"  and  Hypnotism  is  vitally  destructive  to 
the  physical  body  and  the  Human  Soul. 

No  orthodox  Christian,  Spiritualist,  Agnostic,  Profes- 
sional Alienist,  Professor  of  Psychology,  nor  Judge  on 
the  bench  should  pass  this  book  unread. 

Every  practicing  physician  owes  it  to  himself  and  the 
community  in  which  he  lives,  to  study  and  weigh  the 
statements  in  this  book ;  for  he  can  no  longer  stultify  his 
conscience  by  opposing  the  demonstrable  facts  of  science; 
because  it  may  not  come  through  the  "regular"  diannelt, 
or  the  particular  school  he  may  happen  to  represent. 

If  you  will  Read,  you  will  know  and  understand. 


Cloth,  $3.00 


LeatlMT,  I5UM 


The  Great  Work 

By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK. 

Vcl.  Ill 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


This  book  carries  a  hope,  a  message,  a  suggestion  and 
a  warning  to  all  who  are  honestly,  patiently  and  persis- 
tently seeking  to  prove  that  Death  does  not  end  all. 

It  shows  that  there  is  a  great  difference  between  Belief 
and  Real  Knowledge,  and  proves  that  mere  beliefs  are 
not  of  any  value  to  the  one  who  would  prove  that  there  is 
a  life  beyond  the  grave.  He  must  Know  and  Do,  and 
this  book  points  the  way. 

It  is  unique  in  that  its  statements  are  verified  facts 
which  every  reader  may  prove  for  himself  under  right 
guidance,  if  he  but  have  the  "Intelligence  to  know,  the 
Courage  to  dare,  and  the  Perseverance  to  do." 

The  philosophy  taught  in  this  book  appeals  to  both 
Reason  and  Conscience,  and  is  an  inspiration  to  "Live 
the  Life  and  Know  the  Law." 

The  science  and  philosophy  it  presents  agree  in  all  es- 
sentials with  the  demonstrated  facts  of  modern  physical 
science,  but  go  beyond  them  into  the  realm  of  the  Spir- 
itual World.  There  it  presents  an  entirely  new  field  of 
personally  demonstrated  facts,  which  enlarges  the  scope 
of  hitherto  accepted  science,  and  points  the  way  to  new 
discoveries. 

In  this,  as  in  any  other  science,  the  investigator  is 
confronted  with  certain  definite  propositions  and  is  given 
a  working  formula  for  their  solution.  In  this,  as  in  any 
other  science,  successful  solution  depends  chiefly  upon  the 
individual  ability,  capacity  and  character  of  the  student. 

Cloth,  $3.00  Leather,  $5.00 


The  Great  Message 

By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK 


Vol.  V 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


Romance,  History,  Science,  Philosophy  are  all  com- 
bined in  this  great  book.  It  traces  with  unerring  logic 
why  all  the  Great  Masters  of  the  Past — Christna,  Mel- 
chizedek,  Buddha,  Aristotle,  Socrates,  Plato,  Jesus, 
Shakespeare,  Lytton — all  taught  the  same  great  Princi- 
ples of  Life. 

The  pathway  of  the  Great  School  of  the  Mas- 
ters is  again  opened  to  Uue  seekers  after  Truth,  and 
only  the  duly  and  truly  prepared,  worthy  and  well  qual- 
ified may  find  the  way  to  its  "Temple  of  Light"  and 
without  money  and  without  price  receive  such  knowl- 
edge as  they  may  merit. 

The  Great  School  of  Natural  Science  is  not  selling 
instruction,  nor  endeavoring  to  secure  converts,  nor  does 
it  solicit  students  and  followers. 

Those  who  find  in  The  Great  Message  an  inspiration 
to  seek  further  will  have  a  new  and  broader  outlook  on 
life,  and  a  renewed  inspiration  to  make  the  most  of  it. 

"Truth  is  stranger  than  fiction,"  and  the  revelation 
of  fact  contained  in  the  Harmonic  Series  is  stranger, 
more  impressive  and  more  fascinating  than  the  call  of 
the  poets  and  the  fictionists. 

Qoth,  I3.Q0  LMthw,  |5U)0 


Harmonic  Booklet 
Series 

Self-Unfoldment 

By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK. 


In  these  two  volumes  the  Great  School  of  Natural 
Science  gives  a  practical  view  of  twelve  vital  problems 
and  principles  of  Individual  Life. 

Each  principle  defined  is  definite  and  tangible — one 
which  the  individual  can  make  practical  use  of,  as  a 
powerful  leverage  back  of  his  efforts  to  reach  the  goal 
of  his  own  Spiritual  Development  and  Self-Completion. 

Vol.  I — Tolerance,  Law  of  Compensation,  Self-Con- 
trol the  Key  to  Mastership,  Poise,  Cheerfulness,  Cura- 
tive Faith. 

Vol.  II  —  Faith  and  Works,  A  Saving  Sense  of 
Humor,  Refinement,  Altruism,  Life,  Wisdom. 


$2.00  Each 


Harmonic  Complemental 
Series 


Who  Answers  Prayer? 

by  PO,  RA,  TK 


What  Is  Prayer? 

For  UTiat  Should  We  Pray? 

To  Whom  Should  We  Pray? 

11.00 


i 


Harmonic  Magazine 

The  Great  Work  In 
America 

A  monthly  magazine  which  co-ordinate*  the  known 
facts  and  principles  of  physical  Nature  with  the  demon- 
strated facts  and  principles  of  spiritual  Nature. 

$3.25  per  year 


PIONEER  PRESS 

HOLLYWOOD,  CALIF. 


The  Great  Message 


By  J.  E.  RICHARDSON,  TK. 


Vol.  V 

HARMONIC  SERIES 


Romance,  -History,  Science,  Philosophy  are  all 
combined  in  this  great  book.  It  traces  with  unerr- 
ing logic  why  all  the  Great  Masters  of  the  Past — 
Christna,  Melchizedek,  Buddha,  Aristotle,  Socrates, 
Plato,  Jesus,  Shakespeare,  Lytton— all  taught  the 
same  great  Principles  of  Life. 

The  pathway  of  the  Great  School  of  the 
Masters  is  again  opened  to  true  seekers  after 
Truth,  and  only  the  duly  and  truly  prepared, 
worthy  and  well  qualified  may  find  the  wa\-  to  its 
"Temple  of  Light"  and  without  money  and  with- 
out price  receive  such  knowledge  as  they  may 
merit. 

The  Great  School  of  Natural  Science  is  not  sell- 
ing instruction,  nor  endeavoring  to  secure  converts, 
nor  does  it  solicit  students  and  followers. 

Those  who  find  in  The  Great  Message  an  in- 
spiration to  seek  further  will  have  a  new  and 
broader  outlook  on  life,  and  a  renewed  inspiration 
to  make  the  most  of  it. 

"Truth  is  stranger  than  fiction,"  and  the  revela- 
tion of  fact  contained  in  the  Harmonic  Series  is 
stranger,  more  impressive  and  more  fascinating 
than  the  call  of  the  poets  and  the  fictionists. 

$3j60 


"The  Boston  Herald"*  says  editorially  that  these  are 

''Books  that  Change  the  Course  of  Human  Lives ' 

Harmonic  Literature 


Harmonic  Series 

Vol.      I.  Harmonics  of  Evolution,  Florence  Huntley..$3.00 

Vol.    II.  The  Great  Psychological  Crime. \  ^        $3.0t) 

Vol.  III.  The  Great  Work Richardson,^^-^ 

Vol.  IV.  The  Great  Known I        JK.        ^^'^ 

Vol.    V.  The  Great  Message )  $3.00 

Harmonic  Booklet  Series 

v"!-    t}-    ^^!r[^"!°l^"^^":i  J.  E.Richardson,  TK.       f,f,        ' 
Vol.    II.    Self-Unfoldment.  )  •'  ^^M) 

Harmonic  Complemental  Series 

Who  Answers  Prayer?     PO.   RA,  TK  ^I  50 

Harmonic  Magazine 

The  Great  Work   In   America 1    year  $3^ 


PIONEER  PRESS 

HOLLYWOOD.  CALIF. 

se,S66  Spanish  Kpncb  Road,  Los  Gates,  Calif  oral*